C3FT30 Eng

Compax3
Electromechanical Automation
Operating instructions Compax3 Fluid T30: Programmable

motion control according to IEC61131-3
Hydraulics controller
192-121101 N04
June 2008
Release R08-0
Technische nderungen vorbehalten.
18.06.08 14:09
Daten entsprechen dem technischen Stand zum Zeitpunkt der Drucklegung.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
C3F_T30
Introduction
____________________________
Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista are trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation.
Nonwarranty clause
We checked the contents of this publication for compliance with the associated
hard and software. We can, however, not exclude discrepancies and do therefore
not accept any liability for the exact compliance. The information in this publication
is regularly checked, necessary corrections will be part of the subsequent
publications.
Production site:
C
R T I F I E
DIN EN ISO 9001
Q
A
T
IT Y
S
S Y
Reg. Nr. 36 38
Parker Hannifin GmbH & Co. KG

Electromechanical Automation Europe [EME]
Robert-Bosch-Strasse 22
77656 Offenburg (Germany)
Tel.: + 49 (0781) 509-0
Fax: + 49 (0781) 509-98176
Internet: www.parker-automation.com http://www.parker-automation.com
E-mail: [email protected] mailto:[email protected]
Parker Hannifin GmbH & Co. KG - registered office: Bielefeld - Amtsgericht: Bielefeld HRA 14808
Personally liable shareholder: Parker Hannifin Management GmbH - Amtsgericht: Bielefeld HRB 35489
executive board: Dr. Gerd Scheffel, Gnter Schrank, Christian Stein, Kees Veraart, Hans Wolfs - Chairman of the board: Hansgeorg
Greuner
Headquarters:
England:
USA:
Parker Hannifin plc

Arena Business Centre
Holy Rood Close
Poole, Dorset BH17 7FJ UK
Tel.: +44 (0)1202 606300
Fax: +44 (0)1202 606301
E-mail:
[email protected]
mailto:[email protected]
Internet:
www.parker-automation.com
http://www.parker-automation.com
Parker Hannifin Corporation

5500 Business Park Drive
Rohnert Park, CA 94928
Phone #: (800) 358-9068
FAX #: (707) 584-3715
E-mail:
[email protected]
mailto:[email protected]
Internet:
www.compumotor.com
http://www.compumotor.com
Worldwide sales
http://apps.parker.com/divapps/eme/EME/Contact_sites/Sales%20Channel_Parker
-EME.pdf
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Introduction
Contents
1. Introduction.............................................................................................11
1.1
Device assignment Compax3 Fluid T30............................................... 11

1.1.1.
1.2
Type specification plate Compax3 Fluid ........................................................... 12
Safety Instructions................................................................................. 13
1.2.1.
1.2.2.
1.2.3.
General hazards................................................................................................... 13
Safety-conscious working .................................................................................. 13
Special safety instructions ................................................................................. 14
1.3
Warranty conditions .............................................................................. 14
1.4
Conditions of utilization for CE-conform operation............................ 14
2. Positioning with IEC61131-3..................................................................16

3. Compax3F device description...............................................................19
3.1
State of delivery ..................................................................................... 19
3.2
Plug and connector assignment Compax3 Fluid ................................ 19

3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.2.4.
3.2.5.
3.2.6.
3.2.7.
3.2.8.
3.2.9.
3.2.10.
3.2.11.
3.2.12.
3.2.13.
3.2.14.
Meaning of the front panel LEDs (via X10)........................................................ 19

Plug and connector assignment ........................................................................ 20
Plug and connector assignment complete ....................................................... 21
Analog Input (plug X1) ........................................................................................ 23
3.2.4.1 Wiring of the analog inputs ....................................................................... 23
Analog Output (plug X2) ..................................................................................... 24
3.2.5.1 Wiring of analog outputs ........................................................................... 24
Voltage supply (plug X3)..................................................................................... 25
RS232 / RS485 interface (plug X10) ................................................................... 25
Analog / Encoder (plug X11)............................................................................... 26
3.2.8.1 UpdateRate Start/Stop Feedback............................................................. 27
3.2.8.2 Connections of the encoder interface ....................................................... 27
Digital inputs/outputs (plug X12) ....................................................................... 27
3.2.9.1 Connection of the digital Outputs/Inputs................................................... 28
Feedback (connector X13) .................................................................................. 28
3.2.10.1 UpdateRate Start/Stop Feedback............................................................. 29
3.2.10.2 Connections of the encoder interface ....................................................... 29
Profibus connector X23 with Interface I20 ........................................................ 30
3.2.11.1 Adjusting the bus address ........................................................................ 30
3.2.11.2 Function of the Bus LEDs ......................................................................... 30
CANopen connector X23 Interface I21 .............................................................. 31
DeviceNet connector X23.................................................................................... 33
Ethernet Powerlink (Option I30) / EtherCAT (option I31) X23, X24 ................. 34
3.2.14.1 Set Ethernet Powerlink (option I30) bus address ..................................... 35
3.2.14.2 Meaning of the Bus LEDs (Ethernet Powerlink) ....................................... 35
192-121101 N04 June 2008
C3F_T30
Introduction
3.2.15.
3.2.14.3 Meaning of the Bus LEDs (EtherCAT)...................................................... 36

Mounting and dimensions .................................................................................. 38
4. Setting up Compax3...............................................................................39
4.1
Configuration ......................................................................................... 39
4.1.1.
4.1.2.
4.1.3.
4.1.4.
4.1.5.
4.1.6.
4.1.7.
4.1.8.
4.1.9.
4.1.10.
4.1.11.
4.1.12.
4.1.13.
4.1.14.
4.1.15.
4.1.16.
4.1.17.
4.2
Configuring the signal source .............................................................. 80

4.2.1.
4.2.2.
4.2.3.
4.3
Physical Source ................................................................................................... 80

4.2.1.1 Encoder A/B 5V, step/direction or SSI feedback as signal source........... 80
4.2.1.2 +/-10V Master speed ................................................................................ 83
Internal virtual master ......................................................................................... 83
HEDA Master signal source................................................................................ 83
Optimization ........................................................................................... 85
4.3.1.
4.3.2.
C3HydraulicsManager ......................................................................................... 42
4.1.1.1 Function description.................................................................................. 42
4.1.1.2 Structure of the databases........................................................................ 42
Compax3F structure image ................................................................................ 43
Drive configuration.............................................................................................. 44
Configuring drive1............................................................................................... 45
4.1.4.1 Position feedback system drive1 .............................................................. 45
4.1.4.2 Cylinder / motor selection ......................................................................... 46
4.1.4.3 Load configuration drive1 ......................................................................... 46
Configuring drive2............................................................................................... 47
Sensors................................................................................................................. 47
4.1.6.1 Pressure sensors ...................................................................................... 47
4.1.6.2 Force sensor drive 1 ................................................................................. 48
4.1.6.3 Pressure and force sensor drive 2............................................................ 49
Valve configuration ............................................................................................. 49
4.1.7.1 Selection and configuration of the valves ................................................. 50
Defining the reference system ........................................................................... 51
4.1.8.1 Position transducer ................................................................................... 51
4.1.8.2 Machine Zero ............................................................................................ 52
4.1.8.3 Travel Limit Settings ................................................................................. 68
4.1.8.4 Change assignment direction reversal / limit switches ............................. 72
4.1.8.5 Change initiator logic ................................................................................ 72
4.1.8.6 Debouncing: Limit switch, machine zero and input 0 ............................... 72
Ramp upon error and switch to currentless ..................................................... 72
Limit and monitoring settings of force.............................................................. 73
4.1.10.1 Force window - force achieved ................................................................. 73
4.1.10.2 Maximum control deviation of force controller .......................................... 74
4.1.10.3 Maximum force ......................................................................................... 74
4.1.10.4 Hydraulic corner power limitation.............................................................. 74
Positioning window - Position reached........................................................... 75
Following error limit ............................................................................................ 76
Maximum permissible speed.............................................................................. 76
Encoder Simulation ............................................................................................. 77
Recipe table.......................................................................................................... 78
Error response ..................................................................................................... 78
Configuration name / comments........................................................................ 79
Optimization window........................................................................................... 86
Scope .................................................................................................................... 87
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.3.
4.3.4.
4.3.5.
4.3.6.
Introduction
4.3.2.1 Monitor information ................................................................................... 87

4.3.2.2 User interface............................................................................................ 88
4.3.2.3 Example: Setting the Oscilloscope ........................................................... 93
Control Loop Dynamics ...................................................................................... 95
4.3.3.1 Preparatory settings for the controller alignment...................................... 96
4.3.3.2 Signal filtering with external command value ........................................... 100
4.3.3.3 Controller structure of main axis ............................................................... 103
4.3.3.4 Controller strucutre auxiliary axis.............................................................. 104
4.3.3.5 Feedforward main axis (status controller)................................................. 105
4.3.3.6 Feedforward auxiliary axis (status controller) ........................................... 106
4.3.3.7 Position controller main axis (status controller) ........................................ 107
4.3.3.8 Position controller auxiliary axis (status controller)................................... 111
4.3.3.9 Filter main axis.......................................................................................... 114
4.3.3.10 Filter auxiliary axis .................................................................................... 115
4.3.3.11 Analog Input.............................................................................................. 116
4.3.3.12 Force-/Pressure Control main axis ........................................................... 121
4.3.3.13 Force-/Pressure Control auxiliary axis...................................................... 125
4.3.3.14 Output signal conditioning 0 ..................................................................... 129
4.3.3.15 Step-by-step optimization ......................................................................... 136
Input simulation ................................................................................................... 145
4.3.4.1 Calling up the input simulation.................................................................. 145
4.3.4.2 Functionality.............................................................................................. 146
Setup mode .......................................................................................................... 147
4.3.5.1 Motion objects in Compax3 ...................................................................... 148
ProfileViewer for the optimization of the motion profile ................................. 148
4.3.6.1 Mode 1: Time and maximum values are deduced from Compax3
input values............................................................................................... 149
4.3.6.2 Mode 2: Compax3 input values are deduced from times and
maximum values ....................................................................................... 149
5. Motion control.......................................................................................150
5.1
Programming based on IEC61131-3................................................... 150

5.1.1.
5.1.2.
5.1.3.
5.1.4.
5.1.5.
5.1.6.
5.1.7.
5.1.8.
5.1.9.
5.1.10.
5.1.11.
5.1.12.
5.1.13.
5.2
Prerequisites ........................................................................................................ 150

CoDeSys / Compax3 target system (Target Package) ..................................... 151
5.1.2.1 Program development and test................................................................. 151
5.1.2.2 Recipe management................................................................................. 152
Languages supported ......................................................................................... 152
Function range supported .................................................................................. 152
5.1.4.1 Operators supported ................................................................................. 152
5.1.4.2 Standard functions supported................................................................... 153
5.1.4.3 Standard function modules supported ...................................................... 154
Data types supported .......................................................................................... 155
Retain Variables................................................................................................... 155
Recipe table with 9 columns and 32 lines......................................................... 155
Maximum program size....................................................................................... 156
Cycle time ............................................................................................................. 156
Access to the Compax3 object directory .......................................................... 156
Compilation, debugging and down/upload of IEC61131 programs ............... 157
General rules / timing .......................................................................................... 158
Library constants................................................................................................. 159
Status diagrams ................................................................................... 160

5.2.1.
Status diagram of Compax3F main axis ........................................................... 160
192-121101 N04 June 2008
C3F_T30
Introduction
5.2.2.
5.3
Control functions ................................................................................. 163

5.3.1.
5.3.2.
5.3.3.
5.4
Important notes.................................................................................................... 174

Procedure when working with the C3_getSystemFingerPrint ........................ 175
Positioning functions (standard)........................................................ 176

5.6.1.
5.6.2.
5.6.3.
5.6.4.
5.6.5.
5.6.6.
5.6.7.
5.6.8.
5.7
Reading the current position (MC_ReadActualPosition) ................................ 168

Read access to the (C3_ReadArray) array ........................................................ 170
Reading the device status (MC_ReadStatus) ................................................... 171
Determine valve/range parameters (C3_GetSystemFingerPrint)..... 172

5.5.1.
5.5.2.
5.6
Activation of the drive (MC_Power) ................................................................... 163

Stop (MC_Stop).................................................................................................... 164
5.3.2.1 MC_Stop at pressure/force control ........................................................... 165
5.3.2.2 MC_Stop: Example 1 ................................................................................ 165
5.3.2.3 MC_Stop: Example 2 ................................................................................ 166
C3_SetControlMode ............................................................................................ 167
Reading values..................................................................................... 168

5.4.1.
5.4.2.
5.4.3.
5.5
Status diagram of Compax3F auxiliary axis ..................................................... 161
Value range for positioning parameters............................................................ 176

Absolute positioning (MC_MoveAbsolute) ....................................................... 177
5.6.2.1 Position mode in reset operation .............................................................. 180
5.6.2.2 Description of jerk ..................................................................................... 181
Relative positioning (MC_MoveRelative) .......................................................... 182
Additive positioning (MC_MoveAdditive).......................................................... 184
Continuous positioning (MC_MoveVelocity) .................................................... 186
Manual operation (C3_Jog)................................................................................. 188
Homing (MC_Home) ............................................................................................ 190
Electronic gearbox (MC_GearIn)........................................................................ 193
Superimposed motion ......................................................................... 196

5.7.1.
5.7.2.
5.7.3.
Dynamic positioning ........................................................................................... 196

Superimposed positioning (MC_MoveSuperImposed).................................... 197
Zero point shift caused by superimposed positioning
(C3_ShiftPosition)................................................................................................ 199
5.8
Adjust force / pressure (C3_PressureForceAbsolute)...................... 201
5.9
Dynamic switching: Position- on force/pressure - adjustment........ 202

5.9.1.
5.10
Error handling ...................................................................................... 205

5.10.1.
5.10.2.
5.10.3.
5.11
Switching: from force to position mode (C3_pQ) ............................................ 203
Acknowledging errors (MC_Reset).................................................................... 205

Reading axis errors (MC_ReadAxisError)......................................................... 206
Set error reaction (C3_SetErrorReaction) ......................................................... 207
Process image...................................................................................... 208

5.11.1.
5.11.2.
5.11.3.
Reading digital inputs (C3_Input) ...................................................................... 208

Write digital outputs (C3_Output) ...................................................................... 208
Reading/writing optional inputs/outputs........................................................... 209
5.11.3.1 C3_IOAddition_0....................................................................................... 209
5.11.3.2 C3_IOAddition_1....................................................................................... 209
5.11.3.3 C3_IOAddition_2....................................................................................... 210
5.11.4. Memorizing the signals with the trigger event (C3_TouchProbe) .................. 211
6
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.11.5.
5.12
Interface module "PLmC_Interface" ................................................................. 220

Cyclic data channel for C3T30 and C3T40 ........................................................ 222
Example: C3 powerPLmC Program & Compax3 Program .............................. 224
IEC examples........................................................................................ 227

5.13.1.
5.13.2.
5.13.3.
5.13.4.
5.13.5.
5.13.6.
5.14
Integration of Parker I/Os (PIOs) ........................................................................ 214

5.11.5.1 Initializing the PIOs (PIO_Init)................................................................... 214
5.11.5.2 Reading the PIO inputs 0-15 (PIO_Inputx...y) .......................................... 215
5.11.5.3 Writing the PIO outputs 0-15 (PIO_Outputx...y) ....................................... 216
5.11.5.4 Example: Compax3 as CANopen Master with PIOs ................................ 217
Interface to C3 powerPLmC ................................................................ 219

5.12.1.
5.12.2.
5.12.3.
5.13
Introduction
Example in CFC: Using Compax3-specific function modules and

Compax3 objects ................................................................................................. 227
Example in CFC: Positioning 1 .......................................................................... 228
Example in CFC: Positioning 2 .......................................................................... 229
Example in CFC: Positioning with set selection .............................................. 230
Example in CFC: Cycle mode ............................................................................. 231
Example in ST: Cycle mode with a Move module ............................................ 232
Profibus: Emulating the ProfiDrive profile

(C3F_ProfiDrive_Statemachine) ......................................................... 234
6. Communication ....................................................................................238
6.1
Compa3 communication variants....................................................... 238

6.1.1.
6.1.2.
6.1.3.
6.1.4.
6.1.5.
6.1.6.
6.1.7.
6.1.8.
6.2
COM port protocol ............................................................................... 250

6.2.1.
6.2.2.
6.2.3.
6.3
RS485 setting values........................................................................................... 250

ASCII - record....................................................................................................... 251
Binary record ....................................................................................................... 252
Remote diagnosis via Modem............................................................. 255

6.3.1.
6.3.2.
6.3.3.
6.3.4.
6.4
PC <-> Compax3 (RS232).................................................................................... 239

PC <-> Compax3 (RS485).................................................................................... 240
PC <-> C3M device combination (USB) ............................................................. 241
USB-RS485 Moxa Uport 1130 adapter .............................................................. 242
ETHERNET-RS485 NetCOM 113 adapter........................................................... 243
Modem Westermo TD-36 485.............................................................................. 245
C3 settings for RS485 two wire operation......................................................... 248
C3 settings for RS485 four wire operation........................................................ 249
Structure ............................................................................................................... 255

Configuration of local modem 1......................................................................... 256
Configuration of remote modem 2..................................................................... 257
Recommendations for preparing the modem operation ................................. 258
Profibus ................................................................................................ 259

6.4.1.
6.4.2.
6.4.3.
Typical application with fieldbus and IEC61131............................................... 259

Profibus configuration ........................................................................................ 259
6.4.2.1 Configuration of the process-data channel ............................................... 260
6.4.2.2 PKW parameter channel........................................................................... 261
6.4.2.3 Error reaction to a bus failure ................................................................... 261
Cyclic process data channel .............................................................................. 261
192-121101 N04 June 2008
C3F_T30
Introduction
6.4.4.
6.4.5.
6.5
CANopen - Node Settings ................................................................... 272

6.5.1.
6.5.2.
6.5.3.
6.5.4.
6.6
6.6.2.
6.6.3.
Configuring Ethernet Powerlink / EtherCAT ..................................................... 294

6.7.1.1 CN Controlled Node (Slave) ..................................................................... 294
6.7.1.2 Slave with configuration via master .......................................................... 294
6.7.1.4 Possible PDO assignment ........................................................................ 295
HEDA Bus ............................................................................................. 296

6.8.1.
6.8.2.
6.8.3.
8
DeviceNet Configuration..................................................................................... 291

DeviceNet object classes.................................................................................... 292
6.6.2.1 Overview of the DeviceNet object classes................................................ 293
6.6.2.2 Object classes........................................................................................... 293
Data formats of the bus objects......................................................................... 293
Ethernet Powerlink .............................................................................. 294

6.7.1.
6.8
CANopen - configuration .................................................................................... 272

6.5.1.1 CANopen Operating Mode ....................................................................... 272
6.5.1.3 Baud rate .................................................................................................. 273
6.5.1.4 Possible PDO assignment ........................................................................ 274
6.5.1.5 Transmission cycle time............................................................................ 274
Supporting IEC modules..................................................................................... 274
6.5.2.1 C3_CANopen_State ................................................................................. 275
6.5.2.2 C3_CANopen_GuardingState .................................................................. 276
6.5.2.3 C3_CANopen_AddNode........................................................................... 277
6.5.2.4 C3_CANopen_ConfigNode....................................................................... 278
6.5.2.5 C3_CANopen_NMT .................................................................................. 279
6.5.2.6 Reading an object in another node (C3_CANopen_SDO_Read4) .......... 280
6.5.2.7 Writing an object in another node (C3_CANopen_SDO_Write4)............. 281
CANopen communication profile....................................................................... 282
6.5.3.1 Object types .............................................................................................. 283
6.5.3.2 Communication objects............................................................................. 283
Acyclic parameter channel ................................................................................. 287
6.5.4.1 Service Data Objects (SDO)..................................................................... 287
6.5.4.2 Object up-/download via RS232 / RS485 ................................................. 289
6.5.4.3 Data formats of the bus objects ................................................................ 290
DeviceNet ............................................................................................. 291

6.6.1.
6.7
6.4.3.1 Control and status word ............................................................................ 261

Acyclic parameter channel ................................................................................. 262
6.4.4.1 Parameter access with DPV0: Required data channel............................. 262
6.4.4.2 Data formats of the bus objects ................................................................ 268
Simatic S7 -300/400 - modules ........................................................................... 271
HEDA standard mode.......................................................................................... 297

6.8.1.2 HEDA-Master............................................................................................ 298
6.8.1.3 HEDA-Slave.............................................................................................. 298
HEDA expansion (HEDA advanced) .................................................................. 299
6.8.2.1 The possibilities of the HEDA expansion.................................................. 299
6.8.2.2 Technical data of the HEDA interface / overview ..................................... 300
6.8.2.3 Definitions ................................................................................................. 301
6.8.2.4 Calling up the HEDA wizard in the C3 ServoManager ............................. 301
6.8.2.5 Configuration of the HEDA communication .............................................. 301
Coupling objects.................................................................................................. 318
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Introduction
7. Compax3 - Objects ...............................................................................320

7.1
Object overview sorted by object name (C3FT30) ............................ 321
7.2
T30F Objects for the process data channel....................................... 331
7.3
Detailed object list ............................................................................... 332
8. Status values ........................................................................................333

8.1
D/A-Monitor .......................................................................................... 333
8.2
Status values........................................................................................ 333
9. Error:......................................................................................................334
10. Order code ............................................................................................335
10.1
Order code device: Compax3 Fluid.................................................... 335
10.2
Accessories order code ...................................................................... 335
11. Compax3 Accessories .........................................................................338

11.1
ZBH plug set......................................................................................... 338
11.2
Cable for path measurement systems ............................................... 339

11.2.1.
11.2.2.
11.2.3.
Encoder cable ...................................................................................................... 339

Feedback cable (Balluff) ..................................................................................... 340
Feedback cable EnDat2.1.................................................................................... 341
11.3
Operator control module BDM............................................................ 342
11.4
EAM06: Terminal block for inputs and outputs................................. 343
11.5
Interface Cables ................................................................................... 345

11.5.1.
11.5.2.
11.5.3.
11.5.4.
11.5.5.
11.5.6.
11.6
RS232 cable.......................................................................................................... 346

RS485 cable to Pop ............................................................................................. 347
I/O interface X12 / X22 ......................................................................................... 348
Ref X11.................................................................................................................. 349
Encoder coupling of 2 Compax3 axes............................................................... 350
Modem cable SSK31............................................................................................ 351
Options M1x ......................................................................................... 352

11.6.1.
Input/output option M12...................................................................................... 352

11.6.1.1 Assignment of the X22 connector............................................................. 352
11.6.2. HEDA (motion bus) - Option M11....................................................................... 353
11.6.3. Option M10 = HEDA (M11) & I/Os (M12) ............................................................ 355
11.7
Profibus plug BUS08/01 ...................................................................... 356
11.8
CAN - plug BUS10/01........................................................................... 357
11.9
PIO: Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................. 358

192-121101 N04 June 2008
C3F_T30
Introduction
12. Specifications .......................................................................................359

13. Index ......................................................................................................365
10
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Introduction
1. Introduction
In this chapter you can read about:
Device assignment Compax3 Fluid T30.............................................................................11
Safety Instructions ..............................................................................................................13
Warranty conditions............................................................................................................14
Conditions of utilization for CE-conform operation .............................................................14
1.1
Device assignment Compax3 Fluid T30

This manual applies to the following devices:
C3 F001 D2 F12 I11 T30
C3 F001 D2 F12 I20 T30
C3 F001 D2 F12 I21 T30
C3 F001 D2 F12 I22 T30
C3 F001 D2 F12 I30 T30
C3 F001 D2 F12 I31 T30
192-121101 N04 June 2008
11
C3F_T30
Introduction
1.1.1.
Type specification plate Compax3 Fluid

You will find the exact description of the device on the type specification
plate, which is located on the right side of the device:
Type specification
plate Compax3
Fluid:
Explanation:
12
Type designation
The complete order designation of the device (2, 6, -9...)

(Category No.)
C3F001D2
C3:Abbreviation for Compax3

F =Fluid:Hydraulics controller
001:+/-10V and 0..20mA outputs (16 Bit)
D2:24VDC device
Unique number of the particular device
4
5
6
Supply voltage
Date of factory test
Designation of the
feedback system
24 VDC
Device interface
Technology function
9
10
Options
CE compliance
I11 / I12: Digital Inputs / Outputs and RS232 / RS485

I20: Profibus DP
I21: CANopen
I22: DeviceNet
T11: Positioning / pressure/force control
T30: Motion control programmable according to IEC61131-3
T40: Electronic cam generation
Mxx:
11
UL certification
F12: Feedback Module
PD2 (see page 361)

(degree of pollution)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
1.2
Introduction
Safety Instructions
General hazards .................................................................................................................13
Safety-conscious working...................................................................................................13
Special safety instructions ..................................................................................................14
1.2.1.
General hazards
General Hazards on Non-Compliance with the Safety Instructions
The device described in this manual is designed in accordance with the latest
technology and is safe in operation. Nevertheless, the device can entail certain
hazards if used improperly or for purposes other than those explicitly intended.
Electronic, moving and rotating components can
constitute a hazard for body and life of the user, and
cause material damage
Usage in accordance with intended purpose

The device is designed for operation in electric power drive systems (VDE0160).
Motion sequences can be automated with this device. Several motion sequences
can be combined by interconnecting several of these devices. Mutual interlocking
functions must be incorporated for this purpose.
1.2.2.
Safety-conscious working
This device may be operated only by qualified personnel.
Qualified personnel in the sense of these operating instructions consists of:
Persons who, by virtue to their training, experience and instruction, and their
knowledge of pertinent norms, specifications, accident prevention regulations and
operational relationships, have been authorized by the officer responsible for the
safety of the system to perform the required task and in the process are capable
of recognizing potential hazards and avoiding them (definition of technical
personnel according to VDE105 or IEC364),
Persons who have a knowledge of first-aid techniques and the local emergency
rescue services.
Persons who have read and will observe the safety instructions.
Those who have read and observe the manual or help (or the sections pertinent
to the work to be carried out).
This applies to all work relating to setting up, commissioning, configuring,
programming, modifying the conditions of utilization and operating modes, and to
maintenance work.
This manual and the help information must be available close to the device during
the performance of all tasks.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
13
C3F_T30
Introduction
1.2.3.
Special safety instructions

Check the correct association of the device and its documentation.
Never detach electrical connections while voltage is applied to them.
Safety devices must be provided to prevent human contact with moving or
rotating parts.
Make sure that the device is operated only when it is in perfect condition.
Implement and activate the stipulated safety functions and devices.
Operate the device only with the housing closed.
Make sure that all axes are sufficiently fixed.
Attention during configuration downloads with master - slave couplings (electronic
gear, cam)
Deactivate the drive before starting the configuration download: Master and Slave
axis
1.3
Warranty conditions
The device must not be opened.
Do not make any modifications to the device, except for those described in the
manual.
Make connections to the inputs, outputs and interfaces only in the manner
described in the manual.
Fix the devices according to our mounting instructions. (see page 38)
We cannot provide any guarantee for any other mounting methods.
Note on exchange of options
Compax3 options must be exchanged in the factory to ensure hardware and
software compatibility.
1.4
Conditions of utilization for CE-conform operation

- Industry and trade The EC guidelines for electromagnetic compatibility 2006/95/EC and for electrical
operating devices for utilization within certain voltage limits 2004/108/EC are
fulfilled when the following boundary conditions are observed:
Operation of the devices only in the condition in which they were delivered,
i.e. with all housing panels.
Shielding connection of the valve cables

The cable should be fully screened and connected to the Compax3 housing. We
offer a special Shield connecting terminal (see page 338) as accessory item
(ZBH./...).
The shield of the valve cable must also be connected with the valve housing. The
fixing (via plug or screw in the terminal box) depends on the valve type.
14
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Requirements for
encoder cable
Compax3:
Control:
Cable installation:
Accessories:
Introduction
<100m
Use only with aligned controller (to avoid control loop oscillation).
Signal lines and power lines should be installed as far apart as possible.
Signal leads should never pass close to excessive sources of interference (motors,
transformers, contactors etc.).
Make sure to use only the accessories recommended by Parker
Connect all cable shields at both ends, ensuring large contact areas!
Warning:
This is a product in the restricted sales distribution class according to EN

61000-6-4. In a domestic area this product can cause radio frequency
disturbance, in which case the user may be required to implement
appropriate remedial measures.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
15
Positioning with IEC61131-3
C3F_T30
2. Positioning with IEC61131-3

Compax3F:
Electrohydraulic
servo drive
Compax3F is another member of the Parker Hannifin servo drive family.

Compax3F was especially designed to meet the requirements of electrohydraulic
systems for the control of position and force of hydraulic axes.
Compax3 Fluid (Hydraulics controller)

Technical data
Motion control with motion profiles, suitable for position and force/pressure control
for up to 2 axes.
Command value generator

Jerk-limited ramps.
Travel data in increments, mm, inch.
Specification of speed, acceleration, delay and jerk factor.
Force/pressure data in N, bar, psi.
Monitoring functions
Voltage range.
Following error monitoring.
Hard and Software limit switch
Technology functions of servo controllers

IEC61131-3 programs in the servo controller (T30)
Cam function in the servo controller (T40)
16
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
IEC 61131-3
Programming
Due to its high functionality, Compax3 in the version IEC 61131-3 - Positioning
with function modules based on PLCopen forms an ideal basis for many
applications in high-performance motion automation.
A standard with general applicability was created with Standard IEC 61131-3. The
programming system is equipped with a series of functions in addition to the
compliant editor. The Motion Control functions specified in PLCopen are also
provided by Parker as a library with the device and control software.
The graphical program editor supports the following functions:
Ladder diagram
Function block diagram (structurally-guided)
Function block diagram (free graphical editor)
The text-oriented editor supports programming in
Instruction list
Structured text
Programming of Compax3 based on IEC 61131-3 is also made considerably easier
by a series of additional functions. This includes in particular Syntax Coloring,
multi-level undo/redo and context-sensitive input help.
Interfaces with
superordinate
controllers
Independent of your motion automation you can access Compax3 externally via
different interfaces (e.g. with the superordinate control):
via RS232 / RS485
via digital Inputs/Outputs (Interface I11)
via Profibus (Interface I20)
via CANopen (Interface I21)
Profibus (I20 functions)
The higher-level control system communicates with Compax3 via Profibus.

A number of different cyclic transfer telegrams (which can be conveniently adjusted
with the Compax3 ServoManager) can be used to adjust bus communication to the
requirements of specific applications.
In addition to the cyclic data channel, parameter access is also possible via a
DPV1 master or using the parameter channel with a DPV0 master.
CANopen (I21 functions)
The higher level control system communicates with Compax3 via CANopen.
Via various cyclic process data objects (which can be comfortably set with the
Compax3 ServoManager) the bus communication can be adapted to the
application requirements.
Apart from the cyclic process data objects, acyclic parameter access is possible via
service data objects.
DeviceNet (I22
functions)
The higher level control system communicates with Compax3 via DeviceNet.
Cyclic I/O messages (which can be conveniently adjusted with the Compax3
ServoManager) can be used to adjust bus communication to the requirements of
specific applications.
Besides the cyclic data, acyclic access to objects is possible via Explicit Messges.
Compax3 control
technology
High-performance control technology and openness for various sender systems

are fundamental requirements for a fast and high-quality automation of movement.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
17
Model / standards /
auxiliary material
Configuration
18
C3F_T30
The structure and size of the device are of considerable importance. Powerful
electronics is an important feature which made it possible to manufacture the
Compax3F so small and compact. All connectors are located on the front of the
Compax3.
The Compax3 is CE-conform.
The intuitive user interface familiar from many applications, together with the
oscilloscope function, wizards and online help, simplifies making and modifying
settings via the PC.
The optional Operator control module (BDM01/01 (see page 341)) for Compax3
makes it possible to exchange devices quickly without requiring a PC.
Configuration is made on a PC using the Compax3 ServoManager.

General proceeding
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Compax3F device description
3. Compax3F device description

State of delivery..................................................................................................................19
Plug and connector assignment Compax3 Fluid................................................................19
3.1
State of delivery
Compax3 is delivered without configuration!
After switching on the 25VDC supply, the red LED is flashing while the green LED
is dark.
Please configure the device with the help of the Windows-Software Compax3
ServoManager!
3.2
Plug and connector assignment Compax3 Fluid

Meaning of the front panel LEDs (via X10) ........................................................................19
Plug and connector assignment .........................................................................................20
Plug and connector assignment complete .........................................................................21
Analog Input (plug X1)........................................................................................................23
Analog Output (plug X2) .....................................................................................................24
Voltage supply (plug X3) ....................................................................................................25
RS232 / RS485 interface (plug X10) ..................................................................................25
Analog / Encoder (plug X11) ..............................................................................................26
Digital inputs/outputs (plug X12) ........................................................................................27
Feedback (connector X13) .................................................................................................28
Profibus connector X23 with Interface I20..........................................................................30
CANopen connector X23 Interface I21...............................................................................31
DeviceNet connector X23 ..................................................................................................33
Ethernet Powerlink (Option I30) / EtherCAT (option I31) X23, X24 ...................................34
Mounting and dimensions ..................................................................................................38
3.2.1.
Meaning of the front panel LEDs (via X10)

status
LED
red
LED
green
Voltages missing.
While booting.
No configuration present.
off
off
alternately flashing
flashing off
Compax3 IEC61131-3 program not compatible with Compax3 Firmware.

no Compax3 IEC61131-3 program.
Axis(es) blocked.
Axis(es) enabled.
off
off
Flashes slowly
on
Axis in fault status / fault present.
on
off
192-121101 N04 June 2008
19
3.2.2.
C3F_T30
Plug and connector assignment
LED1
X10
X1
X11
X2
X12
X13
X3
X1
Analog Inputs
X2
Analog Outputs
X3
24 VDC power supply
X10
RS232/RS485
X11
2. Feedback Type
X12
Inputs/Outputs
X13
1. Feedback Type
Always switch devices off before wiring them!
20
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
3.2.3.
Plug and connector assignment complete

In detail:
The fitting of the different plugs depends on the extension level of Compax3.
In part, the assignment depends on the Compax3 option implemented.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
21
X1/7
IN1+
X1/8
IN1-
X10/5
DSR
X10/6
RTS
X10/7
CTS
X10/8
+5V
X10/9
X11: 2.Feedback system

24V
X1/9 24V
X1/10 GND
X1/11 IN2+
Aout1
Aout0
DA - Monitor
X1/12 IN2X1/13 24V

X1/14 GND
X1/15 IN3+
X1/16 IN3-
+5V
AA+
B+
X1/17 IN4+
X1/18 IN4-
BNN+
GND
X1/19 IN5+
X1/20 IN5-
GND
X11/1
X11/2
X11/3
X11/4
X11/5
Clock- X11/6
Clock+ X11/7
X11/8
X11/9
X11/10
X11/11
X11/12
DATA- X11/13
DATA+ X11/14
X11/15
GND
24V
INITINIT+
STSP+
STSP-
GND
Output+24V
Output0
Analog Output
X2/1
I/U out0
X2/2 GND0
X2/3 I/U out1
X2/4 GND1
X2/5 I/U out2
X2/6 GND2
X2/7 I/U out3
X2/8 GND3
X2/9 Iout0
X2/10 GND
X2/11 Iout1
X2/12 GND
22
Input0
Input1
Input2
Input3
Input4
Input+24V
Input7 or (MN-INI)
GND24V
X12/2
X12/3
X12/4
X12/5
X12/6
X12/7
X12/8
+24V
+24V
Sense BNN+
GND
STSP-
GND
SenseCOSNN+
GND
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Sense+
Sin+
Vcc(+5V)
+5V
ClockClock+
COS+
SINSenseCOSDATADATA+
GND
ClockClock+
SSI
COS+
SIN-
EnDat 2.1
INITINIT+
STSP+
SinusCosinus 1VSS
Vcc(+5V)
+5V
AA+
B+
Sense+
Sin+
Vcc(+5V)
+5V
DATADATA+
GND
Lx X20/3
res. X20/4
res. X20/5
Lx/ X20/6
res. X20/7
res. X20/8
Tx X21/1
Tx/ X21/2
Lx X21/3
res. X21/4
res. X21/5
Lx/ X21/6
res. X21/7
res. X21/8
res.
O0/I0
O1/I1
O2/I2
O3/I3
O4/I4
O5/I5
O6/I6
O7/I7
O8/I8
Input24VDC
O9/I9
O10/I10
O11/I11
InputGND
X22/1
X22/2
X22/3
X22/4
X22/5
X22/6
X22/7
X22/8
X22/9
X22/10
X22/11
X22/12
X22/13
X22/14
X22/15
X12/9
X12/10
X12/11
X12/12
res. X23/1
res. X23/2
X12/13
X12/14
X12/15
X13: 1.Feedback system
Start/Stop
X3/1 +24V
X3/2 GND24V
Output3
Input6
RS422 Encoder
X3
Output2
Input5
Sense+
24VDC power supply
Output1
X12: Digital Inputs/Outputs
X2
X12/1
X20: HEDA in
GND
GND
Rx X20/1
Rx/ X20/2
X21: HEDA out
24V
X1/6
+5V X10/9
X10/4
X22: Input/Output option M12(M10=+HEDA)
X1/5
+5V X10/9
TxD_RxD/ X10/7
res. X10/8
X10/3
X13/1
X13/2
X13/3
X13/4
X13/5
X13/6
X13/7
X13/8
X13/9
X13/10
X13/11
X13/12
X13/13
X13/14
X13/15
X23: Profibus
IN0-
GND X10/5
res. X10/6
TxD
DTR
Data line-B X23/3

RTS X23/4
GND X23/5
+5V X23/6
res. X23/7
Data line-A X23/8
res. X23/9
res. X23/1
CAN_L X23/2
X23: CANopen
IN0+
X1/4
RxD
X10: RS232
X1/3
TxD X10/7
RxD/ X10/8
X10/1
X10/2
SSI
GND
GND X10/5
res. X10/6
EnableRS232 0V
TxD_RxD/ X10/3
res. X10/4
Start/Stop
X1/2
24V
X10: RS485 zweidraht
X1/1
TxD/ X10/3
res. X10/4
RS485 +5V X10/1

res. X10/2
RS422 Encoder
X1
Analog Input
RS485 +5V X10/1

RxD X10/2
X10: RS485 vierdraht
Compax3F
C3F_T30
HEDA-motionbus option M11(M10=+I/Os)
GNDfb X23/3
res. X23/4
SHIELD X23/5
res. X23/6
CAN_H X23/7
res. X23/8
res. X23/9
Parker EME
3.2.4.
Analog Input (plug X1)

Connector X1 Description
Pin
Combicon 3,81mm; female connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Supply Sensor 0
Supply Sensor 0
Signal Sensor 0 +
Signal Sensor 0 Supply Sensor 1
Supply Sensor 1
Signal Sensor 1 +
Supply Sensor 2
Signal Sensor 2 +
Supply Sensor 3
Signal Sensor 3 +
Signal Sensor 3 +/-10V Input 4
+/-10V Input 4
+/-10V Input 5
+/-10V Input 5
24V
GND
IN0+
IN024V
GND
IN1 +
IN1 24V
GND
IN2 +
IN2 24V
GND
IN3 +
IN3IN4+
IN4IN5+
IN5-
Requirement: Connection cable

Use shielded cables.
Shield connection of the cables

(ZBH./...).
3.2.4.1
Wiring of the analog inputs
Input IN0
Compax3 Fluid
X1/4
In0-
250
In0+
Input IN4
200K
22.1K
10pF
1nF
200K
In4+
200K
In4X1/3
Compax3 Fluid
X1/17
100K
100K
X1/18
22.1K
200K
1nF
2.5V
IN0 to IN3 do have the same wiring!

Pin assignment (see page 23) X1
IIN4 and IN5 (X11/19 and X11/20) have the same

wiring!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
23
3.2.5.
C3F_T30
Analog Output (plug X2)

Plug X2 Descripti Combicon 3,81mm; female connector
Pin
on
1
I/U Aout0 10V/10mA or 4..20mA
2
GND 0
3
4
GND 1
5
6
GND 2
7
8
GND 3
9
Iout 0
+/-100mA current output 0
10
GND
11
lout 1
+/-100mA current output 1
12
GND
Terminating resistor:
Voltage +/-10V: 1000
Current 4..20mA: 600
Current 100mA: 100
All outputs are short-circuit proof.
Requirement: Connection cable

Use shielded cables.
Shield connection of the cables

(ZBH./...).
3.2.5.1
Wiring of analog outputs
Output I/U Aout0
Output Iout0
Compax3 Fluid
Compax3 Fluid
X2/9 Iout0
X2/1 I/Uout0
+/-100mA*
+/-10V
(10mA)
0...20mA*
X2/2 GND0
X2/10 GND
* 20mA to max. 450
Aout0 to Aout3 do have the same wiring!

Pin assignment (see page 24) X2
24
* at RL<=180
Iout0 and Iout1 (X2/11 and X2/12) have the same

wiring!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
3.2.6.
Voltage supply (plug X3)

Connector
X3 Pin
1
2
Descriptio
n
+24 V
Gnd 24 V
Combicon 5mm
24 VDC (power supply)
GND
Voltage supply 24VDC

Controller type
Voltage range
Mains module
Compax3 F001 D2
Fuse
Current drain of the device
Total current drain
Ripple
Requirement according to safe extra
low voltage (SELV)
3.2.7.
21 - 27VDC
with switch-on current limitation, due to
capacitive load
MTP miniature circuit breaker or "delayed action
fuse", due to capacitive load
0.8A (max. 1.5A)
0.8A + total load of the digital outputs
<1Vss
yes
RS232 / RS485 interface (plug X10)

Interface selectable by contact functions assignment of X10/1:
X10/1=0V RS232
X10/1=5V RS485
PIN
X10
RS232 (Sub D)
1
2
3
4
5
(Enable RS232) 0V
RxD
TxD
DTR
GND
6
7
8
9
DSR
RTS
CTS
+5V
RS485 2-wire
PIN
X10
RS485 two wire (Sub D)

Pin 1 and 9 jumpered externally
1
2
3
Enable RS485 (+5V)

res.
TxD_RxD/
4
5
6
7
8
9
res.
GND
res.
TxD_RxD
res.
+5V
192-121101 N04 June 2008
25
C3F_T30
RS485 4-wire
PIN
X10
RS485 four wire (Sub D)

Pin 1 and 9 externally jumpered
1
2
3
4
Enable RS485 (+5V)

RxD
TxD/
res.
5
6
7
8
9
GND
res.
TxD
RxD/
+5V
USB - RS232/RS485 converter

The following USB - RS232 converters were tested:
ATEN UC 232A
USB GMUS-03 (available under several company names)
USB / RS485: Moxa Uport 1130 http://www.moxa.com/product/UPort_1130.htm
Ethernet/RS232/RS485: NetCom 113 http://www.vscom.de/666.htm
3.2.8.
Analog / Encoder (plug X11)

The following position sensors can be connected via X11:
RS422 Encoder (max. 5MHz, or Step/Direction)
SSI (RS422)
Start / Stop (Time of Flight, RS422)
2. Feedback system / X11 High Density /Sub D
PIN
D-A Monitor
RS422 Encoder
Start / Stop
(Time of Flight)
1
+24V max. 100mA
SSI
+24V max. 100mA
2
3
Aout1
Aout0
5
6
+5V (for encoder)

max. 150mA
A-
INIT-
Clock-
A+
INIT+
Clock+
B+
STSP+
12
B-
STSP-
13
N-
DATA-
14
N+
DATA+
9
10
11
15
GND
GND
GND
Max. start/stop time is 1.6ms (over 4.15m).
26
192-121101 N04 June 2008
GND
Parker EME
3.2.8.1
UpdateRate Start/Stop Feedback

The update rate results mainly from the sonic speed and the length of the
feedback.
The latency period of the feedback is also added.
Update rate[s] = length [m] /sonic speed [m/s] * 1000000 +maybe latency
period of the feedback[s]
For the UpdateRate, only the multiple of 250s is evaluated.
Example:
1.5m / 2600m/s =576.9s => maybe + latency period of the feedback and all as
multiple of 250s => 750s
3.2.8.2
Connections of the encoder interface
Compax3
+5V
1K
ABN
121
10nF
RS422
Transceiver
ABN
1K
GND
The input connection is available in triple (for A & /A, B & /B, N & /N)
3.2.9.
Digital inputs/outputs (plug X12)

X12
Pin
Input/output
I/O /X12
High density/Sub D
1
2
3
4
5
Output
O0
O1
O2
O3
+24VDC output (max. 340mA)

Output 0 (max. 100mA)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
E
I5
Input 0
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
24V input for the digital outputs Pins 2 to 5
Input 5
13
14
15
I6
I7
Output
Input 6
Input 7
Gnd 24 V
All inputs and outputs have 24V level.

The exact assignment depends on the the device type!
You will find the description of the device-specific assignment in the online help
which can be opened from the Compax3 ServoManager.
Maximum capacitive loading of the outputs: 50nF (max. 4 Compax3 inputs).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
27
3.2.9.1
C3F_T30
Connection of the digital Outputs/Inputs
Wiring of digital outputs
Status of digital inputs
Compax3
24V
F1
F2 X12/1
SPS/PLC
SPS/
PLC
X12/11
Compax3
X12/1
F1
F2
22K
24V
100K
X12/6
X12/2
22K
10nF
18.2K
22K
10K
X12/15
0V
0V
X12/15
The circuit example is valid for all digital outputs!

The outputs are short circuit proof; a short circuit
generates an error.
The circuit example is valid for all digital inputs!

Signal level:
> 9.15V = "1" (38,2% of the control voltage applied)
> 8.05V = "0" (33.5% of the control voltage applied)
F1: delayed action fuse

F2: quick action electronic fuse; can be reset by switching the 24VDC supply off and on again.
3.2.10. Feedback (connector X13)

The following position sensors can be connected via X13:
1VSS SineCosine (max. 400Hz)
RS422 Encoder (max. 5MHz, or Step/Direction)
SSI (RS422)
Start / Stop (Time of Flight, RS422)
EnDat2.1
28
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
1. Feedback system / X13 High Density /Sub D

PIN
RS422 Encoder
SinusCosinus
1VSS
EnDat 2.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sense +
Vcc +5V (controlled
on the encoder side)
+5V (for encoder)
max. 150mA
AA+
B+
Sense BNN+
GND
Sense +
Sin +
Vcc +5V (controlled
on the encoder
side)
+5V
Start / Stop
SSI
(Time of Flight)
+24V
max. 100mA
+24V
max. 100mA
INITINIT+
STSP+
ClockClock+
Sense +
Sin +
Vcc +5V (controlled
on the encoder side)
+5V
COS+
SIN-
ClockClock+
COS+
SIN-
Sense COSNN+
GND
Sense COSDATADATA+
GND
STSP-
GND
DATADATA+
GND
Max. start/stop time is 1.6ms (over 4.15m).

Note on F12:
+5V (Pin 4) is measured and controlled directly at the end of the line via Sense
and Sense +.
Maximum cable length: 100m
Caution! Pin 4 and Pin 5 must under no circumstances be connected!
3.2.10.1
UpdateRate Start/Stop Feedback

The update rate results mainly from the sonic speed and the length of the
feedback.
The latency period of the feedback is also added.
Update rate[s] = length [m] /sonic speed [m/s] * 1000000 +maybe latency
period of the feedback[s]
For the UpdateRate, only the multiple of 250s is evaluated.
Example:
1.5m / 2600m/s =576.9s => maybe + latency period of the feedback and all as
multiple of 250s => 750s
3.2.10.2
Connections of the encoder interface
Compax3
+5V
1K
ABN
121
10nF
RS422
Transceiver
ABN
1K
GND
The input connection is available in triple (for A & /A, B & /B, N & /N)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
29
C3F_T30
3.2.11. Profibus connector X23 with Interface I20

Pin X23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Profibus (Sub D)
Reserved
Reserved
Data line B
RTS
GND
+5V
Reserved
Data line A
Reserved
The assignment corresponds to Profibus standard EN 50170.

Wiring (see page 356).
3.2.11.1
Adjusting the bus address

Address setting
Values:
1: 20; 2: 21; 3: 22; ... 7: 26; 8: reserved
Settings:
left: OFF
right: ON
(The address is set to 0 in the illustration to the left)
Range of values: 1 ...127
Address 0 is set internally to address 126.
3.2.11.2
Function of the Bus LEDs

Meaning of the LEDs (under X23)
Green LED (left)
alternately flashing
off
on
on
on
30
Red LED (right)

flashing
flashing
off
on
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Description
Field bus program missing
Device is not initialized
Bus operation mode (no DATA exchange)
Bus operation mode (DATA exchange)
Bus error
Parker EME
3.2.12. CANopen connector X23 Interface I21

Pin X23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CANopen (Sub D)
Reserved
CAN_L
CAN Low
GNDfb
Opto-isolated GND-supply
Reserved
SHIELD
Shield optional
Reserved
CAN_H
CAN High
Reserved
Reserved
The assignment corresponds to CANopen DS301.

At the beginning and end of the device chain a terminating resistor of 120 is
required between CAN_L and CAN_H
Wiring (see page 357).
3.2.12.1

Address setting
Values:
1: 20; 2: 21; 3: 22; ... 7: 26; 8: reserved
Settings:
left: OFF
right: ON
(The address is set to 0 in the illustration to the left)
Range of values: 1 ...127
192-121101 N04 June 2008
31
3.2.12.2
C3F_T30

LED red
No. Signal
1 off
2 Single flash
Status
Description
No Error
Warning
The bus is operating

at least one of the error counters of the CAN
controller has reached the warning level.
3 Double flash
Error
Node Guarding Error
4 Triple flash
Error
Sync Error
Buffer overflow (0x8110)
5 on
Bus not active
If several errors occur at once, the error with the most significant number is
reported.
LED green
Signal
Status
Single flash
Stop
blinks (permanently) pre-
Description
operational
operational
on
Single flash
The bus is in STOPPED state

The bus is ready to operate (PreOperational)
The bus is operating (operational)
On
200ms
1s
Off
Double flash
On
200ms 200ms
1s
Off
Triple flash
On
200ms 200ms
1s
Off
CANopen states
Power On
Initialisation
10, 11
Pre-Operational
7
6
Operational
8
Stopped
6
7
6: Start Remote Node

7: Stop Remote Node
8: Enter Pre-Operational State
10: Reset Node
11: Reset Communication
The "Initialization" state is no fixed state but only a transition state.
32
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
3.2.13. DeviceNet connector X23

Pin X23
DeviceNet (Open Plug Phoenix MSTB 2.5/5-GF5.08 ABGY AU)
1
2
3
4
5
VCANShield
CAN+
V+
Mass
CAN Low
Shield
CAN High
not required, internal supply
A mating plug is included in the delivery.

If Compax3 is used as first or last device in the fieldbus network, a terminal
resistance of 121 is required. This is integrated between Pin 2 and Pin 4.
Additional information on the DeviceNet wiring can be found under www.odva.org
http://www.odva.org.
Please do also heed the instructions in the DeviceNet master manual.
3.2.13.1

Address setting (NA: Node Address)
Values:
1: 20; 2: 21; 3: 22; ... 6: 25reserved
Settings:
left: OFF
right: ON
(The address is set to 2 in the illustration)
Range of values: 1 ... 63
Data Rate setting (DR):
Data Rate [kBit/s]
S24_7
S24_8
125
left: OFF
left: OFF
250
left: ON
right: OFF
500
right: OFF
left: ON
Reserved
right: ON
right: ON
Bear in mind that the maximum cable length depends on the Data rate:
Data Rate
Maximum length
500kbit/s
250kbit/s
125kbit/s
100m
250m
500m
192-121101 N04 June 2008
33
3.2.13.2
C3F_T30

LED (red)
No. Signal
1 off
2 Single flash
Status
Description
No Error
Warning
The bus is operating

at least one of the error counters of the CAN
controller has reached the warning level.
3 Double flash
Error
Communication Fault
4 Triple flash
Error
Double Mac ID
5 on
Error
Bus Off
If several errors occur at once, the error with the most significant number is
reported.
LED green
Signal
Single flash
Status
Description
On-line
Online, not at the master (not allocated)
Not
Connected
blinks (permanently) On-line
Online, at the master (allocated)
Connected
on
On-line
I/O Messages allocated
I/O Connected
Single flash
On
200ms
1s
Off
Double flash
On
200ms 200ms
1s
Off
Triple flash
On
200ms 200ms
1s
Off
3.2.14. Ethernet Powerlink (Option I30) / EtherCAT (option I31) X23,

X24
RJ45 (X23)
RJ45 (X24)
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
in
Tx +
Tx Rx +
Rx -
out
Tx +
Tx Rx +
Reserved
Reserved
Rx -
7
8
Reserved
Reserved
Wiring with Ethernet Crossover cable Cat5e (from X24 to X23 of the next device
without termination); for this, we recommend ourl SSK28 (see page 336, see page
350) interface cable.
Meaning of the RJ45 LEDs (only for Ethernet Powerlink, I30)
Green LED (top): connection established (RPT_LINK/RX)
Yellow LED (bottom): Traffic (exchange of data) (Transmit / Receive Data)
(RPT_ERR)
34
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
3.2.14.1
Set Ethernet Powerlink (option I30) bus address

Automatic address assignment with EtherCAT
Address setting
Values:
1: 20; 2: 21; 3: 22; ... 7: 26; 8: 27
Settings:
left: OFF
right: ON
(The address is set to 0 in the illustration)
Range of values: 1 ... 239
3.2.14.2
Meaning of the Bus LEDs (Ethernet Powerlink)

Red LED (right): Ethernet Powerlink error
LED is influenced by the transitions of the NMT - status diagram (for further details,
please refer to the Ethernet Powerlink Specification
http://www.parker.com/euro_emd/EME/downloads/compax3/EPL/epl2.0-ds-v-1-00.pdf)
Error LED
Transition
off => on
on => off
NMT_CT11,NMT_GT6,NMT_MT6
NMT_CT6, NMT_GT2, NMT_CT3, NMT_MT5
Green LED (left): Ethernet Powerlink Status

LED indicates the states of the NMT - status diagram (for further details, please
refer to the Ethernet Powerlink Specification
http://www.parker.com/euro_emd/EME/downloads/compax3/EPL/epl2.0-ds-v-1-00.pdf)
Status LED
off
flickering
single flash
double flash
triple flash
on
blinking
status
off
NMT_GS_OFF, NMT_GS_INITIALISATION,
NMT_CS_NOT_ACTIVE / NMT_MS_NOT_ACTIVE
flickering NMT_CS_BASIC_ETHERNET
Single
flash
Double
flash
Triple
flash
on
flashing
NMT_CS_PRE_OPERATIONAL_1 /
NMT_MS_PRE_OPERATIONAL_1
NMT_CS_PRE_OPERATIONAL_2 /
NMT_MS_PRE_OPERATIONAL_2
NMT_CS_READY_TO_OPERATE /
NMT_MS_READY_TO_OPERATE
NMT_CS_OPERATIONAL / NMT_MS_OPERATIONAL
NMT_CS_STOPPED
192-121101 N04 June 2008
35
3.2.14.3
C3F_T30
Meaning of the Bus LEDs (EtherCAT)

Red LED (right): EtherCAT error
LED is influenced by the transitions of the status diagram
Error LED
Error:
Off
Flickering
Blinking
Single Flash
No Error
Boot error
Error during initialization
Invalid configuration
Unsolicited change of
Slave changed the status independently
status
Application Watchdog
Watchdog
Timeout
PDI Watchdog Timeout
Double Flash
On
Description
Green LED (left): EtherCAT Status

LED shows the states of the status diagram
Status LED
status
Description
Off
Blinking
Single Flash
On
INITIALIZATION
PRE-OPERATIONAL
SAFE-OPERATIONAL
OPERATIONAL
Initialisation
Ready
Master reads values
Operation
Status diagram
Power On
Initialisation
1
2
Pre-Operational
4
3
Operational
Transition
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
36
SafeOperational
5
6
Action
Start mailbox communication
Stop mailbox communication
Start input update
Stop input update
Start output update
Stop output update
Stop output update, stop input update
Stop input update, stop mailbox communication
Stop output update, stop input update, stop mailbox communication
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Meaning of the LED states

50 ms
flickering
on
off
on
blinking
(ERR)
200
ms
200
ms
200
ms
200
ms
off
on
blinking
(RUN)
off
on
single flash
(ERR)
1000
ms
200
ms
200
ms
off
on
single flash
(RUN)
1000
ms
200
ms
200
ms
off
on
double flash
(ERR)
200
ms
200
ms
200
ms
1000
ms
off
192-121101 N04 June 2008
37
C3F_T30
3.2.15. Mounting and dimensions

Mounting:
3 socket head screws M5 or
by direct snapping on a 35mm supporting rail (according to DIN EN 50 022),
Mounting material: DIN rail clip and distance piece available as accessories - Set
ZBH02/04 (see page 338)
40
6
23
199
150
191
216
222
17,5
80
65
80
0
13
7,5
Stated in mm
38
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
4. Setting up Compax3
Configuration ......................................................................................................................39
Configuring the signal source.............................................................................................80
Optimization .......................................................................................................................85
4.1
Configuration
C3HydraulicsManager ........................................................................................................42
Compax3F structure image ................................................................................................43
Drive configuration..............................................................................................................44
Configuring drive1 ..............................................................................................................45
Configuring drive2 ..............................................................................................................47
Sensors ..............................................................................................................................47
Valve configuration .............................................................................................................49
Defining the reference system............................................................................................51
Ramp upon error and switch to currentless........................................................................72
Limit and monitoring settings of force.................................................................................73
Positioning window - Position reached.............................................................................75
Following error limit ............................................................................................................76
Maximum permissible speed ..............................................................................................76
Encoder Simulation ............................................................................................................77
Recipe table........................................................................................................................78
Error response....................................................................................................................78
Configuration name / comments.........................................................................................79
192-121101 N04 June 2008
39
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Configuration sequence:
Installation of the C3
ServoManager
The Compax3 ServoManager can be installed directly from the Compax3

DVD. Click on the appropriate hyperlink or start the installation program
"C3Mgr_Setup_V.... .exe" and follow the instructions.
PC requirements
Recommendation:
Operating system:
Browser:
Processor:
RAM memory:
Hard disk:
Drive:
Monitor:
MS Windows XP SP2 / MS Windows 2000 as from SP4 / (MS Vista)

MS Internet Explorer 6.x
Intel Pentium 4 / Intel Core 2 Duo / AMD Athlon class as from
>=2GHz
>= 1024MB
>= 20GB available memory
DVD drive
Resolution 1024x768 or higher
Graphics card:
Interface:
on onboard graphics (for performance reasons)

USB
Minimum requirements:
Operating system:
Browser:
Processor:
RAM memory:
Hard disk:
Drive:
Monitor:
Graphics card:
Interface:
MS Windows XP SP2 / MS Windows 2000 as from SP4

MS Internet Explorer 6.x
>= 1.5GHz
512MB
10GB available memory
DVD drive
Resolution 1024x768 or higher
on onboard graphics (for performance reasons)
USB
Note:
For the installation of the software you need administrator authorization on the
target computer.
Several applications running parallelly, reduce the performance and operability.
especially customer applications, exchanging standard system components
(drivers) in order to improve their own performance, may have a strong influence
on the communication performance or even render normal use impossible.
Operation under virtual machines such as Vware Workstation 6/ MS Virtual PC is
not possible.
Onboard graphics card solutions reduce the system performance by up to 20%
and cannot be recommended.
Operation with notebooks in current-saving mode may lead, in individual cases,
to communication problems.
40
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Connection between
PC - Compax3
Device Selection
Configuration
Setting up Compax3
Your PC is connected with Compax3 via a RS232 cable (SSK1 (see page 346)).
Cable SSK1 (see page 346) (COM 1/2-interface on the PC to X10 on the Compax3
or via adapter SSK32/20 on programming interface of Compax3H).
Start the Compax3 servo manager and make the setting for the selected interface
in the menu"Options Communication settings RS232/RS485...".
In the menu tree under device selection you can read the device type of the
connected device (Online Device Identification) or select a device type (Device
Selection Wizard).
Then you can double click on "Configuration" to start the configuration wizard. The
wizard will lead you through all input windows of the configuration.
Input quantities will be described in the following chapters, in the same order
in which you are queried about them by the configuration wizard.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
41
Setting up Compax3
4.1.1.
C3F_T30
C3HydraulicsManager
Function description ...........................................................................................................42
Structure of the databases .................................................................................................42
4.1.1.1
Function description
With the aid of the C3Hydraulicsmanager, component databases for

hydraulic valves (2/2, 3/3, 4/3 valves)
actors (constant- and differential cylinders, hydromotors)
Position feedback systems (with SSI-, Start/Stop, +/-10V-, 0..20mA-, RS422,
Sine/Cosine- or EnDat2.1 interface)
can be created and updated. A distinction is made between customer components
and Parker components. Databases with Parker components are already available
upon delivery, the customer has furthermore the possibility to create new
components from different suppliers in the customer database in order to make
possible their operation together with Compax3.
All component data can be called up and printed out. Existing components can be
used as templates for new components. A caracteristic with the specific flow rate
can be read in and memorized for each valve .
The detailed characterization of the components facilitates the commisisioning of
the hydraulic system, as a pre-parameterization of the control loop is effected
during the Compax3 configuration with the aid of these characteristic values.
An up-to-date Parker component database can be downloaded from the internet.
The customer component databases are not overwritten.
4.1.1.2
Structure of the databases
4 databases contain the data of the hydraulics components.

Parker valves with characteristics (Valve.mdb)
Parker actuators and path-measurement systems (CylinderDrive.mdb)
Customer valves with characteristics (ValveC.mdb)
Customer actuators and path-measurement systems (CylinderDriveC.mdb)
42
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.1.2.
Setting up Compax3
Compax3F structure image

3
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveSuperImposed
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_CamIn
MC_GearIn
C3_PressureForceAbsolute
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveSuperImposed
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_CamIn
MC_GearIn
Main axis
Pos Control 1
Main axis
PressureForce
Control 1
10V/10mA
0 ... 20mA
100mA
X2/1
Conditioning Chain 1
PA PB P0 PT
10V/10mA
0 ... 20mA
100mA
X2/3
PA PB P0 PT
10V/10mA
0 ... 20mA
X2/5
PA PB P0 PT
10V/10mA
0 ... 20mA
X 2/7
Auxiliary axis
Pos Control 2
Auxiliary axis
PressureForce
Control 2
X2/11
Pos Feedback 1
RS422 (TTL)
Start/Stop
Configuration
X11
SSI
Pos Feedback 0
RS422 (TTL)
Start/Stop
SSI
X13
SinusCosinus
EnDat 2.1
Configuration
0 ... 20mA
dynamic
C3_pQ
0 ... 20mA
0 ... 20mA
(pA2-pB2) / F2
dynamic
MC_Stop
X2/9
Configuration
C3_PressureAbsolute
C3_ForceAbsolute
Configuration
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveSuperImposed
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_CamIn
MC_GearIn
PA PB P0 PT
(pA1-pB1) / F1
192-121101 N04 June 2008
0 ... 20mA
10V
10V
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
X1/3_4
X1/7_8
X1/11_12
X1/15_16
X1/19_20
X1/17_18
43
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Components of Compax3F:
4 controllers for 2 axes
Main axis position controller (Main axis: Pos Control 1)
Main axis pressure difference / force controller (Main axis: PressureForce
Control 1)
Auxiliary axis position controller (Auxiliary axis: Pos Control 2)
Auxiliary axis pressure difference / force controller (Auxiliary axis:
PressureForce Control 2)
4 Conditioning Chains for the liearisation of the valves and cylinders
The axis assignment is made via the valve configuration (Valve configuration)
For the linearisation, pressures can be made available to the Conditioning
Chains (fixed or measured pressures: pA, pB, p0, pT).
The Conditioning Chains are fixedly connected to the analog outputs.
Interfaces for actual position values
Pos Feedback 2 or configurable analog interface for the auxiliary axis
(Configuration switch)
Pos Feedback 2 or configurable analog interface for the main axis
(Configuration switch)
6 analog interfaces for pressures or force (or position)
Assignment to the axis via configuration
Assignment to the Conditioning Chain via the configuration (axis assignment,
valve assignment)
Setpoint predefinition via IEC61131-3 modules
Static (1), (2), or dynamic (dynamic) (3) switching via IEC61131-3 modules
4.1.3.
Drive configuration
Please select the number of drives (1 or 2) to be controlled (by open or closed
loop) with Compax3F.
Physical system: Selection of the unit for the force or pressure control
The unit for force is Newton and a force is controlled
For differential pressure the unit is Bar or PSI (depending on the unit system)
and a differential pressure is controlled.
Unit system: Global selection of units for the entry and display of data
Metric (SI): N, Bar, m
Imperial (US/UK): N, PSI, inch
Inversion of the direction: Inverts the direction of movement of the drives.
Definition of the sense of direction (without direction inversion): In positive

direction, the cap end (A) of a cylinder is charged with pressure.
44
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.1.4.
Setting up Compax3
Configuring drive1
Position feedback system drive1 ........................................................................................45
Cylinder / motor selection ...................................................................................................46
Load configuration drive1 ...................................................................................................46
4.1.4.1
Position feedback system drive1

If the position feedback system is part of the cylinder / motor, it has already been
parameterized in the C3HydraulicsManager and this step is not needed.
Parameterizing a position feedback system:
General entries for each position feedback system:
Inversion of the direction: Inverts the sense of direction.
Rotatory position feedback system?
'EnDat (no further entries)
Sine cosine & RS422 encoder
Resolution in m / bit
SSI:
Resolution in m / bit
Update rate: Necessary updating time of the actual value in s.
Word length: Gives the telegram length of the sensor.
Gray code: Sensor gray code coded yes/no.
Synchronous system: Sensor sends data synchronously to Compax3F step
yes/no
Baud rate/step: Max. transmission rate of the path measurement system.
Start-Stop:
Velocity of sound: Speed, at which the mechanical wave moves within the range
of the wave guide (e.g. 2830 m/s).
Update rate: Necessary updating time of the actual value in s.
Analog:
Selection of the C3f analog interface
(2) - (1): Length path measurement system.

(3): Minimum signal of the path measurement system.
(4): Maximum signal of the path measurement system.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
45
Setting up Compax3
4.1.4.2
C3F_T30
Cylinder / motor selection

The selection is made from the hdydraulics database.
Parker cylinders or Parker motors are stored there.
Furthermore you can create customer-specific cylinders/motors with the aid of the
C3HydraulicsManager and then select them here.
The selection of the drive is separated as follows:
Parker Cylinder
Customer cylinders.
Cylinder / motor data from the hydraulics database
A cylinder / motor can be created in the hydraulics database with or without
position feedback system.
4.1.4.3
Load configuration drive1

In order to make the settings of the servo controller, information on the external
load is needed. The more accurately the load of the system is known, the better is
the stability and the shorter is the settle-down time of the control loop. It is
important to specify the minimum and maximum external load for best possible
behavior under varying loads.
With rotatory drives: as minimum and maximum external moment of inertia.
With linear drives: as minimum and maximum external mass.
With a fixed load, minimum = maximum load or moment is entered.
Installation position for linear drives:
The installation position is entered as an angle. For an upright load upwards, the
installation position is 90.
Stroke length for linear drives:

This value is not stored in the hydraulics database.
46
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.1.5.
Setting up Compax3
Configuring drive2
The following dialogs can only be selected, if under "number of drives" 2 drives
were selected.
Drive2 is configured as described under drive1, the selection of the path
measurement system EnDat and Sine/Cosine is however not available for drive2.
Select operating mode (only applies for Compax3 T30 and T40; not for
Compax3 Ixx11)
The possible operating mode of the auxiliary axis depends on the operating mode
set for the main axis
Main axis operating mode
Possible operating mode of the auxiliary
axis
Pressure/Force Controller
Positioning & Pressure/Force Controller Positioning & Pressure/Force Controller
or
4.1.6.
Sensors
Force or pressure sensors are req
uired for the control of force or pressure.
Altogether 6 analog inputs are available for the integration of the pressure and
force sensors for the drives 1 and 2 (if no analog input is used as position feedback
system).
Inputs that are not utilized can be used in an IEC61131-3 program (for example as
setpoint input).
4.1.6.1
Pressure sensors
Pressure sensors can be used for the cnontrol of pressure or force (with pressure
PA & PB).
If pressure sensors are utilized for the control of force, the resulting force is
calculated via the the differential pressure PA - PB and the ratio of major area to
minor area of the cap
A maximum of 4 pressure sensors per axis can be parameterized. The logic
assignment of the sensors results from the following image.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
47
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Interface:
Select the interface where the sensor is connected. Only the freely available
inputs are displayed.
p
2
I, U
(1) pressure min.: Enter the minimum pressure.
(2) pressure max.: Enter the maximum pressure.
(3) Sensor signal min.: Enter the minimum singal of the pressure sensor.
(4) Sensor signal max.: Enter the maximum singal of the pressure sensor.
Constant pressure: If the pressure is constant, a pressure sensor is not
necessary. You can then specify a constant pressure value instead.
Example: Parameterization interface supply pressure p0
4.1.6.2
Force sensor drive 1

F
48
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
If a force sensor is used for force control, the following parameters must be
entered:
Interface:
Select the interface where the sensor is connected. Only the freely available
inputs are displayed.
F
2
3
4
I, U
1
Force min.: Enter the minimum force (1).
Force max.: Enter the maximum force (2).
Sensor signal min.: Enter the minimum singal of the pressure sensor (3).
Sensor signal max.: Enter the maximum singal of the pressure sensor (4).
Force constant: If the force is constant, a force sensor is not necessary. You can
then specify a constant force value instead.
4.1.6.3
Pressure and force sensor drive 2

The following dialogs can only be selected, if under "number of drives" 2 drives
were selected before.
The sensors for drive 2 are configured as described under drive 1.
4.1.7.
Valve configuration
Up to 4 valves can be selected. Those valves (0..3) are fixedly assigned to the
analog outputs I/Uout0...3 and are assigned within the configuration to the drives 1
and 2 as well as to the position and force/pressure control loops.
Not all valves must necessarily be used.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
49
Setting up Compax3
4.1.7.1
C3F_T30
Selection and configuration of the valves

The selection of the respective valves is made from the hdydraulics database. You
can choose between Parker valves or customized valves that were created with the
aid of the C3HydraulicsManager from the database.
The valves in the valve database are structured as follows:
Parker Valves
Porportional direction control valves
...
High dynamics, high repeatability
VCD Dynamics, highest precision
D*FP
...
Pressure valves
Pressure control valves
PE
Pressure reducing valves

RE
...
Flow-control valves
...
TDL
...
Other valves
Input values:
Control variable limitation [min.][max.]:
Via these parameters, the control signal of the valve is limited. This limitation is
above all sensible during commissioning in order to avoid an uncontrolled
movement of the axis if the parameterization is not yet optimal.
(1) min. control variable limitation

(2) max. control variable limitation
Drive:
Hereby you can define the assignment of the selected valve to a specific drive.
This dialog comes only up, if 2 drives were selected.
50
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Control range of the position controller.

The "control range" parameter
--100%...100%
0...100% (P -> A)
-100%...0 (A -> T)
0...100% (B -> T)
-100%...0 (P -> B)
defines the output range of the position controller for the selected valve.
If you enter "--", the valve is not influenced by the position controller.
Control range of the force/pressure control loop:
The "control range" parameter
--100%...100%
0...100% (P -> A)
-100%...0 (A -> T)
0...100% (B -> T)
-100%...0 (P -> B)
defines the output range of the force/pressure controller for the selected valve.
If you enter "--", the valve is not influenced by the force/pressure controller.
4.1.8.
Defining the reference system

The reference system for positioning is defined by:
a unit,
the travel distance per motor revolution,
a machine zero point with true zero,
positive and negative end limits.
4.1.8.1
Absolute feedback
system
Position transducer
For positioning operation of two axes with a Compax3F, we recommend an

absolute feedback system
Thus the homing run after switching on, which is only possible in coupled state for
2 axes and may lead to difficulties with definedly referencing the auxiliary axis is
not necessary.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
51
Setting up Compax3
4.1.8.2
C3F_T30
Machine Zero
Positioning after homing run .............................................................................................. 52
Machine zero speed and acceleration ............................................................................... 53
Machine zero modes overview .......................................................................................... 54
Homing modes with home switch (on X12/14) .................................................................. 56
Machine zero modes without home switch ........................................................................ 63
Adjusting the machine zero proximity switch ..................................................................... 67
The Compax3 machine zero modes are adapted to the CANopen profile for Motion
Control CiADS402.
Position reference
point
Essentially, you can select between operation with or without machine reference.
The reference point for positioning is determined by using the machine reference
and the machine reference offset.
Machine reference run

In a homing run the drive normally moves to the position value 0 immediately after
finding the home switch. The position value 0 is defined via the homing offset.
A machine reference run is required each time after turning on the system for
operation with machine reference.
Please note:
During homing run the software end limits are not monitored.
Positioning after homing run

The positioning made after the home switch has been found can be switched off.
For this enter in the machine zero window in the configuration wizard no under
approach MN point after MN run.
Example Homing mode 20 (Home on homing switch) with T40 by homing
offset 0
With positioning after homing run The motor stands then on 0:
52
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Without positioning after homing run The position reached is not exactly on
0, as the drive brakes when detecting the home and stops:
Please note:
In controlled operation (open loop) no machine zero run is possible!
The home of the auxiliary axis is automatically set, by coupling the auxiliary
axis to the main axis for the homing run!
Homing run for 2 axes
Axis 2 is coupled to axis 1 and moves along
Axis 1 and axis 2 set the home at the same time after axis 1 has detected the
homing switch
Therefore you should bring the auxiliary axis to a defined start position before the
homing run.
Or use absolute feedback systems:
Absolute feedback
system

not necessary.
Machine zero speed and acceleration

With these values you can define the motion profile of the machine zero run.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
53
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Machine zero modes overview

Selection of the machine zero modes (MN-M)
Machine home switch
on X12/14:
MN-M 3 ... 14, 19 ... 30
Without machine zero

initiator on X12/14:
MN-M 1, 2, 17, 18, 33 ..
35, 128, 129, 130 ... 133
Without motor reference point without direction reversal switches: MN-M 19, 20 (see page 56),
MN-M 21, 22 (see page 57)
MN-M 19 ...30
with reversal switches: MN-M 23, 24, 25, 26 (see page 58), MNM 27, 28, 29, 30 (see page 59)
With motor reference point
without direction reversal switches: MN-M 3, 4 (see page 60),
MN-M 5, 6 (see page 61)
MN-M 3 ... 14
with reversal switches: MN-M 7, 8, 9, 10 (see page 62), MN-M
11,12,13, 14 (see page 62)
Without motor reference point MN-M 35: at the current Position (see page 63)
MN-M 128, 129: while moving to block (see page 63)
MN-M 17, 18, 35, 128, 129
With limit switch as machine zero: MN-M 17, 18 (see page 64)
Only motor reference: MN-M 33, 34 (see page 65), MN-M 130,
131 (see page 65)
MN-M 1, 2, 33, 34, 130 ... 133 With limit switch as machine zero: MN-M 1, 2 (see page 66),
MN-M 132, 133 (see page 67)
Definition of terms / explanations:

Motor zero point
Machine zero initiator:

Direction reversal
switches:
54
Zero pulse of the feedback

Motor feedback systems such as resolvers or SinCos / EnDat give
one pulse per revolution.
Some motor feedback systems of direct drives do also have a zero
pulse, which is generated once or in defined intervals.
By interpreting the motor zero point (generally in connection with the
machine zero initiator) the machine zero can be defined more
exactly.
For creating the mechanical reference
Has a defined position within or on the edge of the travel range.
Initiators on the edge of the travel range, which are used only with a
machine zero run in order to detect the end of the travel range.
In some cases, the function direction reversal via Following error
threshold" is also possible, then you will need no initiator, Compax3
detects the end of the travel range via the threshold. Please observe
the respective notes.
During operation, the direction reversal switches are often used as
limit switches.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Example axis with the initiator signals
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
Direction reversal / end switch on the negative end of the travel range
(the assignment of the reversal / end switch inputs (see page 72) to travel range side
can be changed).
Machine zero initiator (can, in this example, be released to 2 sides)
Direction reversal / end switch on the positive end of the travel range
(the assignment of the reversal / end switch inputs (see page 72) to travel range side
can be changed).
Positive direction of movement
Signals of the motor zero point (zero pulse of the motor feedback)
Signal of the machine zero initiator
(without inversion of the initiator logic (see page 72)).
Signal of the direction reversal resp. end switch on the positive end of the travel range
(without inversion of the initiator logic).
Signal of the direction reversal / resp. end switch on the negative end of the travel range
(without inversion of the initiator logic).
Signal of the machine zero initiator
(with inversion of the initiator logic (see page 72)).
Signal of the direction reversal / resp. end switch on the positive end of the travel range
(with inversion of the initiator logic).
Signal of the direction reversal / resp. end switch on the negative end of the travel range
(with inversion of the initiator logic).
Logic state of the home switch (independent of the inversion)
Logic state of the direction reversal resp. end switch on the positive end of the travel
range (independent of the inversion)
Logic state of the direction reversal resp. end switch on the negative end of the travel
range (independent of the inversion)
The following principle images of the individual machine zero modes always refer
to the logic state (12, 13, 14) of the switches.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
55
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Homing modes with home switch (on X12/14)

Without motor reference point ........................................................................................... 56
With motor reference point ................................................................................................ 60
Without motor reference point

Without direction reversal switches ................................................................................... 56
With direction reversal switches ........................................................................................ 58
Without direction reversal switches

MN-M 3.4: MN-Initiator = 1 on the positive side ................................................................ 60
MN-M 5.6: MN initiator = 1 on the negative side ............................................................... 61

MN-M 19.20: MN-Initiator = 1 on the positive side ............................................................ 56
MN-M 21.22: MN initiator = 1 on the negative side ........................................................... 57
MN-M 19.20: MN-Initiator = 1 on the positive side

The MN initiator can be positioned at any location within the travel range. The
travel range is then divided into 2 contiguous ranges: one range with deactivated
MN initiator (left of the MN initiator) and one range with activated MN initiator (right
of the MN initiator).
When the MN initiator is inactive (signal = 0) the search for the machine reference
is in the positive travel direction.
Without motor zero
point, without
direction reversal
switches
MN-M 19:The negative edge of the MN proximity switch is used directly as MN

(home) (the motor zero point remains without consideration).
MN-M 20:The positive edge of the MN proximity switch is used directly as MN
19
19
20
20
1
1: logic state
56
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
MN-M 21.22: MN initiator = 1 on the negative side

MN initiator (positive part of the travel range) and one range with activated MN
initiator (negative part of the travel range).
is in the negative travel direction.
Without motor zero
point, without
direction reversal
switches
MN-M 21:The negative edge of the MN proximity switch is used directly as MN

MN-M 22:The positive edge of the MN proximity switch is used directly as MN
21
21
22
22
1
1: logic state
192-121101 N04 June 2008
57
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
With direction reversal switches

MN-M 1, 2: Limit switch as machine zero .......................................................................... 66
MN-M 132, 133: Determine absolute position via distance coding with direction reversal switches
........................................................................................................................................... 67

MN-M 7...10: Direction reversal switches on the positive side .......................................... 62
MN-M 11...14: With direction reversal switches on the negative side ............................... 62

MN-M 23...26: Direction reversal switches on the positive side ........................................ 58
MN-M 27...30: With direction reversal switches on the negative side ............................... 59
Machine zero modes with a home switch which is activated in the middle of the
travel range and can be deactivated to both sides.
The assignment of the direction reversal switches (see page 72) can be
changed.
Function Reversal via Following error threshold
If no direction reversal switches are available, the reversal of direction can also be
performed during the machine zero run via the function direction reversal via
Following error threshold"
Here the drive runs towards the mechanical limit mounted at the end of the travel
range.
When the settable Following error threshold is reached, the drive is braked and
changes the travel direction.
Caution!
Wrong settings can cause hazard for man and machine.
It is therefore essential to respect the following:
Choose a low machine zero speed.
Set the machine zero acceleration to a high value, so that the drive changes
direction quickly, the value must, however, not be so high that the limit threshold
is already reached by accelerating or decelerating (without mechanical limitation).
The mechanical limitation as well as the load drain must be set so that they can
absorb the resulting kinetic energy.
MN-M 23...26: Direction reversal switches on the positive side

Without motor zero point, with direction reversal switches
24
23
26
25
23
26
24
23
25
24
1
2
1: Logic state of the home switch
2: Logic state of the direction reversal switch
58
25
192-121101 N04 June 2008
26
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
MN-M 27...30: With direction reversal switches on the negative side

Without motor zero point, with direction reversal switches
30
28
29
27
30
27
29
28
27
29
30
28
1
2
192-121101 N04 June 2008
59
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

Without direction reversal switches ................................................................................... 60
Without direction reversal switches
MN-M 3.4: MN-Initiator = 1 on the positive side

MN initiator (left of the MN initiator) and one range with activated MN initiator (right
of the MN initiator).
is in the positive travel direction.
With motor zero
point, without
direction reversal
switches
MN-M 3:The 1st motor zero point with MN initiator = "1" is used as MN.
3
3
4
4
1
2
1: Motor zero point
60
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
MN-M 5.6: MN initiator = 1 on the negative side

MN initiator (positive part of the travel range) and one range with activated MN
initiator (negative part of the travel range).
is in the negative travel direction.
With motor zero
point, without
direction reversal
switches
MN-M 5:The 1st motor zero point with MN proximity switch = "0" is used as MN.
5
5
6
6
1
2
1: Motor zero point
changed.
range.
Caution!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
61
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
MN-M 7...10: Direction reversal switches on the positive side

With motor zero
point, with direction
reversal switches
8
7
10
9
10
8
9
9
10
1
2
3
1: Motor zero point
MN-M 11...14: With direction reversal switches on the negative side
With motor zero
point, with direction
reversal switches
14
12
13
11
14
11
13
12
13
14
12
1
2
3
1: Motor zero point
62
11
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Machine zero modes without home switch

Without motor reference point ........................................................................................... 63
With motor reference point ................................................................................................ 65
Without motor reference point

MN-M 35: MN at the current position................................................................................. 63
MN-M 128/129: Following error threshold when moving to block...................................... 63
MN-M 17.18: Limit switch as machine zero ....................................................................... 64
MN-M 35: MN at the current position

The current position when the MN run is activated is used as an MN.
35
MN-M 128/129: Following error threshold when moving to block

Without a MN (machine zero) initiator, an end of travel region (block) is used as
MN (machine zero).
For this the Following error threshold is evaluated if the drive pushes against the
end of the travel region. If the limit is exceeded, the MN is set. During the homing
run (MN), the error reaction "following error" is deactivated.
Please observe:
The homing offset must be set so that the home (reference point) for positioning
lies witihn the travel range.
MN-M 128:Travel in the positive direction to the end of the travel region
MN-M 129:Travel in the negative direction to the end of the travel region
Caution!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
63
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
MN-M 17.18: Limit switch as machine zero
17
18
1
range.
Caution!
64
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3

Machine zero only from motor reference ........................................................................... 65
Machine zero only from motor reference

MN-M 33,34: MN at motor zero point ................................................................................ 65
MN-M 130, 131: Determine absolute position via distance coding.................................... 65
MN-M 33,34: MN at motor zero point

The motor reference point is now evaluated (no MN initiator):
Without home
switch
MN-M 33:For a MN run, starting from the current position, the next motor zero point
in the negative travel direction is taken as the MN.
MN-M 34:For a MN run, starting from the current position, the next motor zero point
in the positive travel direction is taken as the MN.
33
34
1
1: Motor zero point
MN-M 130, 131: Determine absolute position via distance coding
Only for motor feedback with distance coding (the absolute position can be
determined via the distance value).
Compax3 determines the absolute position from the distance of two signals and
then stops the movement (does not automatically move to position 0).
1: Signals of the distance coding
192-121101 N04 June 2008
65
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

changed.
range.
Caution!
MN-M 1, 2: Limit switch as machine zero

End switch on the negative side
1
1
2
1: Motor zero point
End switch on the positive side:
2
1
2
1: Motor zero point
66
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
MN-M 132, 133: Determine absolute position via distance coding with
direction reversal switches
Only for motor feedback with distance coding (the absolute position can be
determined via the distance value).
Compax3 determines the absolute position from the distance of two signals and
then stops the movement (does not automatically move to position 0).
133
133
132
132
1
2
1: Signals of the distance coding

2: Logic state of the direction reversal switches
Adjusting the machine zero proximity switch

This is helpful in some cases with homing modes that work with the home switch
and motor reference point.
If the motor reference point happens to coincide with the position of the MN
initiator, there is a possibility that small movements in the motor position will cause
the machine reference point to shift by one motor revolution (to the next motor
reference point).
1
2
1: Motor zero point

A solution to this problem is to move the MN initiator by means of software. This is
done using the value initiator adjustment.
Initiator adjustment
Range: -360 ... 360
Unit:
Motor angle in degrees
Move the machine reference initiator using software
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Standard value: 0
67
Setting up Compax3
4.1.8.3
C3F_T30
Travel Limit Settings

Please note:
Both the software and the hardware end limits are the same for the main axis
and the auxiliary axis!
Software end limits

The error reaction when reaching the software end limits can be set:
Possible settings for the error reaction are:
No response
downramp / stop
Downramp / switch to currentless (standard setting)
If "no reaction" was set, no software limits must be entered.
Software end limits:
The travel range is defined via the negative and positive end limits.
1
1: negative end limit

2: positive end limit
Software end limit in absolute operating mode
The positioning is restricted to the range between the travel limits.
A positioning order aiming at a target outside the travel range is not executed.
1
2
Gearing, ...
Jog

The reference is the position reference point that was defined with the machine
reference and the machine reference offset.
Software end limits in reset mode
The reset mode does not support software end limits
68
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Software end limit in continuous mode

Each individual positioning is confined within the travel limits.
A positioning order aiming at a target outside the software end limits is not
executed.
The reference is the respective current position.
Error when
disregarding the
software end limits
A software end limit error is triggered, if the position value exceeds an end limit.
For this, the position setpoint value is evaluated in energized state; in
currentless state, the actual position value is evaluated.
Hysteresis in disabled state:
If the axis stands currentless at an end limit, another error may be reported due to
position jitter after acknowledging the end limit error.
To avoid this, a hysteresis
surrounding the end limits was integrated (size corresponds to the size of the
positioning window).
Only if the distance between axis and the end limits was larger than the positioning
window, another end limit error will be detected
Error codes of the end limit errors:
0x7323 Error when disregarding the positive software end limit.
0x7324 Error when disregarding the negative software end limit.
Activating / deactivating the end limit error:
In the C3 ServoManager under configuration: End limits, the error can be
(de)activated.
For IEC-programmable devices with the "C3_ErrorMask" module.
Behavior after the

system is turned on
Behavior outside the

travel range
The end limits are not active after switching on. The end limits do not refer to the
position reference point until after a machine reference run.
During homing run the end limits are not monitored.
With a Multiturn encoder or with active Multiturn emulation, the limit is valid
immediately after switching on.
1. If the software end limit errors are deactivated, all movements are
possible.
2. if the software end limit errors are activated:
After disregarding the software end limits, an error is triggered. First of all, this error
must be acknowledged.
Then a direction block is activated: only motion commands in the direction of the
travel range are executed. These will not trigger another error.
Motion commands inciting a movement in the opposite direction of the travel range
are blocked and will trigger another error.
Error
Error
1
Notes on special feedback systems (Feedback F12)

During automatic commutation, the end limit monitoring is deactivated!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
69
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Behavior with software end limits of a referenced axis

Position within
target outside
JOG +/-
Position outside
target outside and aiming
in the opposite direction
of the travel range
Positioning up to the end

limits
No positioning
Position outside
target within and aiming
in the direction of the
travel range
Positioning
No Error
No Error
MC_MoveAbsolute,
MC_MoveRelative,
MC_MoveAdditive,
MC_MoveSuperImposed
MC_GearIn,
MC_Cam...
C3_Cam...
No positioning
No positioning
Positioning
Error
Error

limits, from these on
braking with the error
ramp.
The end limit is
exceeded
No positioning
No positioning
Error
Error
No positioning
Positioning
Error
MC_MoveVelocity

limits
Error
Error
MC_Home
70
No monitoring of the software end limits

The software end limit error can be deactivated in general via the configuration or
separately for each end limit via the C3_Error_Mask f module.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Hardware end limits
The error reaction when reaching the hardware end limits can be set:
No response
downramp / stop
Hardware end limits are realized with the aid of end switches.
These are connected to X12/12 (input 5) and X12/13 (input 6) and can be
(de)activated separately in the C3 ServoManager under Configuration: End limits.
After a limit switch has been detected, the drive decelerates with the ramp values
set for errors (error code 0x54A0 at X12/12 active, 0x54A1 at X12/13 active) and
the motor is switched to currentless.
Please make sure that after the detection of the end switch there is enough travel
path left up to the limit stop.
1
2
V
1: Limit switch E5 (X12/12)

2: Limit switch E6 (X12/13)
3: Limit switch position E5 (X12/12)
4: Limit switch position E6 (X12/13)
The assignment of the end switches (see page 72) can be changed!
Please note:
The limit switches must be positioned so that they cannot be released towards the
side to be limited.
Limit switch /
direction reversal
switch
Behavior in the case
of an active limit
switch
Limit switches functioning as direction reversal switches during homing run, will not
trigger a limit switch error.
(De)activate limite
switch errors
The end limit error can be deactivated in general via the configuration or separately
for each end limit via the C3_Error_Mask module.
The error can be acknowledged with activated limit switch.

The drive can then be moved out of the end switch range with a normal positioning.
Both directions of movement are possible.
A direction block can be programmed in the IEC program with the aid of the limit
switch bits or the error message.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
71
Setting up Compax3
4.1.8.4
C3F_T30
Change assignment direction reversal / limit switches

If this function is not activated, the direction reversal / end switches are assigned
as follows:
Direction reversal / limit switch on E5 (X12/12): negative side of the travel range
Direction reversal / limit switch on E6 (X12/13): Direction reversal / limit switch on
E6 (X12/13):
Change assignment
of direction reversal
/ limit switch is
activated
4.1.8.5
If this function is activated, the direction reversal / limit switches are assigned as
follows:
Direction reversal / limit switch on E5 (X12/12): positive side of the travel range
Direction reversal / limit switch on E6 (X12/13): negative side of the travel range
Change initiator logic

The initiator logic of the limit switches (this does also apply for the direction
reversal switches) and the machine zero initiator can be changed separately.
Limit switch E5 low active
Limit switch E6 low active
Home switch E7 low active
In the basic settings the inversion is deactivated, so that the signals are high
active.
With this setting the inputs I5 to I7 can even be switched within their logic, if they
are not used as direction reversal/limit switches or machine zero.
4.1.8.6
Debouncing: Limit switch, machine zero and input 0

A majority gate is used for debouncing.
The signal is sampled every 0.5ms
The debounce time determines the number of scans the majority gate will perform.
If the level of more than half of the signals was changed, the internal status will
change.
The debounce time can be set in the configuration wizard within the range of 0 ...
20ms.
The value 0 deactivates the debouncing.
If the debouncing time is stated, the input I0 can be debounced as well (checkbox
below).
4.1.9.
Ramp upon error and switch to currentless

Ramp (deceleration) upon error and "switch to currentless"
3: Deceleration upon error and upon deactivation of MC_Power (see page 163)
Please observe:
The configured error ramp is limited. The error ramp will not be smaller than the
deceleration set in the last motion set.
72
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
4.1.10. Limit and monitoring settings of force

Force window - force achieved...........................................................................................73
Maximum control deviation of force controller ....................................................................74
Maximum force ...................................................................................................................74
Hydraulic corner power limitation .......................................................................................74
Please note:
Limit and monitoring settings are the same for the main axis as well as for
the auxiliary axis!
4.1.10.1
Force window - force achieved

"Force achieved" indicates that the actual force is within the tolerance window of
the setpoint force. In addition to the force window, a force window time is
supported. If the actual force goes inside the force window, the force window time
is started.
If the actual force is still within the force window after the force window time, "force
achieved = 1" will be set.
If the actual force leaves the force window within the force window time, the force
window time is started again. When leaving the force window, "force achieved" is
set immediately to "0".
The force monitoring is even active, if the force leaves the force window due to
external measures.
1: Force window
2: Force window time
3: Setpoint force reached (== object ForceAccuracy_ForceReached)
Linkage to the setpoint value
The signal force attained can be linked to the setpoint value.
In addition, the internal setpoint value generation is evaluated.
It applies: The force window is only evaluated with a constant internal
setpoint value.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
73
Setting up Compax3
4.1.10.2
C3F_T30
Maximum control deviation of force controller

The force control deviation is a dynamic error.
The dynamic difference between the setpoint force and the actual force during a
force control is called the force control deviation. Do not confuse this with the static
difference which is always 0; the target force is always achieved exactly.
If the force control deviation exceeds the given limit (max. control deviation of force
controller), the "time window" elapses.
If the force control deviation after the time window still exceeds the threshold, an
error is reported.
If the force control deviation is below the threshold, the time window is started
anew.
1: max. control deviation of force controller

2: time window force control deviation
NO ERROR: Error output of positioning modules
QUIT: Ackn with MC_Reset module
4.1.10.3
Maximum force
if the "maximum force" is exceeded, an error is reported.
This monitoring is only active, if pressure sensors are present for pA and / or pB.
4.1.10.4
Hydraulic corner power limitation

The hydraulic corner power is calculated from the differential pressure between p0
and pA or pB. If pressure sensors are present for pA as well as for pB, both
differential pressures are evaluated.
B
P = Q . Dp
74
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
The corner power limitation can only be activated, if at least one pressure sensor
for pA or pB and p0 was parameterized before.
Note:
Currently, the corner power is calculated; which must however, if necessary, be
limited in the IEC program!
the corner power can be read from the objects C3.HydraulicPower_Axis1,
C3.HydraulicPower_Axis2 and C3.HydraulicPower_Sum.
the unit is [W]; this means that the standardization is only correct for the metric
system.
The hydraulic power is calculated from the units bar and I/min according to the
following equation:
P[kW ] =
p[bar ] Q[l / min]

600
4.1.11. Positioning window - Position reached

Position reached indicates that the target position is located within the position
window.
In addition to the position window, a position window time is supported. If the actual
position goes inside the position window, the position window time is started. If the
actual position is still inside the position window after the position window time,
"Position reached" is set.
If the actual position leaves the position window within the position window time,
the position window time is started again.
When the actual position leaves the position window with Position reached = "1",
Position reached is immediately reset to "0".
Position monitoring is active even if the position leaves the position window
because of measures taken externally.
1: Positioning window
2: positioning window time
3: Setpoint position reached (== object 420.6
C3.PositioningAccuracy_PositionReached)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
75
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
4.1.12. Following error limit

The error reaction upon a following error can be set:
No response
downramp / stop
The following error is a dynamic error.
The dynamic difference between the setpoint position and the actual position
during a positioning is called the following error. Do not confuse this with the static
difference which is always 0; the target position is always reached exactly.
The change of position over time can be specified exactly using the parameters
jerk, acceleration and speed. The integrated Setpoint value generator calculates
the course of the target position. Because of the delay in the feedback loop, the
actual position does not follow the setpoint position exactly. This difference is
referred to as the following error.
Disadvantages
caused by a
following error
In joint operation of several servo controllers (e.g. master controller and slave
controller), following errors lead to problems due to the dynamic position
differences, and a large following error can lead to positioning overshoot.
Error message
If the following error exceeds the specified following error limit, the following error
time then expires. If the following error is even greater than the following error limit
at the end of the following error time, an error is reported.
If the following error falls short of the following error limit, a new following error time
is then started.
Minimizing the
following error
The following error can be minimized with the help of the extended (advanced)
control parameters, in particular with the feed forward parameters.
1: Following error limit [parameterized unit]

2: Tracking error time
ERROR:Error output of positioning modules
QUIT:Ackn with MC_Reset module
4.1.13. Maximum permissible speed

The limitation of the speed controller is deduced from the maximum permissible
speed. In order to ensure control margins, the speed is limited to a higher value.
The speed setpoint value is actively limited to 1.1 times the given value.
If the speed actual value exceeds the preset maximum permissible speed by 21%
(=switching off limit speed), error 0x7310 is triggered.
76
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
4.1.14. Encoder Simulation

You can make use of a permanently integrated encoder simulation feature to make
the actual position value available to additional servo drives or other automation
components.
Caution!
The encoder simulation is not possible at the same time as the encoder input
resp. the step/direction input or the SSI interface.
The same interface is used here.
A direction reversal configured in the C3 ServoManager does not affect the
encoder simulation.
The direction of rotation of the encoder simulation can, however, be changed via
the feedback direction in the MotorManager.
Simulated Encoder Output Resolution

Range: 4 - 16384
Unit: Increments per
500mm*
Any resolution can be set
Limit frequency: 620kHz i. e. for:
Increments per 500mm
max. velocity
1024
30m/s
4096
7.5m/s
16384
Standard value: 1024
1.8m/s
* or with a rotary feedback travel per feedback rotation
192-121101 N04 June 2008
77
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
4.1.15. Recipe table

If you would like to work with the recipe array (see page 155), (e.g. for the storage
of variable machine data) you can make preassignments in it with Compax3
ServoManager.
Note:
The recipe array can also be loaded separately into the device (>button on the right
side).
4.1.16. Error response

Under "configuring: Under "configuration: error reaction" you can change the error
reaction for individual errors (the error no. which can be influenced is displayed).
No response
downramp / stop
78
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
4.1.17. Configuration name / comments

Here you can name the current configuration as well as write a comment.
Then you can download the configuration settings or, in T30 or T40 devices,
perform a complete Download (with IEC program and curve).
Caution!
Deactivate the drive before downloading the configuration software!
N.B.!
Incorrect configuration settings entail danger when activating the drive.
Therefore take special safety precautions to protect the travel range of
the system.
Mechanical limit values!
Observe the limit values of the mechanical components!
Ignoring the limit values can lead to destruction of the mechanical
components.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
79
Setting up Compax3
4.2
C3F_T30
Configuring the signal source

Physical Source..................................................................................................................80
Internal virtual master .........................................................................................................83
HEDA Master signal source ...............................................................................................83
Possible master signal sources

Under the tree entry Configuring the signal source of the C3 ServoManager you
can configure 3 signal sources for Master Slave applications.
The master signal source can then be selected in the IEC program with the aid of
the C3_MasterControl module via the input Master.
3 signal sources are available:
Physical Source
analog value above +/-10V
Encoder signal A/B (5V)
Step/Direction signal (5V)
SSI Feedback
Internal virtual master (IEC program) (only T40)
HEDA
the "use as current signal source" CheckBox can be found in the signal source
configuration wizards.
This CheckBox is only relevant for the Compax3 firmware versions < V2.05; it is
used to define the signal source for the CoDeSys program.
Otherwise, the signal source is directly selected at the IEC module.
Signal source of the load feedback system

Configuration of the load control (Dual Loop Option)
4.2.1.
Physical Source
Encoder A/B 5V, step/direction or SSI feedback as signal source.....................................80
+/-10V Master speed ..........................................................................................................83
4.2.1.1
Caution!
Encoder A/B 5V, step/direction or SSI feedback as signal source

The encoder simulation is not possible at the same time as the encoder input
resp. the step/direction input or the SSI interface.
The same interface is used here.
A direction reversal configured in the C3 ServoManager does not affect the
encoder simulation.
The direction of rotation of the encoder simulation can, however, be changed via
the feedback direction in the MotorManager.
80
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
The dimensional reference to the master is established via the following settings:
Travel path per motor revolution master axis numerator = 50mm or with a rotary
feedback system: Travel per feedback revolution.
With denominator = 1 the value can be entered directly.
Long-term drift can be avoided by entering non-integral values integrally as a
fraction with numerator and denominator.
Increments per revolution of the master axis
If required the direction of rotation of the master axis read in can be changed.
Example: Electronic gearbox with position detection via encoder

Reference to master
axis
The reference to the master axis is established via the increments per revolution
and the travel path per revolution of the master axis (corresponds to the
circumference of the measuring wheel).
That is:
(1)
MasterPos = Master_I * Travel Distance per Master Axis revolution
(M_Units/rev)
I_M
Travel Distance per Master Axis revolution Denominator
MasterPos: Master Position
Master_I: master increments read in
I_M: Increments per revolution of the master axis
External signal
source
Encoder with 1024 increments per master revolution and a circumference of the
measuring wheel of 40mm.
Settings:
Configuration
wizard:
Gearing:
Travel path per revolution of the master axis numerator = 40

Travel path per revolution of the master axis denominator = 1
Increments per revolution of the master axis = 1024
Reference system of Slave axis: Unit of measure [mm]
Travel path per revolution numerator = 1
Travel path per revolution denominator = 1
Gearing numerator = 2
Gearing denominator = 1
This results in the following interrelations:
If the measuring wheel moves by 40mm (1 master revolution), the slave axis will
move by 80mm.
(2)
Slave unit = MasterPos *
Gearing
numerator
Gearing
denominator
(1) set into (2) and with numerical values results with 1024 increments read in (=1
Master revolution):
1
Slave unit = 1024 *
* 40mm * 2 = 80mm
1024
Master - Position = +40mm => Slave - Position = +80mm
192-121101 N04 June 2008
81
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Structure:
Master Z1 MasterPos
N1
MD =
Z1
N1
Slave_U
to motor
Travel path per revolution slave axis

numerator
N2
Travel path per revolution slave axis
denominator
Feed of the master axis
Feed of the slave axis
SD =
MD:
SD:
Gearing numerator Slave N2

Gearing
Units
Z2
denominator
Detailed structure image
with:
* Travel Distance per Master Axis revolution
(M_Units/rev)
Travel Distance per Master Axis revolution
- Denominator
Z2
Gearbox
Load
Entry in the configuration

of the signal source wizard
Entry in the configuration

of the signal source
wizard
SSI configuration
Notes on the SSI sensor (see page 82)
With Multiturn: Number of sensor rotations with absolute reference
Word length: Gives the telegram length of the sensor.
Baud rate/step: Max. transmission rate of the path measurement system.
Gray code: Sensor gray code coded yes/no (if no binary coded).
Note:
The absolute position is not evaluated!
It is available in the objects 680.24 (load position) and 680.25 (master position)
(C3T30, C3T40).
General requirements for supported SSI feedbacks
Baud rate: 350k ... 5MBaud
Word length: 8 ... 32 Bit
Binary or gray code (start value = 0)
Initialization time after PowerOn: < 1.1s
Signal layout:
82
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
The most significant bit must be transmitted the first!

Caution! Feedback systems, transmitting data containing error or status bits are
not supported!
Examples of supported SSI feedback systems:
IVO / GA241 SSI;
Thalheim / ATD 6S A 4 Y1;
Hbner Berlin / AMG75;
Stegmann / ATM60 & ATM90;
Inducoder / SingleTurn: EAS57 & Multiturn: EAMS57
4.2.1.2
+/-10V Master speed

Via Analog channel 4 (X11/17 and X1/18) the speed of the master is read in.
From this value a position is internally derived.
The reference to the master is established with the velocity at 10V.
Time grid of master signal source

Averaging and a following filter (interpolation) can help to avoid steps caused by
discrete signals.
If the external signal is analog, there is no need to enter a value here (Value = 0).
For discrete signals e.g. from a PLC, the scanning time (or cylce time) of the signal
source is entered.
This function is only available if the analog interface +/-10V is used!
4.2.2.
Internal virtual master

The reset distance of the virtual master is only used for resetting the displayed
value (Object680.2).
The travel per motor revolution of the master axis (numerator/denominator) is set to
1 for a virtual master.
4.2.3.
HEDA Master signal source

Please choose if the virtual master of the HEDA master is transmitted via the
HEDA.
If yes, the input travel per revolution is not necessary, as a positioning signal is
already present.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
83
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
The dimensional reference to the master is established via the following settings:
Travel path per motor revolution ( or pitch for linear motors) master axis
numerator
With denominator = 1 the value can be entered directly.
Long-term drift can be avoided by entering non-integral values integrally as a
fraction with numerator and denominator.
Travel per motor revolution (or pitch ofr linear motors) master axis denominator
84
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3
Setting up Compax3
Optimization
Optimization window...........................................................................................................86
Scope .................................................................................................................................87
Control Loop Dynamics ......................................................................................................95
Input simulation ................................................................................................................145
Setup mode ......................................................................................................................147
ProfileViewer for the optimization of the motion profile ....................................................148
Select the entry "Optimization" in the tree.

Open the optimization window by clicking on the "Optimization Tool" button.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
85
Setting up Compax3
4.3.1.
C3F_T30
Optimization window
Layout and functions of the optimization window
Segmentation
Functions (TABs)
Window1:
Scope (see page 87)
Window 2:
Optimization: Controller optimization (see page 95)

D/A Monitor (see page 333): Output of status values via 2
analog outputs
Scope Settings
Window 3:
Status Display
Compax3 Error History
Window 4:
Status values
Commissioning: Setup mode with load identification
Parameters for commissioning, test movements (relative &
absolute) and for load identification.
86
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.2.
Setting up Compax3
Scope
Monitor information.............................................................................................................87
User interface .....................................................................................................................88
Example: Setting the Oscilloscope.....................................................................................93
The integrated oscilloscope function features a 4-channel oscilloscope for the

display and measurement of signal images (digital and analog) consisting of a
graphic display and a user interface.
Special feature:
in the single mode you can close the ServoManager after the activation of the
measurement and disconnect the PC from Compax3 and upload the measurement
into the ServoManager later.
4.3.2.1
Monitor information
1: Display of the trigger information

2: Display of the operating mode and the zoom setting
2a: Green indicates, that a measurement is active (a measurement can be
started or stopped by clicking here).
2b: Active channel: the active channel can be changed sequentially by clicking
here (only with valid signal source).
3: Trigger point for Single and Normal operating mode
4: Channel information: Type of display and trigger settiing
5: X-DIV: X deviation set
6: Single channel sources
192-121101 N04 June 2008
87
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Cursormodes/ -functions
Depending on the operating mode, different cursor functions are available within
the osci monitor.
The functions can be changed sequentially by pressing on the right mouse button.
Cursor Symbol
Function
Set Marker 1
the measurement values of the active channel as well as the y
difference to marker 2 are displayed
Set Marker 2
Delete and hide marker
Move offset of the active channel.
The yellow symbol indicates that the scrolling is active.
Set trigger level and pretrigger
In the ROLL operating mode, marker functions and set trigger level positions are
not available.
4.3.2.2
User interface
Oscilloscope operating mode switch: ................................................................................ 89
Setting the time basis XDIV ............................................................................................... 89
Settings for channels 1..4 .................................................................................................. 90
Trigger settings .................................................................................................................. 91
Special functions................................................................................................................ 91
88
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
1: Operating mode switch (see page 89) (Single / Normal / Auto / Roll)
2: Setting the time basis (see page 89)
3: Starting / Stopping the measurement (prerequisites are valid channel sources
and if necessary valid trigger settings.)
4: Setting channel (see page 90) (Channels 1 ...4)
5: Special functions (see page 91) (Color settings; memorizing settings and
measurement values)
6: Loading a measurement from Compax3: in the single mode you can close the
ServoManager after the activation of the measurement and disconnect the PC from
Compax3 and upload the measurement later.
7: Setting triggering (see page 91)
8: Copy osci display to clipboard
9: Zoom of the osci display (1, 2, 3, 8, 16 fold) with the possibility to move the zoom
window (<,>)
Oscilloscope operating mode switch:

Oscilloscope operating mode switch:
Selection of the desired operating mode: SINGLE, NORMAL; AUTO and ROLL by
clicking on this button.
Changing the operating mode is also permitted during a measurement. The current
measurement is interrupted and started again with the changed settings.
The following operating modes are possible:
Operating mode
Short description
SINGLE
Single measurements of 1-4 channels with trigger on a freely

selectable channel
NORMAL
Like Single, but after each trigger event, the measurement is
started again.
AUTO
No Trigger. Continuous measuring value recording with the
selected scanning time or XDIV setting
ROLL
Continuous measuring value recording of 1 .. 4 channels with
selectable scanning time and a memory depth of 2000 measuring
values per channel.
With SINGLE / NORMAL / AUTO, the meansurement is made in Compax3 and is
then loaded into the PC and displayed.
With ROLL, the measuring values are loaded into the PC and displayed
continuously.
Setting the time basis XDIV

Setting the time basis XDIV
Depending on the selected operating mode, the time basis can be changed via the
arrow keys.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
89
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
For the operatiing modes SINGLE, NORMAL and AUTO, the following XDIV
time settings are possible:
XDIV
0.5ms
1.0ms
2.0ms
5.0ms
10.0ms
20.0ms
50.0ms
100.0ms
200.0ms
500.0ms
1s
2s
5s
10s
Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Scanning time
125us
125s
125s
125s
125s
250s
625s
1.25ms
2.50ms
6.25ms
12.50s
25.00ms
62.50ms
125.00ms
Samples DIV/TOTAL
4/40
8/80
16/160
40/400
80/800
80/800
80/800
80/800
80/800
80/800
80/800
80/800
80/800
80/800
Measuring time
5ms
10ms
20ms
50ms
100ms
200ms
500ms
1s
2s
5s
10s
20s
50s
100s
For the operating ROLL, the following XDIV time settings are possible:
XDIV
Mode Scanning time Samples DIV/TOTAL
2 ms
54
125us
200/2000
2ms
54
125s
200/2000
4ms
55
125s
200/2000
10ms
56
125s
200/2000
20ms
57
125s
200/2000
40ms
58
125s
200/2000
100ms
59
250s
200/2000
200ms
60
625s
200/2000
Changing the time basis is also permitted during an OSCI measuring sequence.
This means, however, that the current measurement is interrupted and started
again with the changed settings.
Settings for channels 1..4
1: Select channel color

2: Open menu for channel-specific settings
Reset Channel CH 1..4 all channel settings are deleted.
Please note: Channels can only be fileld with sources one after the other. It is, for
example, not possible to start a measurement which has only a signal source for
channel 2!
Select channel color: Here you can change the color of the channel..
show/hide channel: Hide/show display of the channel.
Change logic display mask: Mask bits in logic display.
auto scaling Calculation of YDIV and Offset: The program calculates the best
settings for YDIV and channel offset in order to display the complete signal
values optimally.
90
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
3: Set signal source with object name, number and if necessary unit
Define source: Draw the desired status object with the mouse (drag & drop) from
the "Status value" window (right at the bottom) into this area.
4: Set Channel offset to 0

5: Select channel display (GND, DC, AC, DIG)
DC: Display of the measurement values with constant component
AC: Display of the measurement values without constant component
DIG: Display of the individual bits of an INT signal source.
The displayed bits can be defined via the logic display mask.
GND: A straight line is drawn on the zero line.
6: Set Y-amplification (YDIV)
Change of the Y amplification YDIV in the stages 1,2,5 over all decades.
Arrow upwards increases YDIV, arrow downwards diminishes YDIV.
the standard value is 1 per DIV.
The measurement value of the channel at the cursor cross is displayed.
Trigger settings
Select trigger channel: Buttons C1, C2, C3, C4

Select trigger mode: DC, AC, DG
Select trigger edge: rising_/ or falling \_
the pretrigger as well as the trigger level are set by clicking on the trigger cursor
(
) directly in the OSCI display.
Special functions
Menu with special oscilloscope functions such as memorizing or loading settings.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
91
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Functions:
Select background color: Adapt background color to personal requirements.
Select grid color: Adapt grid color to personal requirements.
Memorize OSCI settings in file: The settings can be memorized in a file on any
drive. The file ending is *.OSC.
The format correspnds to an INI file and is presented in the appendix.
open OSCI settings from file. Loading a memorized set of settings. The file
ending is *.OSC.
Memorizing OSCI settings in the project: Up to four sets of OSCI settings can
be memorized in the current C3 ServoManager project. .
open OSCI settings from project. If settings were memorized in the project,
they can be read in again.
Memorize OSCI measurement in file: Corresponds to memorizing the setting;
the measurement values of the measurement are stored in addition. Thus it is
possible to memorize and read measurements completely with settings. The file
ending is *.OSM.
Exporting measurement values into a CSV file: e.g. for reading into Excel.
92
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.2.3
Setting up Compax3
Example: Setting the Oscilloscope
SINGLE measurement with 2 channels and logic trigger on digital

inputs
The order of the steps is not mandatory, but provides a help for better
understanding.
As a rule, all settings can be changed during a measurement. This will lead to an
automatic interruption of the current measurement and to a re-start of the
measurement with the new settings:
Assumption: A test movement in the commissioning mode is active.
1.) Select OSCI operating mode
2.) Select Time basis XDIV

3.) Select channel 1 signal source digital inputs 120.2 from status tree with
the aid of Drag & Drop
4.) Select channel 2 (filtered actual speed) via "Drag and drop" from the
status tree
5.) Set trigger to channel 1 and DG.
Input of the mask in HEX
Triggering a rising edge to input I1.
BIT 0 (value 1) = I0
BIT 1 (value 2) = I1
BIT 2 (value 4) = I2 etc.
Trigger to input
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
Trigger mask in hex
1
2
4
8
10
20
40
80
The masks can also be combined so that the trigger is only active, if several inputs
are active. Example: Triggering to I2 and I5 and I6 -> 4h + 20h + 40h = 64h
The mask for input I1 is in this case 2.
select rising edge.
Note: If the trigger mask DG (digital) is selected for a channel, the display mode of
the trigger channel is automatically set to DIG display.
6.) Start measurement

7.) Set pretrigger in the OSCI window
Note: There is no level for the DIG trigger The the event lomit determines the mask
If a trigger event occurs, the measurement values are captured until the
measurement is completed.
Afterwards, the measurement values are read from the Compax3 and displayed.
The display mask of trigger channel 1 was not yet limited, therefore it shows all 16
bit tracks (b0...b15). In order to limit it to 8 bit tracks, you must call up the menu for
channel 1 via [CH1] and select "change logic of display mask [H].
Limit the display mask to 8 bit tracks with Mask FFh.
In the display the bit tracks b0 to b7 are now shown:
Example: Only b0 and b1 are to be displayed: Set display mask to 03
192-121101 N04 June 2008
93
Setting up Compax3
94
C3F_T30
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.3.
Setting up Compax3
Control Loop Dynamics

Preparatory settings for the controller alignment................................................................96
Signal filtering with external command value ...................................................................100
Controller structure of main axis.......................................................................................103
Controller strucutre auxiliary axis .....................................................................................104
Feedforward main axis (status controller) ........................................................................105
Feedforward auxiliary axis (status controller) ...................................................................106
Position controller main axis (status controller) ................................................................107
Position controller auxiliary axis (status controller) ..........................................................111
Filter main axis .................................................................................................................114
Filter auxiliary axis ............................................................................................................115
Analog Input .....................................................................................................................116
Force-/Pressure Control main axis ...................................................................................121
Force-/Pressure Control auxiliary axis .............................................................................125
Output signal conditioning 0 .............................................................................................129
Step-by-step optimization .................................................................................................136
The controller optimization of the Compax3 is carried out by setting the

optimization objects in 2 steps:
Via the standard settings, with the help of which many applications can be
optimized in a simple manner.
With advanced settings for users familiar with control loops.
Editing the optimization objects

The settings are made in the controller optimization window:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
95
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
1: Selection of the optimization tab

2: Selection of the optimization value
3: List of the optimization objects, with object name and object number
4: Command VP for accepting a changed optimization object.
Yellow background indicates that an object has been changed, was however not
yet set to valid with VP.
5: Command WF for permanently saving the changed obejcts (also after mains
off/on)
6: Acknowledging a Compax3 error.
7: Setting options:
Standard / Advanced mode
Load protocol to clipboard, load into notepad or delete
8: Editing window: The value of an object selected with the aid of the mouse (in 3)
can here be edited and confirmed with return.
9: Additional functions, depending on the Compax3 technology function.
4.3.3.1
Preparatory settings for the controller alignment

Configuring the device ....................................................................................................... 96
Checking the feedback direction and the valve output polarity.......................................... 96
Compensation of non-linearities of the distance................................................................ 97
Checking the open loop gain ............................................................................................. 99
Filter alignment .................................................................................................................. 99
Controller optimization ..................................................................................................... 100
Configuring the device

The configuration settings must be made before with the aid of the Configuration
Wizard.
Optimization takes place in the optimization window (see page 86).
Checking the feedback direction and the valve output polarity

Feedback direction and valve polarity are verified in the open loop.
ATTENTION:
In the open loop operation, the drive axis might drift, as the position
controller is deactivated!
96
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
With the aid of the jog+/- function, the axis can be moved.
The setpoint generator- (681.4 or 681.2) and the actual speed (681.9 or 681.14)
must have the same sign (shown in the roll mode of the oscilloscope).
If this is not the case, there are two possible causes:

Wrong orientation of the position feedback system: The actual position can be
displayed in order to check this. Resolve by changing the feedback direction in
the configuration wizard or in the C3HydraulicsManager.
Incorrect wiring of the valves. The polarity can either be changed by changing the
wiring at the clamp or by inverting the output (Optimization
Output Chain X
Inversion).
Compensation of non-linearities of the distance

Before the controller alignment, the non-linear components of the path should be
compensated with the aid of the Output Conditioning Chains. This helps to achieve
an improvement of the system behavior. There are several possibilities:
a) Pressure compensation
If pressure sensors are available, those can be used to compensate the differtial
pressure. This makes the control more robust with respect to variations in the
system pressure or the load.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
97
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Before the activation, please notice the following:

Correct connection of the pressure sensors to the controller.
By approaching the end limits and simultaneously monitoring the pressure
values (Status values
pressure of main or auxiliary axis
pa, pb, pT and p0)
it is possible to conclude if the pressure sensors are correctly assigned.
A = yclinder at limit A
B = cylinder at limit B
1 = valve position
The pressure signals should be well filtered (smooth). (Optimization

Analog
input
InX Filter)
If those conditions are fulfilled, the pressure compensation can be activated under
(Optimization Output Chain
PressureCompensation).
b) characteristics compensation
The control behavior of valves with bent characteristic lines or overlap can be
considerably improved if the valve characteristics are stored in the controller and
are used for the compensation. The characteristic is integrated into the resepective
valve data via the C3HydraulicsManager and is loaded into the controller via the
C3ServoManager. The activation of the characteristic line is made via optimization
Output Chain
Characterisitic Flow.
If the valve characteristic line is activated, the behavior between control signal and
speed should be mainly linear.
(Doubling of the setpoint speed
Doubling of the resulting speed in the open
control loop).
c) Deadband compensation
If for valves with overlap or gap no adequate characteristics are available, they can
be optimized with the aid of the deadband compensation. The corresponding
values are set in (Optimization
Output Chain
Deadband ...).
98
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Checking the open loop gain

In order to verify the open loop gain calculated from the component data. In the
ideal case, the axis achieves the setpoint speed in both directions during open loop
operation.
Oscilloscope settings:
Setpoint speed of the setpoint generator
Actual speed (filtered)
Initially compensate a possible valve offset. In order to do this the value
optimization
Output chain X
Offset is changed until the axis comes to a
standstill.
Afterwards, the axis is moved for example with the aid of the jog funciton in the
setup window. When comparing the setpoint speed and the actual speed you have
distinguish between four different cases:
Setpoint speed> actual speed, positive travel direction:
The open loop gain is too small
Optimization
Output chain X
increase Gain factor positive.
Setpoint speed< actual speed, positive travel direction:
The open loop gain is too high
Optimization
Output chain X
decrease Gain factor positive.
Setpoint speed> actual speed, negative travel direction:
The open loop gain is too small
Optimization
Output chain X
increase Gain factor negative.
Setpoint speed< actual speed, negative travel direction:
The open loop gain is too high
Optimization
Output chain X
decrease Gain factor negative.
Now the axis must move in open loop with the preset speed.
Filter alignment
Especially when using feedback systems with low resolution, a filter alignment is
necessary. With high resolution systems, this step might not be necessary.
Actual speed (filtered)
The Parameter Optimization
Controller dynamic
Filter 2 speed actual value is
increased until there are no longer any spikes in the speed signal during the open
loop movement of the axis.
ATTENTION: too strong filterung causes additional deceleration and

phase shifting in the control loop and may later make the control
instable! Filter as moderately as possible.
ATTENTION: when using analog position feedback systems, you

should at first perform an input filtering. Optimization
Analog input
Inx
Filter.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
99
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Example: analog path measurement system +/-10V on input IN4:

Without input filter
With input filter 550%
Controller optimization
Now the control loop of the axis can be closed. Before you should Save the
settings (see page 95).
Then the axis can be switched into the preoperational mode (power-off) in order to
change then to closed loop operation. Switching between open and closed loop
operation is only possible in this state.
ATTENTION: When the control is activated, uncontrolled movements

of the axis may occur, if the control is inadequately parameterized!
ATTENTION: In order to limit the speed of the axis, the control signal
range for the valve control can be limited with the aid of the output
limitation. Settings: Optimization
Output Chain X
Upper Limit
bzw. Lower Limit. The limitation should not be set too small, as this
would put into effect an additional non-linearity (limitation) in the
distance, which complicates the controller alignment.
Following error
Actual speed
Setpoint speed
4.3.3.2
Signal filtering with external command value

Signal filtering for external setpoint specification and electronic gearbox ....................... 101
Signal filtering for external setpoint specification and electronic cam.............................. 102
The command signal read in from an external source (via HEDA or physical input)
can be optimized via different filters.
For this the following filter structure is available:
100
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Signal filtering for external setpoint specification and electronic

gearbox
Does not apply for Compax3I11T11!
accel
2011.4
2(v,a)
TRF
2020.1(x)
Physical
2107.1
TRF
HEDA
HEDA
2000.2, .5, .8
Virtual
Master
1(x) 2
6
4
3921.1
D
5
Structure
E
of Gearing
2109.1
3(x,v,a)
CANSync
PowerLink
EtherCat
TRF
SG1
1141.4
3920.7
3921.7(x)
681.4
speed
3(x,v,a)
3920.1
interpolation
500 s => 125 s
2110.7
x
a
v
speed
true
+/-10V
2011.5
2110.6
interpolation
500 s => 125 s
680.12
2110.1
position
RS
1141.7 (x)
1141.8 (v)
Control structure
accel
680.10
685.3
682.4
true
SSI
1141.10=true
if v,a exist
2020.3 accel
2020.2 speed
C3SM
680.25 Wizard
interpolation
500 s => 125 s
680.4
3(x,v,a)
Interpolator
B: Structure image of the signal processing

D/E: Structure of Gearing (see page 194)
Control structure
Symbols
TRF
2110.1
Trackingfilter
The displayed filter influences all outputs of the tracking filter.
Number: Object number of the filter characteristic
Differentiator
Output signal = d(input signal)/dt
The output signal is the derivation (gradient) of the input signal
Filter
interpolation
500s => 125s
Interpolation
Linear Interpolation.
Values in the 500s grid are converted into the more exact time
grid of 125s.
Note:
A setpoint jerk setpoint feedback is not required for external setpoint
specification.
The description of the objects can be found in the object list (see page 320).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
101
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Signal filtering for external setpoint specification and electronic cam

Only Compax3 T40!
682.4
accel
accel
680.10
2011.4
+/-10V
2011.5
TRF
2020.1(x)
Physical
685.3
2107.1
3920.1
HEDA
2000.2
0
2
1
2109.1
D
5
TRF
SG1
Structure
E
of Cam
2110.6
3921.1
interpolation
500 s => 125 s
680.12
2110.1
3021.2
CANSync
PowerLink
EtherCat
681.4
speed
position
RS
Virtual
Master
interpolation
500 s => 125 s
speed
3021.1
3920.7
TRF
HEDA
2110.7
Control structure
SSI
2020.3 accel
2020.2 speed
C3SM
680.25 Wizard
interpolation
500 s => 125 s
680.4
3921.7(x)
Interpolator
B: Structure image of the signal processing

D/E: Structure of Cam
Control structure
Symbols
TRF
2110.1
Trackingfilter
The displayed filter influences all outputs of the tracking filter.
Differentiator
Output signal = d(input signal)/dt
The output signal is the derivation (gradient) of the input signal
Filter
interpolation
500s => 125s
Interpolation
Linear Interpolation.
Values in the 500s grid are converted into the more exact time
grid of 125s.
Note:
A setpoint jerk setpoint feedback is not required for external setpoint
specification.
The description of the objects can be found in the object list (see page 320).
102
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
4.3.3.3
Controller structure of main axis
Setpoint generator
v
t
2200.30/.31
2200.32/.33
a
t
Kva 2010.24
Kvv 2010.23
.30 .31
2200.36
697.2
2010.21 Kuv
2200.37
v
+
KP
2200.38
+
-
697.5
697.1
697.3
+
KSG
2100.12
2210.8
697.4
2100.13
Setpoint position
Kv
682.5
Ka 2100.14
Acceleration
Deceleration
2100.11
2100.6
2100.10
2100.5
Acceleration jerk
681.5
Actual value
monitoring
Speed
Deceleration jerk
Measurement values: Status objects are displayed in red.

Fctors and time
Corresponding objects are displayed in blue.
constants
Below you can find the descriptions of the individual objects.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
103
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
4.3.3.4
Controller strucutre auxiliary axis
Setpoint generator
v
t
2260.14/.15
2260.16/.17
a
t
Kva 2050.24
Kvv 2050.9
.14 .15
2260.20
697.12
2050.8 Kuv
2260.21
v
+
KP
2260.22
+
-
+
+
697.11
697.15
697.13
+
KSG
2101.11
2270.8
697.14
2101.13
Setpoint position
Kv
Ka 2101.14
Acceleration
Deceleration
2101.8
2101.5
2101.7
2101.4
Acceleration jerk
Deceleration jerk
Measurement values: Status objects are displayed in red.

Fctors and time
Corresponding objects are displayed in blue.
constants
104
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Actual value
monitoring
Speed
Parker EME
4.3.3.5
Setting up Compax3
Feedforward main axis (status controller)

Object 2010.23: Speed .................................................................................................... 105
Object 2010.24: Acceleration........................................................................................... 105
Object 2010.23: Speed

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.FeedForward_Speed_FFW
2010.23
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
yes
REAL
%s/unit
Maximum value
%s/unit
%s/unit
Factor for speed feedforward (main axis)
(does only apply for single-loop status control)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3
Object 2010.24: Acceleration

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
2010.24
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
REAL
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
%s/unit
Maximum value
%s/unit
%s/unit
Factor for acceleration feedforward (main axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
C4_3
105
Setting up Compax3
4.3.3.6
C3F_T30
Feedforward auxiliary axis (status controller)

Object 2050.9: Speed ...................................................................................................... 106
Object 2050.10: Acceleration........................................................................................... 106
Object 2050.9: Speed

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.FeedForward_2_Speed_FFW
2050.9
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
yes
REAL
%s/unit
Maximum value
%s/unit
%s/unit
Factor for speed feedforward (main axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3
Object 2050.10: Acceleration

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
106
C3.FeedForward_2_Accel_FFW
2050.10
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
REAL
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
%s/unit
Maximum value
%s/unit
%s/unit
Factor for acceleration feedforward (main axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
C4_3
Parker EME
4.3.3.7
Setting up Compax3
Position controller main axis (status controller)

Object 2200.24: Filter - Following Error ........................................................................... 107
Object 2200.11: Filter - Following Error ........................................................................... 107
Object 2200.38: P-term.................................................................................................... 108
Object 2200.37: I-term ..................................................................................................... 108
Object 2200.30: Internal window I-term ........................................................................... 108
Object 2200.31: External window I-term.......................................................................... 108
Object 2200.32: Positive limit I-term ................................................................................ 109
Object 2200.33: Negative limit I-term .............................................................................. 109
Object 2100.13: Speed feedback .................................................................................... 109
Object 2100.14: Acceleration feedback ........................................................................... 110
Object 2210.8: Filter control signal .................................................................................. 110
Object 2200.24: Filter - Following Error

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.PositionController_TrackingErrorFilter_us
2200.24
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys format:
no
INT
us
Maximum value
0 us
8300000 us
Time constant of the following error filter of the position controller in s
(analog to 2200.11 in %)
Is set to the default value corresponding to the motor in the
configuration when changing the motor.
Default value 0us.
The filter is deactivated for values from 0 to 62us.
C3F:
Only internal: Due to structure, the following error is, as from R07,
filtered with the sum time constant actual velocity value filter 1 + actual
velocity value 2 + time constant of following filter + user filter 2200.24.
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
U16

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.PositionController_TrackingErrorFilter
2200.11
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys format:
yes
INT
%
Maximum value
0%
554 %
Is set to the corresponding default value when changing the motor.
CAN No.
PD object:
Profibus-No. (PNU) -
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
U16
107
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Object 2200.38: P-term

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3Plus.PositionController_Kp_PPart
2200.38
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
%/unit
%/unit
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%/unit
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I16
Object 2200.37: I-term

Object name
C3Plus.PositionController_Ki_IPart
Object No.
2200.37
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
%/(s unit)
%/(s unit)
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%/(s unit)
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I16
Object 2200.30: Internal window I-term

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3Plus.PositionController_InsideWindow_IPart
2200.30
HEDA-channel
PD object:
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys format:
yes
REAL
Unit
Maximum value
Unit
Unit
I term internal window (beginning of the integration) main axis
Bus format:
no
C4_3
Object 2200.31: External window I-term

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
108
C3Plus.PositionController_OutsideWindow_IPart
2200.31
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
REAL
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
Unit
Maximum value
Unit
Unit
I term external window (end of the integration) main axis
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
C4_3
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Object 2200.32: Positive limit I-term

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3Plus.PositionController_PosLimit_IPart
2200.32
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
REAL
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
%
Maximum value
%/unit
%/unit
Upper limit of the I term (main axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3
Object 2200.33: Negative limit I-term

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.PositionController_NegLimit_IPart
2200.33
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys format:
yes
REAL
%
Maximum value
%
%
Lower limit of the I term (man axis)
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3
Object 2100.13: Speed feedback

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.ControllerTuning_SpeedFeedback_Kv
2100.13
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
yes
REAL
%s/unit
Maximum value
%s/unit
%s/unit
Feedback of the speed signal (main axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
U16
109
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Object 2100.14: Acceleration feedback

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.ControllerTuning_AccelFeedback_Ka
2100.14
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
REAL
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
%s/unit
Maximum value
%s/unit
%s/unit
Feedback of the acceleration signal (main axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
U16
Object 2210.8: Filter control signal

Object name
C3.SpeedController_ActuatingSignal_filt
Object No.
2210.8
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
us
0 us
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
no
VP
DINT
Maximum value
8300000 us
PD object:
no
U16
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
110
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.3.8
Setting up Compax3
Position controller auxiliary axis (status controller)

Object 2260.8: Filter - Following Error ............................................................................. 111
Object 2260.22: P-term.................................................................................................... 111
Object 2260.21: I-term ..................................................................................................... 111
Object 2101.14: Acceleration feedback ........................................................................... 113
Object 2270.8: Filter control signal .................................................................................. 113

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3.PositionController_2_TrackingErrorFilter_us
2260.8
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
us
0 us
Valid after:
CodeSys format:
no
Immediately
DINT
Maximum value
8300000 us
PD object:
no
U16
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:

Object name
C3Plus.PositionController_2_Kp_PPart
Object No.
2260.22
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
%/unit
n/a
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
n/a
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I16

Object name
C3Plus.PositionController_2_Ki_IPart
Object No.
2260.21
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
%/(s unit)
%/(s unit)
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%/(s unit)
Remark:
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I16
111
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3Plus.PositionController_2_InsideWindow_IPart
2260.14
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
REAL
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
Unit
Maximum value
Unit
Unit
I term internal window (beginning of the integration) auxiliary axis
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.PositionController_2_OutsideWindow_IPart
2260.15
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys format:
yes
REAL
Unit
Maximum value
Unit
Unit
I term external window (end of the integration) auxiliary axis
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
112
C3Plus.PositionController_2_PosLimit_IPart
2260.16
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
yes
REAL
%
Maximum value
%
%
Upper limit of the I term (auxiliary axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
C4_3
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3Plus.PositionController_2_NegLimit_IPart
2260.17
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
REAL
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
%
Maximum value
%
%
Lower limit of the I term (auxiliary axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3.ControllerTuning_2_SpeedFeedback_Kv
2101.13
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys format:
yes
REAL
%s/unit
Maximum value
%s/unit
%s/unit
Feedback of the speed signal (auxiliary axis)
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
U16
Object 2101.14: Acceleration feedback

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.ControllerTuning_2_AccelFeedback_Ka
2101.14
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
yes
REAL
%s/unit
Maximum value
%s/unit
%s/unit
Feedback of the acceleration signal (auxiliary axis)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
U16

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3.SpeedController2_ActuatingSignal_filt
2270.8
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
us
0 us
Valid after:
CodeSys format:
no
VP
DINT
Maximum value
8300000 us
PD object:
no
U16
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
113
Setting up Compax3
4.3.3.9
C3F_T30
Filter main axis

Object 2100.10: Filter 2 actual speed ............................................................................. 114
Object 2100.11: Filter 2 actual accel ............................................................................... 114
Object 2100.10: Filter 2 actual speed

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.ControllerTuning_FilterSpeed2
2100.10
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
yes
DINT
us
Maximum value
0 us
8300000 us
Works in line with actual velocity filter
Default value 0us
PD object:
Bus format:
no
U16
Object 2100.11: Filter 2 actual accel

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
114
C3.ControllerTuning_FilterAccel2
2100.11
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
DINT
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
us
Maximum value
0 us
8300000 us
Works in line with actual acceleration filter
Default value 0us
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
U16
Parker EME
4.3.3.10
Setting up Compax3
Filter auxiliary axis

Object 2101.7: Filter 2 actual speed ............................................................................... 115
Object 2101.8: Filter 2 actual accel ................................................................................. 115
Object 2101.7: Filter 2 actual speed

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.ControllerTuning_2_FilterSpeed2
2101.7
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
yes
INT
us
Maximum value
0 us
8300000 us
Works in line with actual velocity filter
Default value 0us
PD object:
Bus format:
no
U16
Object 2101.8: Filter 2 actual accel

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.ControllerTuning_2_FilterAccel2
2101.8
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
INT
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
us
Maximum value
0 us
8300000 us
Works in line with actual acceleration filter
Default value 0us
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
U16
115
Setting up Compax3
4.3.3.11
C3F_T30
Analog Input
Object 172.11: IN0 Offset ................................................................................................ 116
Object 172.4: IN0 Offset .................................................................................................. 116
Object 172.3: IN0 Filter.................................................................................................... 117
Object 173.11: IN1 Offset ................................................................................................ 117
Object 173.4: IN1 Offset .................................................................................................. 117
Object 173.3: IN1 Filter.................................................................................................... 117
Object 174.11: IN2 Offset ................................................................................................ 118
Object 174.4: IN2 Offset .................................................................................................. 118
Object 174.3: IN2 Filter.................................................................................................... 118
Object 175.11: IN3 Offset ................................................................................................ 118
Object 175.4: IN3 Offset .................................................................................................. 119
Object 175.3: IN3 Filter.................................................................................................... 119
Object 176.11: IN4 Offset ................................................................................................ 119
Object 176.4: IN4 Offset .................................................................................................. 119
Object 176.3: IN4 Filter.................................................................................................... 120
Object 177.11: IN5 Offset ................................................................................................ 120
Object 177.4: IN5 Offset .................................................................................................. 120
Object 177.3: IN5 Filter.................................................................................................... 120
Object 172.11: IN0 Offset

Object name
C3Plus.AnalogInput0_Offset_normed
Object No.
172.11
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
mA
mA
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
Immediately
REAL
mA
Remark:
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3

Object name
Object No.
172.4
Access:
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
no
Increments
Maximum value
0 n/a
Offset in AD converter increments.
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
116
C3.AnalogInput0_Offset
HEDA-channel
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
Immediately
INT
65535 n/a
no
I16
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Object 172.3: IN0 Filter

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3Plus.AnalogInput0_FilterCoefficient
172.3
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
us
0 us
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
DINT
us
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
Object No.
173.11
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
mA
mA
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
Immediately
REAL
mA
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
C4_3

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
173.4
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
Immediately
CodeSys format:
no
INT
Increments
Maximum value
n/a
n/a
Offset in AD converter increments. Range 0..65535
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I16

Object name
Object No.
173.3
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
us
0 us
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
DINT
us
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I32
117
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
174.11
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
mA
mA
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
Immediately
REAL
mA
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
C4_3

Object name
Object No.
174.4
Access:
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
no
Increments
Maximum value
n/a
Offset in AD increments. Range 0..65535.
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
HEDA-channel
PD object:
Bus format:
no
Immediately
INT
n/a
no
I16

Object name
Object No.
174.3
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
us
us
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
DINT
us
Remark:
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
Object No.
175.11
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
mA
mA
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
Immediately
REAL
mA
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
118
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
C4_3
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
175.4
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
no
Increments
Maximum value
n/a
Offset in AD increments
PD object:
Bus format:
no
Immediately
INT
n/a
no
I16

Object name
Object No.
175.3
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
us
us
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
DINT
us
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
Object No.
176.11
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
V
V
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
Immediately
REAL
V
Remark:
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
C4_3

Object name
Object No.
176.4
Access:
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
no
n/a
Maximum value
n/a
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
HEDA-channel
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
Immediately
INT
n/a
no
I16
119
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
176.3
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
DINT
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
us
Maximum value
0 us
us
Filter of time constant in us for the filtering of the input signal
0 => Filter off => output = input
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I16

Object name
Object No.
177.11
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
V
V
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
Immediately
REAL
V
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
C4_3

Object name
Object No.
177.4
Access:
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
no
n/a
Maximum value
n/a
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
HEDA-channel
PD object:
Bus format:
no
Immediately
INT
n/a
no
I16

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
177.3
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
us
0 us
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
DINT
us
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
120
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I16
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
4.3.3.12
Force-/Pressure Control main axis

Object 2250.13: P-term.................................................................................................... 122
Object 2250.14: I-term ..................................................................................................... 122
Object 2250.19: D-term ................................................................................................... 123
Object 2250.8: Delay T1 .................................................................................................. 123
Object 2250.23: Force feedforward ................................................................................. 124
Object 2250.24: Inversion of the control variable [on/off] ................................................ 124
Object 2250.22: Filter control signal ................................................................................ 124
Signal image of pressure / force control of the main axis:

2250.23
K Fs
2250.17/18
698.6
2250.14
2250.22
2250.15/16
698.2
Disturbance Offset
2251.21
698.5
KFi
+
Kp
698.1
2250.24=0: +1 / =1: -1
D-T1
698.4
2250.8/19
698.3
2100.10
2100.5
2250.20
K Fv
192-121101 N04 June 2008
681.5
Actual value m onitoring
Error in units
Bar, psi or N
2250.13
121
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Proportional_Part_Kp
2250.13
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
%/pres
%/pres
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%/pres
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Integration_Part_KFi
Object No.
2250.14
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
%/(s pres)
0 %/(s pres)
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
no
VP
REAL
Maximum value
4,000 %/(s pres)
PD object:
no
I32
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_1_InsideWindow_IPart
Object No.
2250.15
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
pres
pres
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
no
VP
REAL
Maximum value
pres
Remark:
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_1_OutsideWindow_IPart
Object No.
2250.16
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
pres
pres
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
no
VP
REAL
Maximum value
pres
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
122
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I32
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3Plus.PressureController_1_PosLimit_IPart
2250.17
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
%
%
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_1_NegLimit_IPart
Object No.
2250.18
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
%
%
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I32
Object 2250.19: D-term

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Derivative_Part_KFd
Object No.
2250.19
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
no
%s/pres
%s/pres
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%s/pres
Remark:
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I32
Object 2250.8: Delay T1

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3.PressureController_1_TimeDelay_DT1_T1
2250.8
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
no
INT
us
Maximum value
250 us
us
PID force controller 1 delay time constant of the D-term T1
Influences the D-term of the controller
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
U32
123
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Speed_Feedback_KFv
2250.20
HEDA-channel
Read/write
no
%s/unit
%s/unit
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%s/unit
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
U16
Object 2250.23: Force feedforward

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Force_FeedForward_KFs
Object No.
2250.23
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
no
%/pres
%/pres
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%/pres
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
U16
Object 2250.24: Inversion of the control variable [on/off]

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3Plus.PressureController_1_ActuatingSignal_Inversion
2250.24
HEDA-channel
PD object:
no
Valid after:
Read/write
Immediately
CodeSys format:
yes
BOOL
n/a
Maximum value
0 n/a
1 n/a
Inversion of the force controller control variable of the main axis.
The inversion is only effective for the valve output and not for the status
values of the force controller.
Bus format:
no
I16

Object name
C3.PressureController_1_ActuatingSignalFilter
Object No.
2250.22
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
no
us
us
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
no
VP
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
8300000 us
PD object:
no
I32
Remark:
CAN No.
124
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
4.3.3.13
Force-/Pressure Control auxiliary axis

Object 2251.13: P-term.................................................................................................... 126
Object 2251.14: I-term ..................................................................................................... 126
Object 2251.19: D-term ................................................................................................... 127
Object 2251.8: Delay T1 .................................................................................................. 127
Object 2251.23: Force feedforward ................................................................................. 128
Object 2251.24: Inversion of the control variable [on/off] ................................................ 128
Object 2251.22: Filter control signal ................................................................................ 128
Signal image of pressure / force control of the auxiliary axis:

2251.23
K Fs
2251.17/18
698.16
2251.14
2251.22
2251.15/16
698.12
Disturbance Offset
2251.21
698.15
KFi
+
Kp
698.11
2251.24=0: +1 / =1: -1
D-T1
698.14
2101.7
2251.8/19
698.13
2101.4
2251.20
KFv
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Actual value m onitoring
Error in units
Bar, psi or N
2251.13
125
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Proportional_Part_Kp
2251.13
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
%/pres
%/pres
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%/pres
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
Object No.
2251.14
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
%/(s pres)
%/(s pres)
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
no
VP
REAL
Maximum value
4,000 %/(s pres)
PD object:
no
I32
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:

Object name
Object No.
2251.15
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
pres
pres
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
no
VP
REAL
Maximum value
pres
Remark:
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_2_OutsideWindow_IPart
Object No.
2251.16
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
pres
pres
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
no
VP
REAL
Maximum value
pres
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
126
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I32
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
2251.17
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
%
%
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I32

Object name
Object No.
2251.18
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
yes
%
%
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
I32
Object 2251.19: D-term

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Derivative_Part_KFd
Object No.
2251.19
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
no
%s/pres
%s/pres
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%s/pres
Remark:
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I32
Object 2251.8: Delay T1

Object name
Object No.
2251.8
Access:
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
no
us
Maximum value
250 us
Influences the D-term of the controller
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
HEDA-channel
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
VP
INT
us
no
U32
127
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Speed_Feedback_KFv
2251.20
HEDA-channel
Read/write
no
%s/unit
%s/unit
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%s/unit
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
U16
Object 2251.23: Force feedforward

Object name
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Force_FeedForward_KFs
Object No.
2251.23
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
no
%/pres
%/pres
Valid after:
PD object:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
no
VP
REAL
%/pres
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
no
U16
Object 2251.24: Inversion of the control variable [on/off]

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3Plus.PressureController_2_ActuatingSignal_Inversion
2251.24
HEDA-channel
PD object:
no
Valid after:
Read/write
Immediately
CodeSys format:
yes
BOOL
n/a
Maximum value
0 n/a
1 n/a
Inversion of the force controller control variable of the auxiliary axis.
The inversion is only effective for the valve output and not for the status
values of the force controller.
Bus format:
no
I16

Object name
Object No.
2251.22
HEDA-channel
Access:
Read/write
no
us
us
Valid after:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
no
VP
CodeSys format:
Maximum value
8300000 us
PD object:
no
I32
Remark:
CAN No.
128
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.3.14
Setting up Compax3
Output signal conditioning 0

Conditioning Chain Symbols............................................................................................ 130
Object 2400.3: Upper limit of ocntrol signal ..................................................................... 130
Object 2400.4: Lower limit of the control signal ............................................................... 130
Object 2400.6: Output Offset ........................................................................................... 131
Object 2400.7: Replacement value (inactive Chain 0)..................................................... 131
Object 2401.4: Gain factor positive.................................................................................. 131
Object 2401.5: Gain factor negative ................................................................................ 132
Object 2401.7: Gain positive direction (Force-/Pressure- control)................................... 132
Object 2401.8: Gain negative direction (Force-/Pressure- control) ................................. 132
Object 2401.6: Inversion [on/off]...................................................................................... 133
Object 2402.1: Pressure Compensation [on/off].............................................................. 133
Object 2403.1: Characteristic flow [on/off] ....................................................................... 133
Object 2405.1: Deadband [on/off].................................................................................... 134
Object 2405.2: Deadband A-side..................................................................................... 134
Object 2405.3: Deadband B-side..................................................................................... 134
Object 2405.4: Deadband threshold value ...................................................................... 135
In order to linearize the valve as well as the entire control path 4 linearization
chains (conditioning chains => output signal conditioning) are available.
Layout of the path linearization (Conditioning Chains):
Objects of the
conditioning chains:
The Conditioning Chains are set via objects in the optimization window (see page
86).
The "x" in the objects given in the signal image depends on the conditioning chains
to be parameterized:
x = 0,1,2,3 = Conditioning Chain No.
In the Compax3F structure image (see page 43) you can see how the
Conditioning Chains are integrated in the total structure.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
129
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Conditioning Chain Symbols

24x1.4
Direction dependent gain
24x1.5
Direction dependent pressure compensation

Non-linear characteristic (valve characteristic)
24x3.2
Deadband
No signal is transmitted in a range definable by objects.
Change of gain for small signals.
In a range definable by objects, the signal is transmitted with changed
gain.
Limitation
The signal is limited to a range definable by objects.
24x0.3
24x0.4
Object 2400.3: Upper limit of ocntrol signal

Object name
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Upper_Limit
Object No.
2400.3
Access:
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
%
Maximum value
0%
Upper limit of valve output 0
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
HEDA-channel
no
VP
INT
100 %
Objects of the other conditioning chains: 24x0.3

(x = 0,1,2,3 = Conditioning Chain No.)
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I16
Object 2400.4: Lower limit of the control signal

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Lower_Limit
2400.4
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
%
Maximum value
0%
Lower limit of valve output 0
no
VP
INT
100 %

CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
130
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I16
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Object 2400.6: Output Offset

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Output_Offset
2400.6
HEDA-channel
Read/write
yes
%
-100 %
Valid after:
CodeSys format:
no
VP
REAL
Maximum value
100 %
PD object:
no
I32
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
Bus format:
Object 2400.7: Replacement value (inactive Chain 0)

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Input_DefaultValue
2400.7
HEDA-channel
PD object:
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys format:
yes
REAL
%
Maximum value
-100 %
100 %
Replacement value on the input of the chain, if the correspondiing
controller (position or force controller) is not operating.
Bus format:
no
I32
Object 2401.4: Gain factor positive

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_positive
2401.4
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
1
Maximum value
n/a
Gain factor for positive input values
no
Immediately
REAL
n/a

CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I32
131
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Object 2401.5: Gain factor negative

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_negative
2401.5
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
1
Maximum value
n/a
Gain factor for negative input values
no
Immediately
REAL
n/a

CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I32
Object 2401.7: Gain positive direction (Force-/Pressure- control)

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_positiv_Pressure
2401.7
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
Immediately
CodeSys format:
no
1
Maximum value
n/a
n/a
Gain factor for positive input values (with pressure/force control)
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I32
Object 2401.8: Gain negative direction (Force-/Pressure- control)

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_negative_Pressur
e
2401.8
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
Immediately
Read/write
CodeSys format:
no
1
Maximum value
n/a
n/a
Gain factor for negative input values (with pressure/force control)
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
132
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I32
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Object 2401.6: Inversion [on/off]

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_InvertType
2401.6
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
n/a
Maximum value
n/a
Type=0
no inversion
Type<>0 Signal is inverted (+<=>-)
no
Immediately
BOOL
n/a

CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I16
Object 2402.1: Pressure Compensation [on/off]

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.PressureCompensation_Ch0_Type
2402.1
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys
format:
yes
INT
n/a
Maximum value
n/a
n/a
Type=1 Differential pressure at side A is compensated
Type=1 Differential pressure at side A is compensated
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I16
Object 2403.1: Characteristic flow [on/off]

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.SignalFlowCharacteristic_Ch0_Type
2403.1
HEDA-channel
no
Valid after:
Read/write
VP
CodeSys format:
yes
INT
n/a
Maximum value
n/a
n/a
Type=0 characeristic compensation is switched off
Type=1 characteristic commpensation is switched on: when the limits of
the characteristic line are exceeded, interpolation is continued with
constant slope
Type=2 characteristic compensation is switched on: when the limits of
the characteristic line are exceeded, the output value is limited to the
limit value of the characteristic line.
CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I16
133
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Object 2405.1: Deadband [on/off]

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.DeadBandCompensation_Ch0_Type
2405.1
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
no
VP
INT
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
1
Maximum value
n/a
n/a
Type of deadband compensation
Type=0 block off (input=output)
Type=1 deadband compensation with constantly zero in the deadband
Type=2 deadband compensation with straight line in the deadband
CAN No.
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I16
Object 2405.2: Deadband A-side

Object name
C3Plus.DeadBandCompensation_Ch0_A_Side
Object No.
2405.2
Access:
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
/oo
Maximum value
0 /oo
Threshold value on A side
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
HEDA-channel
no
VP
INT
1,000 /oo

CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
no
I32
Object 2405.3: Deadband B-side

Object name
C3Plus.DeadBandCompensation_Ch0_B_Side
Object No.
2405.3
Access:
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
/oo
Maximum value
0 /oo
Threshold value on B side
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
HEDA-channel
no
VP
INT
1,000 /oo

CAN No.
PD object:
134
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I32
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Object 2405.4: Deadband threshold value

Object name
Object No.
Access:
CodeSys object:
Unit
Minimum value
Remark:
C3Plus.DeadBandCompensation_Ch0_Threshold
2405.4
HEDA-channel
Valid after:
Read/write
CodeSys format:
yes
/oo
Maximum value
0 /oo
Width of the deadband on one side
no
VP
INT
1,000 /oo

CAN No.
Profibus-No. (PNU)
PD object:
Bus format:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
no
I32
135
Setting up Compax3
4.3.3.15
C3F_T30
Step-by-step optimization
General ............................................................................................................................ 136
Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 137
General
All parameters are changed in the optimization window in the optimization field via
the object tree in the lower left window.
Click on the object in the object tree (1).
Enter new value in the command line (2) and press Return.
Set value to valid with CP (3).
Attention: Entry of the values must be terminated with a Return and must be set
to valid via VP (3)!
The changed objects are permanenty stored with WF (4).
ATTENTION: When writing the data into the flash, control oscillations may occur
due to increased processor load!
=> Switch drive to currentless / PowerOff state before
136
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Procedure
Parameters for manual movement/jogging mode and test movement. ........................... 137
Limit valve set value ........................................................................................................ 138
Move drive controlledly .................................................................................................... 138
Check sense of direction ................................................................................................. 139
Set valve offset ................................................................................................................ 139
Check connection assignment of the pressure sensors .................................................. 139
Check input offset or zero of the pressure sensors ......................................................... 139
Direction dependent gain................................................................................................. 140
Optimization of position controller.................................................................................... 140
Optimization of pressure/Force Controller ....................................................................... 143
A valid configuration is a prerequisite for this operation and for

force/pressure control, operation with one or 2 pressure sensors per cylinder
is assumed.
Parameters for manual movement/jogging mode and test movement.

In the optimization window setup field parameter.
Activate dropdown list via button on the upper left (1)
The parameters for manual movement/jogging mode can be found under general
setup settings (2).
Select test movement absolute (3) for linear drives (cylinders)
If needs be, change the limit and homing settings from the configuration for the
setup (4).
Terminate with "accept entry".
1
2
3
4
192-121101 N04 June 2008
137
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Limit valve set value

In the optimization tree under output chain:
Upper limit of control signal (Object 2400.3) and lower limit of control signal
(Object 2400.4) must be set sensibly.
Take step 1 for all additional valves.
Tip:
In order to avoid a fast, uncontrolled movement of the drive during the setup, the
valve outputs should at first be limited!
Attention:
The drive does not reach its maximum power due to the limitation of the valve
outputs.
As soon as the drive is stably positioned in the control loop, the limitation can be
lifted.
Move drive controlledly

In the optimization window setup field setup.
Select "controlled movement" operating mode.
Energize drive (2).
Move the drive to both sides (3).
Does the axis move?
No:
Valve positive overlap? -> activate valve characteristic line or set deadband
compensation.
Check control value limitation -> increase control value limitation.
Control signal gain too small -> increase parameter control signal gain.
Tip:
Check, if the control signals to the valves (status values -> valve outputs -> output
signal0..3) change.
138
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Check sense of direction

Select "controlled movement" operating mode
Move drive into both directions.
Are the directions of the setpoint and of the actual position the same?
No: Switch on valve inversion(s): Inversion [on/off] = 1 (in the optimization tree
under output chain:)
Is the direction of the actual position identical with the desired direction in the
machine?
No: Change sense of direction of the feedback in the configuration
Set valve offset

Select "controlled movement" operating mode
Move drive to medium position
In which direction does the axis drift?
Positive: Reduce output offset until the drive is at standstill.
Negative: Increase output offset until the drive is at standstill.
Attention:
If the values are too high, the drive might move uncontrolledly at high speed!
With activated valve inversion, the offset does also work in the opposite direction!
(In the optimization tree under output chain)
Appproach additional positions and check setting.
Check connection assignment of the pressure sensors

Check if the correct pressure is displayed when moving the cylinder.
In the optimization window setup field status values select the
corresponding values and drag them into the status display field.
No:
Check connections and configuration of the pressure sensors.
Check input offset or zero of the pressure sensors

Switch off hydraulics and make sure that there is no pressure (0 bar) on the
pressure sensors.
In the optimization window setup field status values select the
corresponding values and drag them into the status display field.
No:
In the optimization window optimization field optimization.
Adapt zero for analog input offset.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
139
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30

For differential cylinders, the direction dependence can be compensated via object
gain positive and negative direction.
In the optimization window optimization field object tree under path
linearization.
Positive direction
Object 2401.4: Direction dependent gain
Object 2401.7: Direction dependent gain (pressure control)
Negative direction
Object 2401.5: Direction dependent gain
Object 2401.8: Direction dependent gain (pressure control)
Attention:
If several valves are used for a drive, the direction dependent gain must be set
individually for each valve.
Optimization of position controller

Filter ................................................................................................................................. 140
Set control parameters .................................................................................................... 141
Feedforwards (advanced)................................................................................................ 142
Filter
Set position (only analog feedback)................................................................................ 140
Set filter for speed- and acceleration actual value.......................................................... 140
Close control loop ............................................................................................................ 141
Depending on the feedback type, the actual signals for position, speed and
acceleration are disturbed with different intensity. A strong noise on the signals
influences the achievable quality of control negatively.
Attention:
Too high filter constants distort the signals and have a negative effect on the
control quality!
Set position (only analog feedback)

In the optimization tree under analog input.
Typical setting value: 7000s.
Set filter for speed- and acceleration actual value.

In the optimization tree under filter main axis.
Typical setting values for the individual path measurement system:
Type
Speed[s]
Acceleration
Analog
7000
EnDat
500
RS422
SSI
1000 ... 7000
Start-Stop
7000
140
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Close control loop

Switch drive to currentless (2)
Select control operation (1)
Re-energize drive (2)
Move drive at low speed in manual mode (jogging) (3).
In the event of oscillations, stop the movement
Does the drive oscillate at standstill?
Yes: Switch drive to currentless (2)
Reduce control parameters (Proportional factor KP (see page 141) to

acceleration feedback (see page 142)).
Set control parameters

Proportional factor KP...................................................................................................... 141
Integrator KI ..................................................................................................................... 142
Speed feedback............................................................................................................... 142
Acceleration feedback ..................................................................................................... 142
In the optimization tree under position controller main axis
Proportional factor KP
Increase Kp (2200.38/2260.22) at lowest speed up to the stability limit.
Value will be preassigned by the configuration.
Acceleration and jerk must be adapted to the potential of the axis.
Deceleration and jerk_deceleration must be adapted to the potential of the axis.
Compensate unbalances with direction-dependant gain.
Check settings at 50% Vmax and reduce if needs be.
Check settings at Vmax and reduce if needs be.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
141
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Integrator KI
Increase Kl (2200.37/2260.21), so that the following error becomes minimal and
the axis does not overshoot.
Value will be preassigned by the configuration.
Set inner window (2200.30) so that the axis does not readjust constantly (only
sensible larger than feedback resolution!)
Set outer window (2200.31) so that possible overshoot is reduced.
Limit maximum I term (2200.32 and 2200.33).
Speed feedback
The feedback of the speed can increase the natural frequency, i.e. the dynamic of
the hydraulic drive.
Prerequisite:
Speed filter set correctly ( Filter for Speed and Acceleration actual value (see
page 140))
Increase speed feedback (2100.13) at lowest speed up to the stability limit.
Acceleration feedback
The feedback of the acceleration can dampen the hydraulic drive, i.e. reduce the
oscillation tendency.
Prerequisite:
Acceleration filter set correctly ( Filter for Speed and Acceleration actual value
(see page 140))
Increase acceleration feedback (2100.14) at lowest speed up to the stability limit.
Feedforwards (advanced)
Speed feedforward (advanced) ....................................................................................... 142
Acceleration feedforward (advanced) .............................................................................. 143
The control behavior of the control can be adapted to the application via the
feedforward (in the optimization tree under feedforward main axis)
The following error can be minimized at movement with constant speed via the
feedforward without negative effect on the stability of the control.
Attention:
Feedforward controls may cause an overshoot over the target position!
Speed feedforward (advanced)

Reduce speed feedforward (2010.13) at lowest speed until the following error is
minimized.
142
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Setting up Compax3
Acceleration feedforward (advanced)

Reduce acceleration feedforward (2010.24) at lowest speed until the following
error is minimized.
Check settings at Vmax and reduce if needs be
Optimization of pressure/Force Controller

Activation of pressure / force control ............................................................................... 143
Adapt control parameters ................................................................................................ 143
Force feedforward............................................................................................................ 144
Activation of pressure / force control

Set all control parameters to 0
P-term (%N)
main axis: Object 2250.13
auxiliary axis: Object 2251.13
I-term (%N)
Internal and external window of I-term (N)
internal window: Object 2250.15
external window: Object 2220.16
KFv (speed feedback) (%s/mm)
Set force demand value and force gradient to expedient small values.
The actual force should be smaller than the demand force.
Adapt control parameters

Increase P-term in small increments until the actual force is near the demand
force.
Pressure or force should remain stable and not be subject to instability.
P-term starts working at 0,0000001%/N
Set window for I-term.
The value for the outer window should be greater than the actual difference
between demand force and actual force (697.1, 697.11).
Value for the inner window should be set very small in order to equate demand
force and actual force.
Positive limit of I-term to 100%
Main axis: Object 2250.17, auxiliary axis: Object 2251.17
Negative limit I-term to -100%
Main axis: Object 2250.18, auxiliary axis: Set object 2251.18.
Increase P-term in small increments until the actual force = demand force.
Value should be held small in order to avoid strong overshoot.
I-term starts working at 0.00013%/N.
I-term is switching (only swiches on, if the actual force is within the window
defined before).
Increase speed feedback FKv slightly if necessary, this will reduce the error
between the demand force and the actual force while the force is built up. The
force is built up faster, peaks can however be the result of increased values.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
143
Setting up Compax3
C3F_T30
Force feedforward
For the force control with pumps and pressure valves, the control signal is,
differently from the control with path valves, proportional to the actual pressure
value for dynamic control the integrator is not sufficient in order to generate the
static component of the control variable.
This requires the force feedforward (KFs).
Main axis: Object 2250.23
KFs (%/N) or(%/bar/PSI), a defined component of the force build-up is built up in
a controlled manner.
144
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.4.
Setting up Compax3
Input simulation
Calling up the input simulation .........................................................................................145
Functionality .....................................................................................................................146
Function
The input simulation is used for the performance of tests without the complete
input/output hardware being necessary.
The digital inputs (standard and inputs of M10/M12 option) as well as the analog
inputs are supported.
The following operating modes are available for digital inputs:
The physical inputs are deactivated, the digital inputs are only influenced via the
input simulation.
The digital inputs and the physical inputs are logically or-linked.
This necessitates very careful action, as the required function is, above all with
low-active signals, no longer available.
The pre-setting of an analog input value is always made in addition to the physical
analog input.
the function of the inputs depends on the Compax3 device type; please refer to the
respective online help or the manual.
The input simulation is only possible if the connection with Compax3 is

active and if the commissioning mode is deactivated!
4.3.4.1
Calling up the input simulation

Open the optimization window (double klick in the C3 ServoManager tree entry:
Optimization).
Activate the Tab Setup in the right lower window.
Clicking on the following button will open a menu; please select the input
simulation.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
145
Setting up Compax3
4.3.4.2
C3F_T30
Functionality
Window Compax3 InputSimulator:
1st series: Standard inputs I7 ... I0 = 0 button not pressed; = 1 switch pressed
2nd series:Optional digital inputs (M10 / M12)
Green field: port 4 is defined as input
Red field: port 4 is defined as output
the least significant input is always on the right side
3rd series:if the button deactivating physical inputs is pressed, all physical, digital
inputs are deactivated; only the input simulation is active.
If both sources (physical and simulated inputs) are active, they are or-linked!
Caution!
Please consider the effects of the or-linking; above all on low-active
functions.
4th series: Simulation of the analog inputs 0 and 1 in 100mV steps.

The set value is added to the value on the physical input.
After the input simulation has been called up, all simulated inputs are on 0.
When the input simulation is left, the physical inputs become valid.
146
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.5.
Setting up Compax3
Setup mode
The setup mode is used for moving an axis independent of the system control
The following functions are possible:
Jog+ / JogActivation / deactivation of the motor holding brake.
Acknowledging errors
Defining and activating a test movement
Activating the digital outputs.
Activating the setup mode

By activating the setup mode, the the control program (IEC Program) is
deactivated; the system function of the device is no longer available.
Access via an interface (RS232/RS485, Profibus, CANopen,...) and via
digital inputs is deactivated.
Attention! The safety functions are not always guaranteed during
the setup mode!
In the Commissioning window (left at the bottom) the commissioning mode is

activated.
Then parameterize the desired test movement in the Parameter window.
You can accept changed configuration settings into the current project.
Now energize drive in the commissioning window and start the test movement.
Caution! Safeguard the travel range before energizing!
Deactivating the setup mode

If the setup mode is left, the drive is deactivated and the the control
program (IEC Program) is re-activated.
Note:
The parameters of the setup window are saved with the project and are loaded
into Compax3 if the setup mode is activated (see below).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
147
Setting up Compax3
4.3.5.1
C3F_T30
Motion objects in Compax3

The motion objects in Compax3 describe the active motion set.
The motion objects can be influenced via different interfaces.
The following table describes the correlations:
Source
active motion objects

==>
describe
<==
read
==>
Set-up
(working with the commissioning
window)
<==
With the "accept entry" button.

The current project gets a motion set.
Active motion
Download by activating the motion
objects
When opening the commisisoning
Position [O1111.1]
window of a new project for the first
Speed [O1111.2]
time.
Acceleration
Activated via the "Upload settings
[O1111.3]
fromdevice" button (bottom at the left
side).
==>
Compax3 ServoManager project
<==
C3IxxT11: via an activated motion set

C3I2xT11: via a configuration
download
For Compax3 I2xT11:
via a configuration upload
in the commissioning window via
"accept configuration"
Fieldbus (Compax3 I2xTxx)
==>
Changing the motion objects directly
<==
Reading the motion objects
==>
via positioning modules
IEC61131-3 program
Compax3 device
Deceleration
[O1111.4]
jerk* [O1111.5]
(Acceleration)
Jerk* [O1111.6]
(Deceleration)
* for IxxT11 devices, both jerk
values are identical
(Compax3 IxxT30, IxxT40)
4.3.6.
ProfileViewer for the optimization of the motion profile

Mode 1: Time and maximum values are deduced from Compax3 input values..............149
Mode 2: Compax3 input values are deduced from times and maximum values ..............149
You will find the ProfileViewer in the Compax3 ServoManager under the "Tools"
Menu:
148
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
4.3.6.1
Setting up Compax3
Mode 1: Time and maximum values are deduced from Compax3

input values
The motion profile is calculated from Position, Speed, Acceleration, Deceleration,
Acceleration Jerk and Deceleration Jerk
As a result you will get, besides a graphical display, the following characteristic
values of the profile:
Times for the acceleration, deceleration and constant phase
Maximum values for acceleration, deceleration and speed
4.3.6.2
Mode 2: Compax3 input values are deduced from times and

maximum values
A jerk-limited motion profile is calculated from the positioning time and the
maximum speed / acceleration
As a result you will get, besides a graphical display, the following characteristic
values of the profile:
the parameters Position, Speed, Acceleration, Deceleration, Acceleration Jerk
and Deceleration Jerk
Times for the acceleration, deceleration and constant phase
Maximum values for acceleration, deceleration and speed
Set deceleration and acceleration phase

The profile can be defined more exactly by entering the segmentation into
deceleration and acceleration phase.
When setting 50% and 50%, a symmetrical design will result, the values for
triangular operation are calculated, which is limited by the maximum speed.
The total of the percentage values may not exceed 100.
The percentage entries refer to the total positioning time.
Example:
35%
30%
100%
192-121101 N04 June 2008
149
Motion control
C3F_T30
5. Motion control
Programming based on IEC61131-3................................................................................150
Status diagrams ...............................................................................................................160
Control functions ..............................................................................................................163
Reading values.................................................................................................................168
Determine valve/range parameters (C3_GetSystemFingerPrint).....................................172
Positioning functions (standard) .......................................................................................176
Superimposed motion ......................................................................................................196
Adjust force / pressure (C3_PressureForceAbsolute)......................................................201
Dynamic switching: Position- on force/pressure - adjustment..........................................202
Error handling ...................................................................................................................205
Process image..................................................................................................................208
Interface to C3 powerPLmC .............................................................................................219
IEC examples ...................................................................................................................227
Profibus: Emulating the ProfiDrive profile (C3F_ProfiDrive_Statemachine).....................234
5.1
Programming based on IEC61131-3

Prerequisites.....................................................................................................................150
CoDeSys / Compax3 target system (Target Package) ....................................................151
Languages supported.......................................................................................................152
Function range supported.................................................................................................152
Data types supported .......................................................................................................155
Retain Variables ...............................................................................................................155
Recipe table with 9 columns and 32 lines ........................................................................155
Maximum program size ....................................................................................................156
Cycle time.........................................................................................................................156
Access to the Compax3 object directory ..........................................................................156
Compilation, debugging and down/upload of IEC61131 programs ..................................157
General rules / timing .......................................................................................................158
Library constants ..............................................................................................................159
5.1.1.
Prerequisites
Installation of the CoDeSys programming tool.
Installation of necessary Target Packages (target systems):
Bring up the "InstallTarget" program (program group "3S Software": "CoDeSys
V2.3")
From Open, select the target file; file name: "Compax3.tnf".
The selected target can be installed with "Install".
150
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.1.2.
Motion control
CoDeSys / Compax3 target system (Target Package)
Targets for Compax3 servo axes

Beginning with Compax3 software version V2.0, two Compax3 targets are included
with delivery (containing module and object descriptions).
CoDeSys for C3 T30: for Compax3 T30 (beginning with Compax3 software
version V2.0)
CoDeSys for C3 T40: for Compax3 T40 (beginning with Compax3 software
version V2.0)
The old target is still available for programs that were created earlier (created with
Compax3 software version < V2.0).
CoDeSys for Compax3: for Compax3 T30
This programs are thus still capable of running.
When migrating to a new target, you must be certain that the module and object
names have been changed.
Edit the appropriate parts of the IEC program accordingly.
Targets for Compax3F hydraulic axes

CoDeSys for C3F T30: for Compax3 T30
CoDeSys for C3F T40: For Compax3 T40
5.1.2.1
Program development and test
Program
development
CoDeSys is the development environment for control systems which will help you
develop Compax3 IEC61131 programs. CoDeSys is called up from the Compax3
ServoManager (under programming: IEC61131-3 development environment")
The IEC program can be integrated into the C3 ServoManager project or exported
again from the project as required.
When CoDeSys is brought up, the IEC program stored in the project is opened. If
the project does not contain an IEC program, a selection dialog appears.
Download to
Compax3
After the IEC61131 program has been developed and compiled with CoDeSys, it is
downloaded to Compax3 by means of the ServoManager (in Download:
IEC61131-3").
Program test
For testing your program directly with Compax3, you may use the Compax3
IEC61131-3 debugger (the debug functions of CoDeSys are not supported in
conjunction with Compax3). The debugger is called up from the ServoManager
(under Programming: IEC61131-3 debugger). It automatically accesses the last
IEC61131-3 program in the ServoManager to be loaded into Compax3 with
"Download: IEC61131-3" and makes its modules and variables available in the
project tree.
The data from Compax3 are read via the instruction log in. Please note in this
regard that the interface to Compax3 can only be assigned once: Online functions
in the ServoManager such as Upload, Download, Status display in the Optimization
window or oscilloscope functions are not possible simultaneously. These functions
interrupt the connection between debugger and Compax3 automatically.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
151
Motion control
5.1.2.2
C3F_T30
Recipe management
The recipe management function in CoDeSys is not supported in conjunction with
Compax3. Please use the recipe table available in Compax3 (also see in the
configuration wizard).
5.1.3.
Languages supported
IL (Instruction List)
ST (Structured Text)
FBD (Function block diagram)
CFC (continuous function chart editor)
LD (Ladder diagram)
5.1.4.
Function range supported

Operators supported.........................................................................................................152
Standard functions supported ..........................................................................................153
Standard function modules supported..............................................................................154
5.1.4.1
Operators supported
IL
LD(N)
FBP / CFC / SFC
ST
AND
OR
XOR
NOT
ADD
SUB
MUL
DIV
GT
GE
EQ
NE
LE
LT
RET
MOVE
AND(N)
OR(N)
XOR(N)
NOT
+
*
/
>
>=
=
<>
<=
<
RETURN
ST(N)
R
S
AND(N)
OR(N)
XOR(N)
NOT
ADD
SUB
MUL
DIV
GT
GE
EQ
NE
LE
LT
RET
:=
152
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
CAL(C/N)
JMP(C/N)
CASE
DO
ELSE
ELSIF
END_CASE
END_FOR
END_IF
END_REPEAT
END_WHILE
EXIT
FOR
IF
REPEAT
THEN
TO
UNTIL
WHILE
5.1.4.2
Standard functions supported
Bit manipulation functions

SHL, SHR, ROL, ROR
Numeric functions
ABS, SQRT, SIN, COS
Functions for type conversion

Type conversions
x_TO_y
TRUNC
X=Source data type, Y=Target data type
Functions for selection

MIN
MAX
LIMIT
SEL
Not for BOOL /WORD / DWORD

192-121101 N04 June 2008
153
Motion control
5.1.4.3
C3F_T30
Standard function modules supported
FlipFlops
RS, SR,
Trigger
R_TRIG, F_TRIG,
Numerator
CTU, CTD, CTUD,
Timer
TON, TOF, TP,
max. 8 pcs., time resolution 0.5ms
(the number of timers required is displayed in the CoDeSys output window during
compilation)
PID Controller function block
154
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.1.5.
Motion control
Data types supported
The following data types are available for IEC61131-3 programming:

Name
BOOL
INT
DINT
REAL
WORD
DWORD
TIME
ENUM
Division
Status values: TRUE or FALSE
-32768...32767
-2147483648...2147483647
Format
Logical variable.
16-bit integer: Fixed point number without places after the decimal
32-bit integer: Fixed point number without places after the decimal
32-bit floating point: 16 bits before the decimal and 16 bits after the
decimal
0...65535
16-bit bit sequence (no range of values)
0...4294967295
32-bit bit sequence (no range of values)
0...4194,3035s
32 Bit - Format (resolution: 0.5 ms)
User-defined type of enumeration (local enumerations are not supported)
Altogether 500 16-bit variables are available. These include BOOL, INT, and
WORD.
Altogether 150 32-bit variables are available. These include
DINT,DWORD,TIME,REAL.
The number of the required variables is displayed in the CoDeSys output window
during compilation.
5.1.6.
Retain Variables
6 retain variables (variables that are safe from power failure) are available
3x16-bit retain-variables
3x32-bit retain-variables
5.1.7.
Recipe table with 9 columns and 32 lines

An array, i.e. a table with 9 columns and 32 rows, is available to store values.
This table is freely assignable and can be used for example to store position sets
or for recipe management.
In addition, this table can be used to exchange data with an external control system
or a POP, for example.
The layout of the table is as follows:

Column 1
Type:
REAL
Objects
O1901
Column 2
Type:
REAL
Objects
O1902
Column 3
Type:
INT
Objects
O1903
Column 4
Type:
INT
Objects
O1904
Column 5
Type:
INT
Objects
O1905
Column 6
Type:
DINT
Objects
O1906
Column 7
Type:
DINT
Objects
O1907
Column 8
Type:
DINT
Objects
O1908
Column 9
Type:
DINT
Objects
O1909
Row 1
"C3Array_Col
1_Row1"
(1901.1)
Row 1
"C3Array_Col
2_Row1"
(1902.1)
Row 1
"C3Array_Col
3_Row1"
(1903.1)
Row 1
"C3Array_C
ol4_Row1"
(1904.1)
Row1
"C3Array_C
ol5_Row1"
(1905.1)
Row 1
"C3Array_C
ol6_Row1"
(1906.1)
Row 1
"C3Array_C
ol7_Row1"
(1907.1)
Row 1
"C3Array_C
ol8_Row1"
(1908.1)
Row 1
"C3Array_C
ol9_Row1"
(1909.1)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_Col
1_Row32"
(1901.32)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_Col
2_Row32"
(1902.32)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_Col
3_Row32"
(1903.32)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_C
ol4_Row32"
(1904.32)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_C
ol5_Row32"
(1905.32)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_C
ol6_Row32"
(1906.32)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_C
ol7_Row32"
(1907.32)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_C
ol8_Row32"
(1908.32)
...
...
...
Row 32
"C3Array_C
ol9_Row32"
(1909.32)
In addition to direct access to every individual field in the table, direct access is
also possible through pointer addressing.
To do this, the table pointer "C3ArrayPointer_Row" (Object 1900.1) must be set to
the desired rows.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
155
Motion control
C3F_T30
This makes access to Columns 1 through 9 of the referenced rows possible

through "C3Array_Indirect_Col1" to "C3Array_Indirect_Col9" (objects 1910.1 to
1910.9).
5.1.8.
Maximum program size

Up to 6000 (IL) instructions are possible
Note!
Please note, that integrated function modules do also require program memory.
The required program memory can therefore increase due to a Targets update,
even without any program changes.
The number of instructions generated is displayed in the CoDeSys output window
by the Compax3 compiler during interpretation.
5.1.9.
Cycle time
Minimal cycle time: 1ms.
The cycle time can be adjusted with the Compax3 ServoManager when
downloading IEC61131-3 programs.
It is possible to optimize later in the optimization display of the Compax3
Servomanager. The cycle time is displayed there in increments of 500 s (2 = 1
ms; 3 = 1.5 ms; etc.).
The IEC61131-3 program is stopped cycle time of 0.
5.1.10. Access to the Compax3 object directory

All Compax3 objects are encapsulated in the "C3" program module.
Access to Compax3 Objects (see page 320) in CoDeSys:
156
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
Compax3 objects are divided into groups:

C3.
Compax3 - Objects
C3Array.
Variable (Recipe) List
C3Pop.
Objects for the Parker Operator Panel Pop.
C3Cam.
Objects for the T40 cam control.
Do only use the objects described in this help; the additional
objects are for internal use only!
C3Plus.
Additional objects that are generally not required.
C3Scope. Objects for programming the oscilloscope function.
For internal use only!
The object name reveals the group assignment.
In general, it
applies:
Objects that are not described here are reserved objects!
5.1.11. Compilation, debugging and down/upload of IEC61131

programs
Compiling IEC61131-3 programs in CoDeSys
Downloading or uploading of IEC61131-3 programs with the Compax3
ServoManager.
The debugger is called up from the C3 ServoManager under Programming:
IEC61131-3 debugger called up.
Note:
Before compiling you have to enter for which Compax3 versions the compilation is
to be executed.
Please note that when selecting all versions not all functions are available, only
the minimal range of functions is supported.
Only if the latest firmware version was selected (and the corresponding firmware is
loaded in the target Compax3) all functions described here are supported.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
157
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.1.12. General rules / timing

General rules
Positioning
Status of the
outputs
Within an IEC cycle, only one positioning module may be activated!

If 2 positioning modules are activated within one IEC cycle, it is not defined which
one is executed.
The outputs "Done", "InVelocity", "Error", "ErrorID" and "CommandAborted" reset
with the falling edge of the "Execute" input.
If the "Execute" input goes back to FALSE again before the module action (for
example positioning) has been completed ("pulse to Execute"), the corresponding
outputs (for example "Done") will still be set for exactly ONE cycle upon
termination.
The outputs "Done" and "Error" are never simultaneously TRUE.
If the instance of a function module receives a new "Execute" signal before the
function ends, the module will not show any response (no "Done" and no
"Command Aborted") in reference to the previous action.
Input parameters
Parameters are accepted with the rising edge of the "Execute" signal.
To be able to accept modified parameters, the module must be triggered again
with an "Execute" signal.
Missing input
parameters
If an input parameter is missing, the previous value of this instance will be used in
accordance with IEC61131-3.
The default value is used the first time a call is made.
Position and
distance
"Position" is a value that is defined for a reference system, i.e. a specific position
value is a fixed location in the reference system.
"Distance" is the difference between 2 positions.
Sign
"Velocity", "Acceleration", "Deceleration" and "Jerk" are always positive variables.

"Position" and "Distance" may be positive or negative.
Error handling
All function modules have an "Error" output that can be activated by a module
during a module sequence.
The ErrorID (error number) can be read by an axis error with the
"MC_ReadAxisError" module.
Behavior of the
"Done" - output
Behavior of the
"CommandAborted"
output
Value range of the
movement
parameters
Linear motors
158
The "Done" output is set if the function module has been successfully executed.
If one positioning process is interrupted by a second before it is complete, the first
function module will not set "Done".
"CommandAborted" is set if a positioning process is interrupted by a second
positioning process, by "MC_Stop" or MC_Power.
The reset behavior of "CommandAborted" is the same as "Done".
If "CommandAborted" occurs, the other outputs will be reset.
Please note that the limits are specified in revolutions.
To convert to the configured unit, multiply the min/max values by the "travel
distance per motor revolution".
With a configured linear motor, all revolution data must be replaced by pitch.
To convert to the configured unit, the min/max values must be multiplied by the
pitch length (see the technical data for the motor).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
5.1.13. Library constants

The following global constants are declared in the PLCopen function module
library:
For the selection of the master signal source:
AXIS_REF_Physical
C3_AXIS_Ref
for +/-10V analog input, step / direction input
5V or Encoder A/B input 5V (depending on the
configuration of the physical source under
signal source)
Axis_REF_HEDA
C3_AXIS_Ref
HEDA
General constants
MC_Direction_Positive
INT
For supply of the Direction input of the
MC_MoveVelocity module (for positive
rotational direction)
MC_Direction_Negative INT
MC_MoveVelocity module (for negative
rotational direction)
MC_Direction_Current
INT
MC_MoveVelocity module (retaining the last
rotational direction to be selected)
Direction_Memory
INT (Variable)
The MC_MoveVelocity modules instances
store the last direction parameter in this
variable. This variable can only be used by
Motion Control modules and must not be
overwritten!
Reset positioning mode
All directions
INT
C3_all_direction
Positive direction
INT
MC_positive_direction
Shortest path
INT
MC_shortest_way
Negative direction
INT
MC_negative_direction
Actual direction
INT
MC_current_direction
For power supply of the axis inputs/outputs of modules:
Axis_Ref_LocalAxis
INT
Local axis (physically present axis)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
159
Motion control
5.2
C3F_T30
Status diagrams
Status diagram of Compax3F main axis ..........................................................................160
Status diagram of Compax3F auxiliary axis .....................................................................161
5.2.1.
Status diagram of Compax3F main axis

MC_GearIn(Slave)
MC_CamIn(Slave)
MC_Phasing(Slave)
MC_MoveSuperimposed(Slave)
C3_CamIn(Slave)
MC_GearIn(Slave)
MC_CamIn(Slave)
Error
C3_CamIn(Slave)
Synchronized
Motion
MC_GearIn(Slave)
MC_GearIn(Slave)
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_MoveSuperimposed
MC_Stop
MC_MoveSuperimposed
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_MoveAbsolute; MC_MoveRelative; MC_MoveAdditive
Discrete Motion
Positioning
MC_MoveVelocity
C3_Pressure
ForceStop*
MC_Stop
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveSuperimposed
Error
Done
MC_Stop
Stopping
MC_Power.
Enable =
FALSE
Error
Error
Force/Pressure
C3_Pressure
ForceAbsolute
Error
ErrorStop
MC_Stop
Continuous Motion
MC_Stop
Error
MC_Stop.Done
AND NOT
MC_Stop.Execute
C3_Pressure
ForceAbsolute
MC_Move Velocity
MC_Reset
Homing
Done
MC_Home
C3_CamOut (Slave)
powered
Standstill
MC_Power.Enable = FALSE
160
disabled
192-121101 N04 June 2008
MC_Power.Enable = TRUE
Parker EME
Motion control
* C3_PressureForceStop is valid for axes that are entirely pressure/force

controlled, where no position control is configured.
T30 Functions: Transitions and states as continuous line, text not in italics
T40 Functions: complete status diagram, all functions
Special T40 functions are displayed in italics and in dashed line
MC_Power.Enable = FALSE changes to "not powered" from any state (apart
from ErrorStop).
5.2.2.
Status diagram of Compax3F auxiliary axis
MC_GearIn(Slave)
Error
Synchronized
Motion
MC_GearIn(Slave)
MC_GearIn(Slave)
MC_GearIn(Slave)
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_Stop
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_MoveAbsolute; MC_MoveRelative; MC_MoveAdditive
Positioning
Discrete Motion
C3_Pressure
ForceStop*
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_Stop
Error
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveAdditive
MC_MoveAbsolute
Done
MC_Stop
Stopping
MC_Power.
Enable =
FALSE
Error
Homing
only Mode 35
Error
Force/Pressure
C3_Pressure
ForceAbsolute
Error
ErrorStop
MC_Stop
Continuous Motion
MC_Stop.Done
AND NOT
MC_Stop.Execute
C3_Pressure
ForceAbsolute
MC_Stop
Error
MC_Move Velocity
MC_Reset
Done
MC_Home
powered
Standstill
MC_Power.Enable = FALSE
MC_Power.Enable = TRUE
disabled
192-121101 N04 June 2008
161
Motion control
C3F_T30
* C3_PressureForceStop is valid for axes that are entirely pressure/force

controlled, where no position control is configured.
T30 Functions: Transitions and states as continuous line, text not in italics
T40 Functions: complete status diagram, all functions
Special T40 functions are displayed in italics and in dashed line
MC_Power.Enable = FALSE changes to "not powered" from any state (apart
from ErrorStop).
162
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.3
Motion control
Control functions
Activation of the drive (MC_Power) ..................................................................................163
Stop (MC_Stop)................................................................................................................164
C3_SetControlMode .........................................................................................................167
5.3.1.
Activation of the drive (MC_Power)

FB name
MC_Power
Transition into the status "Standstill: disable" or "Standstill: powered"
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Axis-ID (library constants)
BOOL
Activates the module;

as long as Enable=TRUE, the drive is activated.
With Enable=FALSE, the drive stops with the ramp defined
for the error (see page 72).
VAR_INPUT
Enable
Please observe:
The configured error ramp is limited. The error ramp
will not be smaller than the deceleration set in the last
motion set.
VAR_OUTPUT
Status
BOOL
Error
BOOL
State of the power output stage (TRUE=drive activated,

FALSE=drive deactivated)
Error when deactivating the drive
Notes:
If the input parameter "Enable" = TRUE, all enables of the drive will be set.
All enables will be reset if the input parameter
"Enable" = FALSE, the axis decelerates with the configured error ramp to speed =
0.
Note on Compax3 Servo: During automatic commutation, the output "Status" is
not set to TRUE for activation, but rather not until after automatic commutation
has been successfully completed.
An enable is denied until the intermediate circuit is loaded, this may take up to 2s
when switching on Compax3H for the first time.
If the drive is in error state (see page 207) (error reaction 1: controller active) and
the enable of the MC_Power is deactivated, the drive is deactivated (error
reaction 2).
C3 powerPLmC Note: This module is also available as group function block. You
can then trigger this function for the entire Compax3 group.
MC_Power
Enable : BOOL
Status : BOOL
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Error : BOOL
163
Motion control
5.3.2.
C3F_T30
Stop (MC_Stop)
MC_Stop at pressure/force control...................................................................................165
MC_Stop: Example 1........................................................................................................165
MC_Stop: Example 2........................................................................................................166
FB name
MC_Stop
Stops the current movement
Please note: Only one instance of MC_Stop is permitted per axis!
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
BOOL
DINT
Stops the movement

The value of deceleration (always positive) [units/s]
Value range: 0.24 rev/s ... 1000000 rev/s
VAR_INPUT
Execute
Deceleration
Please observe:
The configured STOP ramp is limited. The STOP
ramp will not be smaller than the deceleration set in
the last motion set.
Jerk
DINT
Value of the deceleration jerk [units/s] (always positive)

Value range: 30 rev/s ... 125,000,000 rev/s
BOOL
BOOL
Stop move
Error while stopping positioning
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Error
Note:
As long as the "Execute" input is set, the axis remains in the "Stopping" status (as
long the axis is activated) and is unable to execute any additional movement
commands!
If the axis is deactivated by setting the Enable signal of the "MC_Power" module to
FALSE, the Stopping state will then be exited.
If the enable signal of the "MC_Power" module is set to TRUE again, the axis goes back to
the "Stopping" state again if the Execute input of the "MC_Stop" module is still TRUE.
C3 powerPLmC Note: This module is also available as group function block. You can then
trigger this function for the entire Compax3 group.
MC_Stop
Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Deceleration : DINT
Error : BOOL
Jerk : DINT
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
164
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
5.3.2.1
MC_Stop at pressure/force control

If a position control is configured, the MC_Stop.Execute = TRUE switches to
position control (pQ). The axis is stopped (with a ramp defined via Deceleration
and Jerk).
If no position control is defined, MC_Stop does not have any function. Set the axis
into a Stop state by specifying a defined force (or pressure difference) in a Stop
state.
5.3.2.2
MC_Stop: Example 1
The following illustration shows an example of how the MC_Stop module interrupts
and stops a movement that is in progress.
If a positioning module is interrupted by the MC_Stop module, it reports "Command
Aborted" and can no longer be executed as long as the MC_Stop module is active.
If the MC_Stop module is inactive (no "Execute" signal), the function module can
be executed again.
Timing Diagram:
MC_Stop.
Execute
Done
Velocity
Stopping
Standstill
Note:
If a positioning is to follow immediately after the stop, this can take place with the
falling edge of the done output at the earliest:
MC_Stop
stopAxis
400
MC_MoveRelative
Execute
Done
Deceleration
Error
Execute
6000. 0
Distance
Velocity
4000
Jerk
500. 0
AXIS_REF_
LocalAxis
Axis
100
Acceleration
100
Deceleration
1000
Jerk
1000
JerkDecel
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Done
Command
Aborted
Error
Axis
165
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.3.2.3
MC_Stop: Example 2
MC_MoveRelative
Execute
go
6000. 0
Distance
Velocity
500. 0
100
Acceleration
100
Deceleration
1000
Jerk
1000
JerkDecel
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
MC_Stop
Done
stopAxis
Command
Aborted
400
Error
Execute
Done
Deceleration
Error
4000
Jerk
AXIS_REF_
LocalAxis
Axis
Axis
MC_Stop.
Execute (Stop Axis)
Done (Stopp)
1
0
1
0
t
MC_MoveRelative.
Execute (go)
CommandAborted
1
0
1
0
Bewegungsablauf
Moving diagram
Velocity
0
166
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.3.3.
Motion control
C3_SetControlMode
FB name
C3_SetControlMode
Switching between open loop and closed loop.
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Axis ID (Library constants)

AXIS_REF_LocalAxis: Main axis
AXIS_REF_LocalAxisAux: Auxiliary axis
BOOL
BOOL
Starts the sequences of the module with positive edge

TRUE: Sets closed loop operation for the selected axis
FALSE: Sets open loop operation for the selected axis
VAR_INPUT
Execute
ClosedLoop
VAR_OUTPUT
ClosedLoop_IsActive BOOL
Error
BOOL
TRUE, when closed loop operation has been set

Error while executing module. The axis may not be in
the "operational" or a higher state for the change!
Note:
A change can only be executed if the axis is in pre-operational sate (Standstill: not
powered).
In open loop mode, the axis may drift!
For safe operation in the closed loop mode, the controller must be aligned!
C3_SetControlMode
Execute : BOOL
ClosedLoop : BOOL
Axis : INT
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Error : BOOL
ClosedLoop_IsActive : BOOL
167
Motion control
5.4
C3F_T30
Reading values
Reading the current position (MC_ReadActualPosition) ..................................................168
Read access to the (C3_ReadArray) array ......................................................................170
Reading the device status (MC_ReadStatus) ..................................................................171
5.4.1.
Reading the current position (MC_ReadActualPosition)

FB name
MC_ReadActualPosition
Reading the current axis position
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
BOOL
Activates the module, continuous reading of the axis

position as long as Enable=TRUE
BOOL
BOOL
REAL
Position value available

Error while reading the position
Axis position
VAR_INPUT
Enable
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Error
Position
Note: MC_ReadActualPosition
Enable : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
Error : BOOL
Position : REAL
168
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
You can read the current position of the axis with this module.
As long as the input parameter "Enable" = TRUE, the current parameter value will
be supplied cyclically (see page 222) to the output parameter "Position".
The status of the input parameter must be present for at least one module call.
The following illustration shows the behavior of parameters in the
MC_ReadActualPosition function module.
go
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Enable
Done
Axis
Error
Position
Enable
Done
1
0
1
0
Position
1
0
192-121101 N04 June 2008
169
Motion control
5.4.2.
C3F_T30
Read access to the (C3_ReadArray) array

FB name
C3_ReadArray
This module is used for simplified read access to the array (recipe table).
VAR_INPUT
Enable
BOOL
Row
INT
The desired rows can be read with the Enable input (after
selecting "Row").
The desired row in the table must be created at the end of
the Row module input.
this input works with object 1900.1; please take
this into consideration, if you directly access the object
1900.1 in addition.
VAR_OUTPUT
Error
BOOL
Col1 Col9
REAL
INT
DINT
Error as an output indicates that an error was encountered

while reading the array
(a row that does not exist selected on the Row input).
The individual columns of the array can be accessed
through outputs Col1 through Col9.
Notes: Rows will be read cyclically as long as Enable = TRUE.

C3_ReadArray
Enable : BOOL
Row : INT
Error : BOOL
Col1 : REAL
Col2 : REAL
Col3 : INT
Col4 : INT
Col5 : INT
Col6 : DINT
Col7 : DINT
Col8 : DINT
Col9 : DINT
170
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.4.3.
Motion control
Reading the device status (MC_ReadStatus)

FB name
MC_ReadStatus
Specifies the current status according to the PLCopen status machine
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
BOOL
Activates the module; continuous outputs of output

parameters as long as Enable=TRUE
Done
Error
Errorstop
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Stopping
Standstill
DiscreteMotion
ContinuousMotion
Homing
SynchronizedMoti
on
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Status values available

Error while executing module
Error stop function. The motor brakes as specified by the
stop ramp and is de-energized;
The motor is stopped;
The motor is stopped;
Individual movement;
Continuous positioning;
Machine home is approached;
Synchronous motion
VAR_INPUT
Enable
VAR_OUTPUT
Note: See also in the status diagram.

MC_ReadStatus
Enable : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
Error : BOOL
Errorstop : BOOL
Stopping : BOOL
Standstill : BOOL
DiscreteMotion : BOOL
ContinuousMotion : BOOL
Homing : BOOL
SynchronizedMotion : BOOL
192-121101 N04 June 2008
171
Motion control
5.5
C3F_T30
Determine valve/range parameters

(C3_GetSystemFingerPrint)
Important notes.................................................................................................................174
Procedure when working with the C3_getSystemFingerPrint ..........................................175
The characteristic line known as "SystemFingerPrint" contains besides the

behavior of the valve (valve characteristic line) all static non-linearities of the
hydraulic system.
The "SystemFingerPrint" is valid in the working point, where it has been
determined. If the parameters such as system pressure, load, friction or oil
temperature change significantly, this may affect the usability of the
"SystemFingerPrint".
FB name
C3_GetSystemFingerPrint
This module is used for measuring and memorizing the "SystemFingerPrint" (Signal/Flow characteristic)
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT

BOOL

Stops the measurement sequence with a positive edge
VAR_INPUT
Execute
Stop
Number_of_Measurin INT
g_Points
min_Position
REAL
Number of measuring points (max. 300).

Defines the setpoint accuracy.
Position window, where the measurement takes place
max_Position
max_Velocity
Acceleration
Jerk
Highest speed to be measured

Maximum acceleration during the measurement
Maximum jerk during the measurement
REAL
REAL
DINT
DINT
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Error
ErrorID
BOOL
BOOL
Word
Measurement terminated successfully

A fault has occurred. Measurement was terminated (by error or by stop).
Indicates, which error caused the abort:
0 = no Error
1 = measurement was terminated with stop (measurement is immediately
terminated)
2 = Compax3F is in error state (measurement is immediately terminated)
3 = The given adjusting range could not be entierely identified. (Measurement is
continued in the opposite direction and the result is memorized in the Flash).
Possible causes:
In the set travel range, the end speed (maxVelocity) could not be
reached: =>reduce max_Velocity
The demanded accuracy could not be achieved: Reduce
(ax_Error=max_Velocity / Number_of_Measuring_Points) =>
Number_of_Measuring_Points
4 = error when memorizing the characteristic line in the flash memory, no CurveID
free
5 = The axis was energized at the start of the identification
6 = Input parameters of the measurement are outside the permissible range
(Number_of_Measuring_Points or max_Velocity
172
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
Status
INT
Indicates how advanced the measurement is yet.

0 = waits for the start of the measurement with "Execute"
1 = Initialization of the measurement
2 = determination of the offset
(at which valve position does the axis no longer move
3 = Execution of the measurement
4 = Recovering of different settings
5 = Interpolation of the measurement values
6 = Memorizing the characteristic line in the flash
7 = Setting the Conditioning Chain Parameter to a new characeristic line
8 = Measurement terminated successfully, waiting for "Execute"
CurveID
INT
States, under which ID the characteristic line was memorized.

The ID of the characteristic line is in object 24x3.2*
If you wish to switch back to characteristic lines set before, you should read the ID
of the characteristic line before activating the module.
Switching back of a characteristic line:
Select characteristiac line (for all connected Conditioning Chains)

24x3.2* = number of the characteristic line
Select characteristic line (for all connected Conditioning Chains)
24x3.1=1*
Note:
After successful measurement of the characteristic line, it is memorized in the same way and at the same
place as up to now the valve characteristic lines. As the memory utilized provides space for up to 8
characteristic lines, existing characteristic lines must not be deleted.
In order to activate the characteristic line for the control, the characteristic lines are activated by this
module with 24x3.1=1* at the conditioning chains which are connected to the measured axis.
* (x stands for the respective Conditioning Chain: x=0 for Chain 0, x=1 for Chain
1,...)
C3_GetSystemFingerPrint
Execute : BOOL
Stop : BOOL
Number_of_Measuring_Points : INT
min_Position : REAL
max_Position : REAL
max_Velocity : REAL
Acceleration : DINT
Jerk : DINT
Axis : INT
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Done : BOOL
Error : BOOL
ErrorID : WORD
Status : INT
CurveID : IND
173
Motion control
5.5.1.
C3F_T30
Important notes
Requirements:
Stable control (even though slow)
Following error window set relatively wide => unless abortion due to following
error is possible.
The controller may not be active when the identification is started (State
"Standstill disable").
The measurement is in part executed in open loop operation. This means that the
function is, for example with z-axes, only possible to a limited extent. (the load
could for example be lowered due to leakages)
The entire hydraulic system should be well dampened.
Unless the measurement could be strongly influenced by resonance frequencies
present.
There must be enough travel space in order to perform the identification.
Enough memory space in the characteristics memory
Altogether 8 characteristic lines can be stored in the memory of the controller, if
these all are taken up by the identification, the identification will be terminated
with a corresponding error.
Check before the start of the identification, if there is enough memory space
available.
If there is no space available, the entire characteristics memory can be deleted by
writing a value <> 0 into object 2439.3 C3 "Plus.CurveMemory_Erase. Attention!
all characteristics present are deleted.
The loop gain of the speed control should be set at least approximately. If the
loop gain is much too small, the preset speed range might not be entirely
measured. If the loop gain is too high, the resolution of the measurement will be
too low.
Please respect the following for the measurement:

The axis to be measured may not be used for an action in the IEC.
(for example MC_Power, MC_Stop, MC_MoveRelative,...)
The software oscilloscope cannot be used during the measurement.
State after the end of the measurement:

Axis is not active (State "Standstill disable").
After MC_Power, the axis is in closed loop operation.
174
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.5.2.
Motion control
Procedure when working with the C3_getSystemFingerPrint

Example of a valve characteristic line (volume current via control signal):
Procedure:
Specification of the travel range available for the measurement with min_Position
and max_Position.
Setting max_Velocity (is valid symmetrically for positive and negative values).
With max_Velocity, you make 2 settings at once: the max. velocity during the
measurement and the measurement range.
Connection between velocity (max_Velocity) and the relative volume current:
max_ Velocity =
relative _ volume _ current[%] Valve _ nominal _ volume _ current

Cylinder _ surfaceA 100%
(Value_nominal_volume_current Valve-nominal-volume-current;
Cylinder_surfaceA: Cylinder_surface-A
max_Velocity should be set at least so high that the measurement exceeds the
non-linear range shown above, as the characteristic line is continued at the same
slope outside the measured velocity range.
the Number_of_Measuring_Points should be set high enough so that the nonlinearity to be emulated can be exactly detected (typically N=100).
Start of the measurement by positive edge at the Execute input.
The state of the measurement can be monitored via the Status, Done, Error and
ErrorID outputs.
A positive edge at the Done output shows the successful termination of the
identification:
Measurement terminated successfully
The characteristic line was inverted and written into the FLASH memory.
In the conditioning chain responsible for the measured system, the curve ID
was already set to the new characteristic line and the characteristic line
compensation was activated.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
175
Motion control
5.6
C3F_T30
Positioning functions (standard)

Value range for positioning parameters ...........................................................................176
Absolute positioning (MC_MoveAbsolute) .......................................................................177
Relative positioning (MC_MoveRelative) .........................................................................182
Additive positioning (MC_MoveAdditive)..........................................................................184
Continuous positioning (MC_MoveVelocity).....................................................................186
Manual operation (C3_Jog) ..............................................................................................188
Homing (MC_Home).........................................................................................................190
Electronic gearbox (MC_GearIn)......................................................................................193
5.6.1.
Value range for positioning parameters

Target position:
Speed for positioning:
Acceleration for positioning
Acceleration jerk for positioning:
Deceleration for positioning:
Deceleration jerk for positioning:
Min: -4000000 rev

Min: 0.00001157 rev/s
Min: 0.24 rev/s
Min: 30 rev/s
Min: 0.24 rev/s
Min: 30 rev/s
Max: 4000000 rev

Max: 2000 rev/s
Max: 100000 rev/s
Max: 125,000,000 rev/s
Max: 1000000 rev/s
Max: 125,000,000 rev/s
The unit "increments" is valid only for position values!

speed, acceleration and jerk are specified in this case in revolutions/s,
revolutions/s2 and revolutions/s3 (resp. pitch/s, pitch/s2, pitch/s3).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
176
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.6.2.
Motion control
Absolute positioning (MC_MoveAbsolute)

FB name
MC_MoveAbsolute
Absolute positioning to a specified position.
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Execute
Position
BOOL
REAL
Velocity
REAL
Acceleration
DINT
Deceleration
DINT
Jerk
DINT
JerkDecel
DINT

Absolute target position of the movement to be executed
(configured unit [Units] ) (positive and negative direction)
<value range> (see page Fehler! Textmarke nicht
definiert.)
Value of the maximum speed (always positive) (not
necessarily reached) <value range> (see page Fehler!
Textmarke nicht definiert.)
[Units/s]
Value of acceleration (always positive) [Units/s] <value
range> (see page Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.)
Value of deceleration (always positive) [Units/s] <value
Value of the acceleration jerk (see page 181) [Units/s]
(always positive) <value range> (see page Fehler!
Value of deceleration jerk [Units/s] (always positive)
definiert.)
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
BOOL
CommandAborted
Error
BOOL
BOOL
Specified setpoint position on the setpoint generator output

is reached
Positioning aborted
Note: If a SuperImposed movement is started during an absolute movement, the

absolute position is not accessed, but the absolute position plus the position
entered in the SuperImposed.
The same applies if a SuperImposed movement is already being executed and an
absolute movement is started, then the absolute position is not accessed but the
sum of both values.
After the SuperImposed movement has been finished, the absolute position is
accessed with the next absolute movement.
Continuous operation can be selected via object 1111.8
"C3Plus.Position_restposition_mode" <> 0; setpoint value and actual value are
then set to 0 before each positioning.
You can optimize the motion profile data with the "ProfilViewer" (see page 148)
software tool!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
177
Motion control
C3F_T30
MC_MoveAbsolute
Execute : BOOL
Position : REAL
Velocity : REAL
Acceleration : DINT
Deceleration : DINT
Jerk : DINT
JerkDecel : DINT
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
178
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Done : BOOL
CommandAborted : BOOL
Error : BOOL
Parker EME
Motion control
The following illustration shows two examples of the combination of two

MC_MoveAbsolute modules.
The left part (a) of the time diagram shows a case in which the second function
module (FB) is executed after the first function module..
When the first function module has reached Position 60, the "Done" output gives
the execution command to the second function module, which then moves to
Position 100.
The right part (b) of the diagram shows a case in which the second function
module is activated while the first function module is being executed. The first
function module is automatically interrupted..
The second function module moves directly to position 100 whether or not
position 60 of the first function module has already been reached.
1. Instanz
First motion
2. Instanz
Second motion
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveAbsolute
Execute
Done
60. 0
Position
Command
Aborted
300. 0
Velocity
Error
go
Done
Velocity
Error
100
Acceleration
Deceleration
100
Deceleration
1000
Jerk
1000
JerkDecel
Axis
1000
Jerk
1000
JerkDecel
AXIS_REF_
LocalAxis
Axis
Test
1
0
1
0
1
0
2. Instanz
Second motion
Execute (Test)
Position
200. 0
Acceleration
CommandAborted
100. 0
100
1. Instanz
First motion
Done
Done
Command
Aborted
100
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Execute (go)
Execute
OR
1
0
1
0
Bewegungsablauf
Moving diagram
300
Velocity
200
0
100
absolute Position
absolute position
60
192-121101 N04 June 2008
179
Motion control
5.6.2.1
C3F_T30
Position mode in reset operation

Setting the positioning mode in reset mode..................................................................... 180
Examples in the help file.................................................................................................. 180
In reset operation (activated by the configured reset distance), additional

positioning functions are possible for absolute positionings:
All directions
Standard positioning mode
Positive direction
Positioning only in positive direction
Shortest path
Negative direction
Actual direction
Positioning on the shortest path

Positioning only in negative direction
Positioning by keeping the actual direction of travel
Dynamic positioning
In dynamic positioning, a decision concerning the positioning travel is not taken on
the basis of the actual position, but on the basis of the braking position resulting
from the motion parameters.
Please observe:
In the event of positioning specifications below zero and higher than or equal to
the reset distance, this function is deactivated.
The positioning functions are neither effective in test movements nor in a
positioning after homing travel.
In the event of shortest path the motion is not defined for a positioning by half
the reset distance.
Setting the positioning mode in reset mode

The positioning modes in reset operation are configured via object 1111.13
[=C3Plus.POSITION_direction:=MC_Direction_Positive]:
Mode
Value IEC constant
All directions
C3_all_direction
Positive direction
MC_positive_direction
Shortest path
Negative direction
Actual direction
2
3
4
MC_shortest_way
MC_negative_direction
MC_current_direction
Setting the desired value must take place in the IEC initialization routine, as a
configuration download by the C3 ServoManager would reset the value to 0 (due to
downwards compatibility).
Examples in the help file

In the help file you can find here examples for the functioning of the individual
positioning modes.
180
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.6.2.2
Motion control
Description of jerk
Jerk
The jerk (marked with 4 in the drawing below) describes the change in
acceleration (derivation of the acceleration)
Without jerk
according to
VDI2143
The maximum change in acceleration is limited via the jerk limitation.

A motion process generally starts from a standstill, accelerates constantly at the
specified acceleration to then move at the selected speed to the target position.
The drive is brought to a stop before the target position with the delay that has
been set in such a manner as to come to a complete stop at the target position. To
reach the set acceleration and deceleration, the drive must change the acceleration
(from 0 to the set value or from the set value to 0).
This change in speed is limited by the maximum jerk.
According to VDI2143 the jerk is defined (other than here) as the jump in
acceleration (infinite value of the jerk function).
This means that positionings with Compax3 are without jerk according to VDI2143,
as the value of the jerk funciton is limited.
Motion sequence
1
1: Position
2: Velocity
3: Acceleration
4: Jerk
High changes in acceleration (high jerks) often have negative effects on the
mechanical systems involved. There is a danger that mechanical resonance points
will be excited or that impacts will be caused by existing mechanical slack points.
You can reduce these problems to a minimum by specifying the maximum jerk.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
181
Motion control
5.6.3.
C3F_T30
Relative positioning (MC_MoveRelative)

FB name
MC_MoveRelative
Relative positioning by a specified distance.
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Execute
Distance
BOOL
REAL
MoveVelocity
REAL
Acceleration
DINT
Deceleration
DINT
Jerk
DINT
JerkDecel
DINT

Relative distance of the movement to be executed
(configured unit [Units] ) <value range> (see page Fehler!
Value of maximum speed (always positive)
(not necessarily reached) [Units/s] <value range> (see
page Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.)
definiert.)
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
BOOL
CommandAborted
Error
BOOL
BOOL
Specified setpoint distance on the setpoint generator output

is reached
Positioning aborted
Note:
In the case of dynamic positioning (module is called during a positioning process)
the specified position is added to the current actual position.
Continuous operation can be selected via object 1111.8
"C3Plus.Position_restposition_mode" <> 0; setpoint value and actual value are
then set to 0 before each positioning.
You can optimize the motion profile data with the "ProfilViewer" (see page 148)
software tool!
MC_MoveRelative
Execute : BOOL
Distance : REAL
Velocity : REAL
Acceleration : DINT
Deceleration : DINT
Jerk : DINT
JerkDecel : DINT
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
182
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Done : BOOL
Error : BOOL
Parker EME
Motion control

MC_MoveRelative modules.
module is executed after the first function module..
If the first function module has reached 60 units, the "Done" output gives the
execution command to the second function module, which then moves an
addition 40 units.
module is activated while the first function module is being executed. Because
the second module is started during the execution of the first function module, the
first function module is automatically interrupted.
The second function module immediately moves an additional 40 units whether or
not the 60 units of the first function were already reached.
1. Instanz
First motion
2. Instanz
Second motion
MC_MoveRelative
MC_MoveRelative
Execute
go
Distance
60. 0
Done
40. 0
Error
200. 0
Velocity
300. 0
Acceleration
100
Acceleration
Deceleration
100
Deceleration
1000
Jerk
1000
Jerk
1000
JerkDecel
1000
JerkDecel
Axis
AXIS_REF_
LocalAxis
Done
Axis
1
0
1
0
1
0
2. Instanz
Second motion
Execute (Test)
Error
Test
CommandAborted
Done
Command
Aborted
Velocity
100
1. Instanz
First motion
Done
Distance
100
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Execute (go)
Execute
OR
Command
Aborted
1
0
1
0
Bewegungsablauf
Moving diagram
300
Velocity
200
0
100
relative Position
relative position
0
192-121101 N04 June 2008
183
Motion control
5.6.4.
C3F_T30
Additive positioning (MC_MoveAdditive)

FB name
MC_MoveAdditive
Adds a relative distance to the target position of a positioning process in progress.
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Execute
Distance
BOOL
REAL
MoveVelocity
REAL
Acceleration
DINT
Deceleration
DINT
Jerk
DINT
JerkDecel
DINT

Relative distance <Value range> (see page Fehler!
Value of maximum speed (always positive) (not necessarily
reached) [Units/s] <value range> (see page Fehler!
definiert.)
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
CommandAborted
Error
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Specified distance has been reached

Positioning aborted
Error during positioning
Note:
In the case of dynamic positioning (module is called during a positioning process)
the specified position is added to the current target position.
MC_MoveAdditive
Execute : BOOL
Distance : REAL
Velocity : REAL
Acceleration : DINT
Deceleration : DINT
Jerk : DINT
JerkDecel : DINT
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
184
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Done : BOOL
Error : BOOL
Parker EME
Motion control
The following illustration shows two examples of the combination of a

MC_MoveAbsolute and an MC_MoveAddititve module.
module is executed after the first function module.
After the first function module has traveled to Position 60, the "Done" output gives
the execution command to the second FB, which then moves on another 40 units
module is activated while the first FB is being executed. Because the second
module is started during the execution of the first FB, the first FB is automatically
interrupted.
The second function module adds the missing units that are still lacking for the
first module and the moves an additional 40 units with the new predefined
settings.
1. Instanz
First motion
2. Instanz
Second motion
MC_MoveAbsolute
MC_MoveAdditive
Execute
Done
60. 0
Position
Command
Aborted
40. 0
300. 0
Velocity
Error
200. 0
go
Acceleration
100
Acceleration
Deceleration
100
Deceleration
1000
Jerk
1000
Jerk
1000
JerkDecel
1000
JerkDecel
Axis
AXIS_REF_
LocalAxis
Done
Axis
1
0
1
0
1
0
2. Instanz
Second motion
Execute (Test)
Error
Test
CommandAborted
Done
Command
Aborted
Velocity
100
1. Instanz
First motion
Done
Distance
100
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Execute (go)
Execute
OR
1
0
1
0
Bewegungsablauf
Moving diagram
300
Velocity
200
0
100
Position
60
192-121101 N04 June 2008
185
Motion control
5.6.5.
C3F_T30
Continuous positioning (MC_MoveVelocity)

FB name
MC_MoveVelocity
Continuous controlled positioning with adjustable speed
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Execute
MoveVelocity
BOOL
REAL
Acceleration
DINT
Direction
INT

Value of maximum speed (always positive) (not necessarily
reached) [Units/s]
Value range: 0 rev/s ... 2000 rev/s
Value of the acceleration and deceleration (always positive)
[Units/s]
Value range: 0.24 rev/s ... 1000000 rev/s
Selection: positive direction, negative direction, current
direction; library constants (see page 159)
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
InVelocity
CommandAborted
Error
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Specified target speed on the setpoint output is reached

Execution interrupted
Error during positioning
Note:
To be able to stop the drive, the function module must be interrupted by another
positioning function module or positioning must be stopped by calling the
MC_Stop function module.
A positioning to the end limit follows.
MC_MoveVelocity
Execute : BOOL
Velocity : REAL
Acceleration : DINT
Direction : INT
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
186
192-121101 N04 June 2008
InVelocity : BOOL
Error : BOOL
Parker EME
Motion control
Example
MC_MoveVelocity modules.
module is executed after the first function module.
After the first function module has accelerated to a speed of 3000, the
"InVelocity" output, AND-linked with the "Next" signal gives the execution
command to the second FB, which then slows to a speed of 2000.
The right part (b) of the diagram shows a case in which the second FB is
activated while the first function module is being executed. Because the second
module is started during the execution of the first FB, the first FB is automatically
interrupted.
During the acceleration of the first module, the second module slows again
similarly to a speed of 2000 without the speed of the first module having been
reached.
1. Instanz
First motion
2. Instanz
Second motion
MC_MoveVelocity
MC_MoveVelocity
Test
go
3000
Run
InVelocity
Velocity
Command
Aborted
Acceleration
100
&
Error
100
AXIS_REF_
LocalAxis
Axis
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
2000
"MC_Direction_
Positive"
Direction
"MC_Direction_Positive"
OR
Run
InVelocity
Velocity
Command
Aborted
Acceleration
Finish
Error
Direction
Axis
Next
1. Instanz
First motion
Execute (go)
Velocity
Command Aborted
Next
a
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
2. Instanz
Second motion
Test
Finish = InVelocity
Bewegung
Motion
1
0
1
0
3000
2000
Velocity
0
192-121101 N04 June 2008
187
Motion control
5.6.6.
C3F_T30
Manual operation (C3_Jog)

FB name
C3_Jog
Traveling along the axis in manual mode (in the "standstill" state)
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
JogForward
BOOL
JogBackward
BOOL
Velocity
REAL
Acceleration
DINT
Deceleration
DINT
Jerk
DINT
JogForward = TRUE makes the axis move in positive

direction.
JogBackward = TRUE makes the axis move in negative
direction. <Value range> (see page Fehler! Textmarke
nicht definiert.)
Speed value [Units/s] <value range> (see page Fehler!
Value of the acceleration [Units/s] <value range> (see
Value of deceleration during stop[Units/s] <value range>
(see page Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.)
Value of the acceleration and deceleration jerk (see page
181) [Units/s] <value range> (see page Fehler!
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
Busy
Error
BOOL
BOOL
Module is active (manual operation in progress)

Error during manual operation or faulty parameter when
starting manual operation
Note:
The axis must be in the "standstill" state in order to start manual operation
(Jogging Mode).
Start: When starting manual operation, the output Busy is set to TRUE.
Stop: The axis is brought to a standstill if the respective input (JogForward or
JogBackward) is set to FALSE again
As soon as manual operation is stopped, the output Busy is set to FALSE.
Further commands can only be executed after this feedback.
C3_Jog
JogForward : BOOL
Busy : BOOL
JogBackward : BOOL
Error : BOOL
Velocity : REAL
Acceleration : DINT
Deceleration : DINT
Jerk : DINT
Axis : INT (VAR_IN_OUT)
188
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Axis : INT (VAR_IN_OUT)
Parker EME
Motion control
Example: Manual movement via digital inputs.
C3_INPUT
I0:
I1:
I2:
I3:
I4:
I5:
I6:
I7:
C3_Jog
20
JogForward
Busy
JogBackward
Error
Velocity
Axis
100
Acceleration
100
Deceleration
1000
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Jerk
Axis
MC_POWER
Enable
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Axis
Status
Error
Axis
192-121101 N04 June 2008
189
Motion control
5.6.7.
C3F_T30
Homing (MC_Home)
FB name
MC_Home
Predefined search for the machine reference point
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
BOOL
REAL

Position on the machine zero point (configured unit [units] )
= Machine zero Offset
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Referencing process completed

Referencing process aborted
Error while searching for machine reference point
VAR_INPUT
Execute
Position
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
CommandAborted
Error
Note:
This module gives the command to search for the machine reference point; not for
"zero" position. The type of search function (machine reference mode) can be
adjusted with the configuration or with the object "HOMING_mode" (Object
1130.4).
.
Objects that are connected with the machine reference point:
C3Plus.HOMING_speed (Object 1130.3)
C3Plus.HOMING_accel (Object 1130.1)
C3Plus.HOMING_mode (Object 1130.4)
C3Plus.HOMING_edge_sensor_distance (Object 1130.7)
MC_Home
Execute : BOOL
Position : REAL
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
190
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Done : BOOL
Error : BOOL
Parker EME
Motion control
The Compax3 machine zero modes are adapted to the CANopen profile for Motion
Control CiADS402.
Position reference
point
Essentially, you can select between operation with or without machine reference.
The reference point for positioning is determined by using the machine reference
and the machine reference offset.

In a homing run the drive normally moves to the position value 0 immediately after
finding the home switch. The position value 0 is defined via the homing offset.
A machine reference run is required each time after turning on the system for
operation with machine reference.
Please note:
During homing run the software end limits are not monitored.
Machine reference offset

1
1: machine zero point

The machine reference offset is used to determine the actual reference point for
positioning.
The rule for this is: Machine zero point = - Machine zero Offset
A change in the machine reference offset does not take effect until the next
machine reference run.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
191
Motion control
C3F_T30
Please note:
In controlled operation (open loop) no machine zero run is possible!
The home of the auxiliary axis is automatically set, by coupling the auxiliary
axis to the main axis for the homing run!
Homing run for 2 axes
Axis 2 is coupled to axis 1 and moves along
Axis 1 and axis 2 set the home at the same time after axis 1 has detected the
homing switch
Therefore you should bring the auxiliary axis to a defined start position before the
homing run.
Or use absolute feedback systems:

Absolute feedback
system

not necessary.
192
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.6.8.
Motion control
Electronic gearbox (MC_GearIn)

FB name
MC_GearIn
Controlled speed and position synchronicity with adjustable transmission ratio
VAR_IN_OUT
Master
Constant for the master signal source (see page 159)

Configuration (see page 80) of the signal sources
INT
Please note:
The auxiliary axis can only be coupled to the position
setpoint value of the main axis => if Slave = auxiliary
axis, the main axis must be the Master.
The reduction ratio is then fixed to 1:1.
Slave
INT
VAR_INPUT
Execute
RatioNumerator
BOOL
REAL
RatioDenominator
INT
Acceleration
DINT

Reduction ratio numerator
Field is only valid, if Slave=AXIS_REF_LocalAxis (main
axis).
Reduction ratio denominator
Field is only valid, if Slave=AXIS_REF_LocalAxis (main
axis).
Value of acceleration / deceleration (always positive) until
the synchronism is reached [Units/s] <value range> (see
VAR_OUTPUT
InGear
CommandAborted
Error
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Synchronicity achieved
Command aborted
Note:
Behaviour: the drive accelerates (with Acceleration) until the master speed is
reached - the module will report synchronicity with "InGear". Position losses
during acceleration to master speed are not made up.
The transmission ratio can be changed at any time with a positive edge on
Execute. InGear is reset until synchronicity is achieved again.
For example, if speed synchronicity is not achieved because of limiting effects,
the position difference that arises will be made up (by the active position
controller).
Acceleration / deceleration to the set transmission ratio takes place without a jerk
limit.
If the master and slave units do not correspond, this fact must be considered for
the transmission ratio.
Example (see page 81)

MC_GearIn
Master : AXIS_REF
Master : AXIS_REF
Slave : AXIS_REF
Slave : AXIS_REF
Execute : BOOL
InGear : BOOL
RatioNumerator : REAL
RatioDenominator : INT
Error : BOOL
Acceleration : DINT
192-121101 N04 June 2008
193
Motion control
C3F_T30
Structure of the "electronic cam" function

MC_GearIn
Master
RatioNumerator
RatioDenominator
Direction
Source
-1 / +1
MD
Gearing
1/SD
numerator
denominator
MD
1141.7 C3.Gear_actual_masterposition
1141.8 C3.Gear_actual_master_speed
Gearing structure
D: / E: additional structure (see page 100)
Note:
Direction -1 / +1: with direction reversal (under configuration of signal sources)

factor -1 is applied.
The "virtual master" source is not available with Compax3 T30.
194
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
Example:
1. Instanz
First motion
MC_GearIn
MyMaster
MySlave
Master
Master
Slave
Slave
Execute
InGear
Command
Aborted
100
RatioNumerator
100
RatioDenominator
100
Acceleration
2. Instanz
Second motion
Error
MC_GearIn
Master
Master
Slave
Slave
Execute
InGear
Command
Aborted
100
RatioNumerator
100
RatioDenominator
100
Acceleration
Error
1. Instanz
First motion
First Execute
First InGear
1
0
Ratio reached
2. Instanz
Second motion
Second Execute
1
0
1
SecondInGear
0
Ratio reached
Bewegungsablauf
motion
MySlave Velocity
0
192-121101 N04 June 2008
195
Motion control
5.7
C3F_T30
Superimposed motion
Dynamic positioning .........................................................................................................196
Superimposed positioning (MC_MoveSuperImposed).....................................................197
Zero point shift caused by superimposed positioning (C3_ShiftPosition) ........................199
5.7.1.
Dynamic positioning
Dynamic positioning processes can be performed with the modules
MC_MoveAbsolute, MC_MoveRelative and MC_MoveAdditive. The speed can be
altered dynamically with MC_MoveVelocity.
In the state: Discrete Motion

If another, second positioning process is activated in the "Discrete Motion" state,
the 1st positioning process will be interrupted. The transition to the new destination
occurs dynamically, i.e. without any intervening stop.
In "Continuous Motion" state

If a positioning process (MC_MoveAbsolute, MC_MoveRelative or
MC_MoveAdditive) or a MC_MoveVelocity is activated in the "Continuous Motion"
state, the active function module will then be interrupted. All input variables of the
new positioning process will then be taken over.
Superimposed positioning
Please note also the difference to superimposed positioning (see page 197) with
MC_MoveSuperImposed.
Here, the movement of the active function module is executed until the end.
196
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.7.2.
Motion control
Superimposed positioning (MC_MoveSuperImposed)

FB name
MC_MoveSuperImposed
Superimposing of an active positioning with an additional relative distance.
The positioning process that is currently underway is not interrupted by
MC_MoveSuperImposed; it is superimposed instead
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Axis ID; constant: AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Execute
Distance
BOOL
REAL
MoveVelocity
REAL
Acceleration
DINT
Deceleration
DINT
Jerk
DINT
JerkDecel
DINT

Additional distance for superimposed positioning
(configured unit [Units] ) (positive and negative direction)
definiert.)
Value of the maximum speed difference compared to the
speed of the current positioning (always positive) (not
necessarily reached) [units/s] <Value range> (see page
Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.)
Value of acceleration (always positive) [units/s] <value
definiert.)
definiert.)
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Busy
CommandAborted
Error
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Additional distance was added to the current positioning

Superimposed motion is performed
Positioning aborted
Note:
The values Distance, Velocity, Acceleration, Deceleration, Jerk JerkDecel are no
absolute values, they are added to the current movement.
A stop of the axis will interrupt the current as well as the superimposed
movement.
In the PLCopen state "Standstill" the MC_MoveSuperImposed module acts like
the MC_MoveRelative module.
MC_MoveSuperImposed does not interrupt an active command.
Position reached (Object 420.6) is not influenced by the additional movement
triggered by MC_MoveSuperImposed.
This module cannot be operated with C3_ShiftPosition and MC_Phasing at a
time.
The position of the module in the structure image (see page 318).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
197
Motion control
C3F_T30
MC_MoveSuperImposed
Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Distance : REAL
Busy : BOOL
Velocity : REAL
Error : BOOL
Acceleration : DINT
Deceleration : DINT
Jerk : DINT
JerkDecel : DINT
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
1. Instanz
First motion
2. Instanz
Second motion
MC_MoveRelative
Execute
go_REL
Done
Distance
50
300. 0
MC_MoveSuperimp
go_SUP
Command
Aborted
10
Error
100
Velocity
Execute
Done
Command
Aborted
Distance
Velocity
Error
100
Acceleration
50
Acceleration
100
Deceleration
50
Deceleration
1000
Jerk
1000
Jerk
1000
JerkDecel
1000
JerkDecel
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
AXIS_REF_
LocalAxis
Axis
Axis
1. Instanz
First motion
Execute (go_REL)
Done
1
0
1
0
2. Instanz
Second motion
Execute (go_SUP)
1
0
1
Done
CommandAborted
Bewegungsablauf
Moving diagram
Velocity
t
400
300
200
100
0
Distance
70
50
198
192-121101 N04 June 2008
10
11
12
13
Parker EME
5.7.3.
Motion control
Zero point shift caused by superimposed positioning

(C3_ShiftPosition)
FB name
C3_ShiftPosition
Shifting the reference point, i.e. the zero point of the system is shifted by the stated relative
distance. The drive performs a physical movement which is, however, not displayed.
The positioning being executed at that time is not interrupted by C3_ShiftPosition.
Application: Slave reg synchronization.
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Axis ID; constant: AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Execute
Distance
BOOL
REAL
Velocity
REAL
Acceleration
DINT
Deceleration
DINT
Jerk
DINT
JerkDecel
DINT

Distance of the offset (configured unit [units] ) (positive
and negative direction) <value range> (see page Fehler!
Value of the maximum speed difference (always positive)
(not necessarily reached) [Units/s] <value range> (see
Value of acceleration (always positive) [units/s] <value
definiert.)
definiert.)
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Busy
CommandAborted
Error
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Relative distance was reached

Shift is being executed
Positioning aborted
Note:
The values Distance, Velocity, Acceleration, Deceleration, Jerk JerkDecel are no
absolute values, they are added to the current movement.
In the PLCopen "Standstill" state, the axis performs a relative movement, during
which the axis moves, but the displayed position is not changed.
In the PLCopen "Discrete Motion" state, the speed and the position of the active
movement are superimposed, but the displayed speed and position are not
changed.
In the case of a stop command on the axis, the current movement is interrupted
as well as the shift.
C3_ShiftPosition does not interrupt any active command.
This module cannot be operated with MC_MoveSuperImposed and MC_Phasing
at a time.
The position of the module in the structure image (see page 318).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
199
Motion control
C3F_T30
C3_ShiftPosition
Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Busy : BOOL
Distance : REAL
Velocity : REAL
Error : BOOL
Acceleration : DINT
Deceleration : DINT
Jerk : DINT
JerkDecel : DINT
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
C3_ShiftPosition
go_REL
Execute : BOOL
100
Distance : REAL
Busy : BOOL
50
Velocity : REAL
200
Acceleration : DINT
200
Deceleration : DINT
1000
Jerk : DINT
1000
JerkDecel : DINT
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Done : BOOL
Error : BOOL
Execute (go_REL)
Done
Busy
Anzeige
Readout
Lage
Position
t
1
0
Bewegung
Motion
50
Velocity
0
t
100
relative Position
200
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.8
Motion control
Adjust force / pressure (C3_PressureForceAbsolute)

FB name
Control absolute force or differential pressure (depending on the physical system selected in the
configuration (see page 44).
FA FB
A
= pA B pB = pA pB
AA
AA
Differential pressure:
F = FA FB
Force:
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT

Execute
BOOL
PressureForce
DINT
Gradient
DINT
Starts the sequences of the module with positive

edge
Setpoint differential pressure [mbar, psi] or setpoint
force [N].
Change speed for pressure or force in [bar/s, psi/s],
[N/s].
VAR_INPUT
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
BOOL
CommandAborted
Error
BOOL
BOOL
Specified setpoint value on the setpoint output is

reached
Command aborted
Note:
the axis must be in controlled operation, so that the module becomes active.
After termination of the module, the axis continues to control the differential pressure
or the force.
Executing a MC_Stop module causes the transition to position control. The current
speed of the axis is controlled down to zero and the position reached then is kept with
the aid of the position controller.
The execution of the C3_PressureForceStop is required, if no position control is
configured. It causes the gradient to be reduced to zero and the axis to remain force
or pressure controlled.
Execute : BOOL
PressureForce : DINT
Gradient : DINT
Axis : INT
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Done : BOOL
Error : BOOL
201
Motion control
5.9
C3F_T30
Dynamic switching: Position- on force/pressure adjustment

Switching: from force to position mode (C3_pQ)..............................................................203
Compax3F supports the so-called pQ operating mode. This function permits

condition-dependent switching between position control (pQ mode) and force (for
example differential pressure) control and back.
This function can only be executed in connection with the main axis.
The following boundary conditions are to be taken into consideration:
The output control operation for the PQ function is alwayss a position control
(state "Discrete Motion" or "Standstill: powered").
The defined switching condition is therefore valid for the switching from the
position control to force/pressure control.
The condition for the switching from force control back to position control is
(current speed>=calculated setpoint speed).
If the countercheck is lost (actual speed> setpoint speed), the drive will return into
position control into the motion profile programmed before.
The configuration and activation of the pQ operating mode is made via an IEC
module.
After the activation of the C3_pQ module, the C3_PressureForceAbsolute module
can no longer be activated.
The setpoint value for the force/pressure controller is read from an object, which
is indicated via a pointer.
The deactivation of the module and consequently of the pQ operating mode can
be initiated with the negative edge at the enable input.
The deactivation itself is only possible in the "Standstill Powered" state.
If the pQ operating mode is deactivated during a positioning sequence, the
started positioning is finished in pQ mode.
If the drive is in force control at the time of deactivation, a MC_Stop is necessary
in order to switch back to position control.
202
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.9.1.
Motion control
Switching: from force to position mode (C3_pQ)
FB name
C3_pQ
Activate pQ (Volume flow control / position control) Mode depending on the conditions
Switching to pressure / force control: see in this module description

Switching back to position control:
Actual speed > setpoint speed from the motion profile or
Target position from the original positioning reached.
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT

Note: C3_pQ_Force is only possible for the main axis
Enable
BOOL
Mode
C3_pQ_MODE
Starts the sequence of the module at positive edge and terminates

the qQ mode at negative edge
Switching conditions from position to pressure/force control:
EVENT_EXTERN
External event: Any object (given by "ExtObjectSource") can be
configured as source (Index.Sub). via an additional mask
(ExtObjMask), an AND-link is established.
ABS_FORCE_PRESSURE_THRESHOLD
Controller-Actual-Pressure/Force > Value
"PressureForceThreshold"
ABS_FORCE_PRESSURE_GRADIENT
Pressure/Force-Gradient > Value
"PressureForceGradientThreshold".
The gradient exceeds the parameterized value.
ABS_ACTUALPOS_THRESHOLD
Value of the actual position > parameterized position value
"PosThreshold" AND
Value of the actual position <parameterized position value
"PosThreshold" + PosWindow
ABS_DEMANDPOS_THRESHOLD
VAR_INPUT
Value of the setpoint position > parameterized position value

"PosThreshold" AND
Value of the setpoint position < parameterized position value
"PosThreshold" + PosWindow
PressureForceSetpointSource
DWORD
PressureForceThreshold
DINT
PressureForceGradientThresh
old
DINT
GradientFilterTimeConstant
INT
ExtObjectSource
DWORD
Pointer to the source of the setpoint value of the pressure/force

controller
Note: The source must have the type INT or DINT
The pressure/force threshold in [mbar], [psi] or [N] at which the
switching to pressure/force control takes place.
Note: This parameter is only relevant in the
Mode=ABS_FORCE_PRESSURE_THRESHOLD.
The pressure/force change threshold in [mbar], [psi] or [N] at which
the switching to pressure/force control takes place.
Mode=ABS_FORCE_PRESSURE_GRADIENT.
The filter time constant in [s] of the filter at which the
pressure/force gradient is filtered.
Pointer to any object that is intended to be the source of the
external exent.
Mode=EVENT_EXTERN.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
203
Motion control
C3F_T30
ExtObjMask
WORD
PosThreshold
PosWindows
REAL
REAL
Bit mask for the relevant bits in "ExtObjectSource". The contents of

the ExtObjectSource is AND-linked with the aid of this bit mask.
Mode=EVENT_EXTERN.
Position threshold for switching to pressure/force controller
Position window in Units, measured from the position threshold
(PosThreshold).
In this window, the monitoring of the switching condition to
force/pressure control is active.
If the position exceeds the value: PosThreshold + PosWindows,
then the monitoring of the switching condition to force/pressure
control is not active.
The window should be defined as small as possible.
Within this window, the actual speed caused by the pressure/force
control must be below the setpoint speed, unless the axis will
switch back to position control.
VAR_OUTPUT
IsActive
BOOL
F_IsActive
BOOL
Q_IsActive
BOOL
Error
BOOL
FALSE: pQ Mode not active

Shows that the pressure/force control is activated.
Note: Is only updated if the Enable input provides TRUE
Shows, that the volume flow control (pQ: Position control) is
activated.
Note: Is only updated if the Enable input provides TRUE
ErrorID
INT
Error description
TRUE: pQ Mode aktive
0: No Error
1: Mode EVENT_EXTERN => source "ExtObjectSource" is missing
2: Invalid MODE set
3: No source entered for the pressure/force controller setpoint
4: Activation of the PQ module is not permitted in this mode
5: pQ mode with mere pressure/force control axis is not possible.
6: The axis ID does not correspond the the ID of the main axis
Note:
The switching conditions are monitored until the target position of the current positioning sequence is
reached; this is not valid in the "ABS_ACTUALPOS_THRESHOLD" and
"ABS_DEMANDPOS_THRESHOLD" modes.
C3_pQ
Enable : BOOL
Mode : C3_pQ_Mode
PressureForceSetpointSource : DWORD
PressureForceThreshold : DINT
PressureForceGradientThreshold : DINT
GradientFilterTimeConstant : INT
ExtObjectSource : DWORD
ExtObjMask : WORD
PosThreshold : REAL
PosWindow : REAL
Axis : INT (VAR:IN_OUT)
204
192-121101 N04 June 2008
IsActive : BOOL
F_IsActive : BOOL
Q_IsActive : BOOL
Error : BOOL
ErrorID : INT
Parker EME
5.10
Motion control
Error handling
Acknowledging errors (MC_Reset)...................................................................................205
Reading axis errors (MC_ReadAxisError) ........................................................................206
Set error reaction (C3_SetErrorReaction) ........................................................................207
5.10.1. Acknowledging errors (MC_Reset)

FB name
MC_Reset
Acknowledges errors (transition from "Errorstop" status to "Standstill" status).
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
BOOL
Activates the module if there is a positive edge
Done
BOOL
Error
ErrorID
BOOL
WORD
Error successfully acknowledged, axis is in the "Standstill"

state again
Acknowledge failed /not possible
Error description, according to error history
VAR_INPUT
Execute
VAR_OUTPUT
Note:
After the error is successfully acknowledged, the power must be supplied to the
power output stage again by a rising edge on the enable input of the MC_Power
power module.
C3 powerPLmC Note: This module is also available as group function block. You
can then trigger this function for the entire Compax3 group.
MC_Reset
Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
Error : BOOL
ErrorID : WORD
192-121101 N04 June 2008
205
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.10.2. Reading axis errors (MC_ReadAxisError)

FB name
MC_ReadAxisError
This function module displays axis errors.
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
BOOL
Activates the module
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
Output values available

Compax3 in error state
Current error description
VAR_INPUT
Enable
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Error
ErrorID
Note: MC_ReadAxisError
Enable : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Axis : (VAR_IN_OUT)
Error : BOOL
ErrorID : WORD
206
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
5.10.3. Set error reaction (C3_SetErrorReaction)

FB name
C3_SetErrorReaction
This module is used to define the error reaction.
Note: The error reaction cannot be changed for errors with standard reaction 5 (switch
immediately to currentless (without ramp), close brake).
VAR_INPUT
Execute
ErrorID
BOOL
WORD
Reaction
INT
The defined error reaction is set for the selected error

Error number [hexadecimal] for which the error
reaction should be set, e.g. 0x6281
Error response:
0: no reaction, error is deactivated.
1: Downramp actual speed; remain in position control
state
2: Downramp the actual speed; then switch off
controller
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Error
BOOL
BOOL
The defined error reaction was set

Note:
Error list
The error reaction settings from the configuration wizard are overwritten.
The setting of the error mask is made internally via a C3 object. If the objects are
saved permanently, the setting is memorised after Power off.
Please note:
The C3_ErrorMask overwrites (depending on the calling-up order) the settings.

The corresponding error reaction is valid for both axes (of Compax3F) as the case
may be.
The module will overwrite the settings made via the C3 ServoManager.
If the ErrorID has an invalid erorr number, no change is effected.
C3_SetErrorReaction
Execute : BOOL
ErrorID : WORD
Reaction : INT
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Done : BOOL
Error: BOOL
207
Motion control
5.11
C3F_T30
Process image
Reading digital inputs (C3_Input) .....................................................................................208
Write digital outputs (C3_Output) .....................................................................................208
Reading/writing optional inputs/outputs............................................................................209
Memorizing the signals with the trigger event (C3_TouchProbe).....................................211
Integration of Parker I/Os (PIOs) ......................................................................................214
5.11.1. Reading digital inputs (C3_Input)

FB name
C3_Input
Used to generate a process image of the digital inputs.
VAR_INPUT
I0 ... I7
BOOL
Displays the logic status of the respective input (with low

active inputs, the physical statuses are negated).
Notes: the module should always be brought up at the beginning of the processing
cycle.
C3_I nput
I0: BOOL
I1: BOOL
I2: BOOL
I3: BOOL
I4: BOOL
I5: BOOL
I6: BOOL
I7: BOOL
5.11.2. Write digital outputs (C3_Output)

FB name
C3_Output
Used to generate a process image of the digital outputs.
VAR_OUTPUT
O0 ... O3
BOOL
Displays the status of the respective output.
Notes: the module should always be brought up at the end of the processing cycle.
C3_O utput
O0: BOOL
O1: BOOL
O2 : BOOL
O3 : BOOL
208
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
5.11.3. Reading/writing optional inputs/outputs

C3_IOAddition_0 ..............................................................................................................209
C3_IOAddition_1 ..............................................................................................................209
C3_IOAddition_2 ..............................................................................................................210
5.11.3.1
C3_IOAddition_0
FB name
C3_IOAddition_0
Is used to create a process image of the optional digital inputs/outputs.
VAR_INPUT
I0 ... I3
O0 ... O3
BOOL
BOOL
Displays the status of the respective input.

Please note that the group of 4 may be assigned as inputs or as outputs (see
page 352). You may only use either inputs or outputs exclusively.
Notes: The module should always be brought up at the beginning (inputs) or end
(outputs) of the processing cycle.
C3_IOAddition_0
5.11.3.2
OutputEnable : BOOL
I0 : BOOL
O0 : BOOL
I1 : BOOL
O1 : BOOL
I2 : BOOL
O2 : BOOL
I3 : BOOL
O3 : BOOL
Error : BOOL
C3_IOAddition_1
FB name
C3_IOAddition_1
VAR_INPUT
I4 ... I7
O4 ... O7
BOOL
BOOL

cycle.
C3_IOAddition_1
OutputEnable : BOOL
I4 : BOOL
O4 : BOOL
I5 : BOOL
O5 : BOOL
I6 : BOOL
O6 : BOOL
I7 : BOOL
O7 : BOOL
Error : BOOL
192-121101 N04 June 2008
209
Motion control
5.11.3.3
C3F_T30
C3_IOAddition_2
FB name
C3_IOAddition_2
VAR_INPUT
I8 ... I11
O8 ... O11
BOOL
BOOL

cycle.
C3_IOAddition_2
210
OutputEnable : BOOL
I8 : BOOL
O8 : BOOL
I9 : BOOL
O9 : BOOL
I10 : BOOL
O10 : BOOL
I11 : BOOL
O11 : BOOL
Error : BOOL
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
5.11.4. Memorizing the signals with the trigger event (C3_TouchProbe)

FB name
C3_TouchProbe
Memorizing signals / objects with the trigger event
- replaces the MC_TouchProbe module -
VAR_IN_OUT
Axis
INT
Execute
SignalSource
BOOL
Pointer
FallingEdge
BOOL
TriggerInput
INT
ExpectedValue
REAL
Activates the module if there is a rising edge

Selects the signal to be scanned.
The<address opertor>must be used imperatively.
The signal scanned must be in the REAL or the INT
format.
If TRUE, it is triggered in the falling edge.
The logical status after a possible input inversion is
respected.
Selects the trigger input.
Constant TouchProbeInputx (see note)
Value at which the trigger event is expected.
Tolerance
REAL
StartIgnore
REAL
StopIgnore
REAL
EnableIgnoreZone
Abort
BOOL
BOOL
VAR_INPUT
Tolerance interval around ExpectedValue, where the

trigger event is accepted (always positive) (with
reference to the signal source).
The beginning of the range in which the trigger event
will not be acknowledged with Done or Error (with
reference to the signal source).
The end of the range in which the trigger event will not
be acknowledged with Done or Error (with reference to
the signal source).
Activate IgnoreZone.
Deactivate module.
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
BOOL
RecordedSignal_ Real REAL
RecordedSignal_ INT
INT
Busy
BOOL
Error
BOOL
Trigger event occurred within the tolerance interval and

the signal was detected.
Value scanned at the time of the trigger event, if the
source is available in the coDeSys "REAL format.
Please respect the format information of the signal
source (SignalSource)
Value scanned at the time of the trigger event, if the
source is available in the coDeSys "INT" format.
Please respect the format information of the signal
source (SignalSource)
Module active and no scanning signal occurred outside
the IgnoreZone.
Error while executing module.
Note:
Temporal precision of signal recording: <1s
TriggerInput Trigger-input:
via the constants "TouchProbeInput0" ... "TouchProbeInput7" (X12/6 - X12/14)
the trigger signal input is selected.
Attention!
Max. one entity of the module can be active as the hardware resources are
only available once!
Several entities being activated one after the other are permitted.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
211
Motion control
C3F_T30
C3_TouchProbe
Done : BOOL
Execute : BOOL
Abort : BOOL
RecordedSignal_Real : REAL
TriggerInput : INT
RecordedSignal_INT : INT
Error : BOOL
FallingEdge : BOOL
Busy : BOOL
ExpectedValue : REAL
Tolerance : REAL
StartIgnore : REAL
StopIgnore : REAL
EnableIgnoreZone : BOOL
SignalSource : Pointer
Axis : (Var_IN_OUT)
Example: Scanning the actual position, triggered via Input I0

Probe
C3_TouchProbe
inp.I1
inp.I7
TouchProbeInput0
FALSE
500
100
100
300
TRUE
ADR(C3.StatusPosition_Actual)
AXIS_REF_LocalAxis
Execute : BOOL
Abort : BOOL
TriggerInput : INT
FallingEdge : BOOL
ExpectedValue : REAL
Done : BOOL
RecordedSignal_Real : REAL
RecordedSignal_INT : INT
Error : BOOL
Busy : BOOL
Tolerance : REAL
StartIgnore : REAL
StopIgnore : REAL
EnableIgnoreZone : BOOL
SignalSource : Pointer
Axis : (Var_IN_OUT)
Sampling Points
Execute
TRUE
FALSE
Busy
TRUE
FALSE
Triggerinput
Signal
Done
TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
t
Error
TRUE
FALSE
t
RecordedSignal
4
Axis Signal
+ Tolerance
1
3
ExpectedValue
- Tolerance
StopIgnore
2
StartIgnore
212
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
1: Area whrere a module error is generated.

2: Ignore Zone: Area whrere no module error and no Done is generated.
The ranges 2 and 3 may not overlap. If they do, the ignore zone in range 3 is
not effective.
3: ExpectedValueZone: Trigger signal in the permissible value range; this is
confirmed with Done=TRUE.
4: RecordedSignal; is updated with every active edge of the TriggerInput signal
upon Execute = TRUE.
If the value of the signal (SignalSource) during the Trigger event is in the
permissible value range between (ExpectedValue - Tolerance) and
(ExpectedValue + Tolerance), this is confirmed with Done = TRUE; the
RecordedSignal ist updated.
If the value of the signal (SignalSource) during the Trigger Event is between
StartIgnore and StopIgnore (Ignore zone), the module will report neither error nor
Done, the RecordedSignal is however updated.
If the value of the signal (SignalSource) during the Trigger Event is outside the
permissible value range and outside the zone between StartIgnore and
StopIgnore (Ignore zone), the module will report an error, the RecordesSignal is
updated.
Within this range, the signals are read in with a temporal exactitude of <1s
(determined by linear interpolation).
If a Trigger Signal occurs at Execute = False, the RecordedSignal is not
updated.
If no Trigger Signal comes up, Busy remains active until the module is reset to
the original state with Abort.
More examples with C3_Touchprobe (example 7 and example 8).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
213
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.11.5. Integration of Parker I/Os (PIOs)

Initializing the PIOs (PIO_Init) ..........................................................................................214
Reading the PIO inputs 0-15 (PIO_Inputx...y) ..................................................................215
Writing the PIO outputs 0-15 (PIO_Outputx...y) ...............................................................216
Example: Compax3 as CANopen Master with PIOs ........................................................217
In order to integrate PIOs via CANopen, the CANopen operating mode "Master for
PIOs (see page 273, see page 272)" must be configured.
5.11.5.1
Initializing the PIOs (PIO_Init)

FB name
PIO_Init
Initialization of the PIOs
VAR_IN_OUT
Device
INT
PIO - ID (Address)
BOOL
Activates the module if there is a positive edge
Done
Error
ErrorCode
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
AbortCode
DWORD
Initialization executed
An error occurred during initialization
1 = no Parker device
Additional errors can be found in the error list.
SDO abort code (see page 288)
VAR_INPUT
Execute
VAR_OUTPUT
Note: Please execute this module at the beginning of the IEC program.
PIO_Init
Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Device : INT
Error : BOOL
ErrorCode : WORD
AbortCode : DWORD
214
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.11.5.2
Motion control
Reading the PIO inputs 0-15 (PIO_Inputx...y)

FB name
PIO_Input0_15
Is used for reading the respective inputs
VAR_INPUT
I0 ... I15
BOOL
Note: For the additional inputs, the following modules are available
PIO_Input16_31
PIO_Input32_47and
PIO_Input48_63.
Please execute this module at the beginning of the IEC program (After PIO_INIT).
PIO_Input0_15
I0: BOOL
I1: BOOL
I2: BOOL
I3: BOOL
I4: BOOL
I5: BOOL
I6: BOOL
I7: BOOL
I8: BOOL
I9: BOOL
I10: BOOL
I11: BOOL
I12: BOOL
I13: BOOL
I14: BOOL
I15: BOOL
192-121101 N04 June 2008
215
Motion control
5.11.5.3
C3F_T30
Writing the PIO outputs 0-15 (PIO_Outputx...y)

FB name
PIO_Output0_15
Is used for writing on the respective outputs
VAR_INPUT
O0 ... O15
BOOL
Note: For the additional outputs, the following modules are available
PIO_Output16_31
PIO_Output32_47and
PIO_Output48_63.
Please execute this module at the end of the IEC program.
PIO_Output0_15
O0 : BOOL
O1 : BOOL
O2 : BOOL
O3 : BOOL
O4 : BOOL
O5 : BOOL
O6 : BOOL
O7 : BOOL
O8 : BOOL
O9 : BOOL
O10 : BOOL
O11 : BOOL
O12 : BOOL
O13 : BOOL
O14 : BOOL
O15 : BOOL
216
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.11.5.4
Motion control
Example: Compax3 as CANopen Master with PIOs

Compax3 control via PIOs.
Cofiguration of the PIO connection with the C3 ServoManager.
Initializing the PIO connection with the PIO_Init module
Control of Compax3 via the digital PIOs and
setpoint assignment via the analog PIOs
Related programs:
..\Examples\C3_mit_PIOs\T30_MasterPIO_ID2.C3P
..\Examples\C3_mit_PIOs\C3_PIO_CONNECTION_TEST.pro
Test setup:
A PIO-347 for CANopen with:

1 PIO-602 (24V DC feed)
2 PIO-402 (8 digital inputs) for operation wired to a switch box
6 PIO-504 (24 digital outputs)
1 PIO-468 (4 analog inputs)
1 PIO-550 (2 analog outputs) analog output 0 is wired with analog input 0 for
setpoint definition
1 PIO-600 (Bus terminal)
a 24V power supply unit
a C3 S025 F10 I21 T30 M11 with power- and 24V-cable
a motor SMH 60 60 1,4...4 with motor- and resolver cable
a CAN-bus cable for the connection of the Compax3 with the PIO coupler.
a serial cable for the connection of the Compax3 with the PC
a switch box for the operation of the 8 digital inputs of the PIOs.
Settings:
Baud rate = 1Mbit

Node address of the PIO = 5 (setting via the address switch on the device)
Node address of the C3 = 2 (setting via the address switch on the device)
Control interface:
Digital
Function
input
0
Energize axis
1
Travel to MN (home)
2
Start MoveVelocity
3
Stop
4
JOG +
5
JOG 6
Free
7
Error reset
Analog input
0
Setpoint speed
Digital
Function
output
0
Axis is energized
1
MN (home) is accessed
2
Setpoitn speed reached
3
Stop is present
4
Manual function active
5
MoveVelocity aborted
6
Global module error display
7
Error is present
Analog output
Setpoint speed specification
Additional Compax3 settings:

Array_Col03_Row01=1; activates the PIO_Init module
Array_Col03_Row02=5; address of the PIO
Array_Col03_Row03=10; Specification for analog output0 => setpoint speed
specification
If these values are stored in the Compax3, the PIO will be automatically initialized
after Power On and started for PDO data exchange with Compax3.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
217
Motion control
C3F_T30
Solution:
218
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.12
Motion control
Interface to C3 powerPLmC
Interface module "PLmC_Interface" ................................................................................220
Cyclic data channel for C3T30 and C3T40 ......................................................................222
Example: C3 powerPLmC Program & Compax3 Program...............................................224
192-121101 N04 June 2008
219
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.12.1. Interface module "PLmC_Interface"

The interface between a central IEC61131-3 user program on C3 powerPLmC and
a local IEC61131-3 user program on a Compax3 servo axis T30 or T40 is created
with the program module "PLmC_interface".
The " PLmC_Interface" module must be called up in each Compax3 T30

which is operated as a slave on a C3 powerPLmC.
With Compax3 T40 this is only necessary, if the slave axis is programmed
directly (not with operating mode: "Slave on C3 powerPLmC (Cam programming
on C3 powerPLmC)")
The call-up must take place cyclically!
The module can be found in the "C3_PLmC_interface.lib" library, which must be
integrated manually via the library manager, if required.
FB name
PLmC_Interface
Interface module for the control of C3 powerPLmC
VAR_OUTPUT
O0
O1
O2
O3
LocalEnable
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Event1 ... Event8
Status of the digital output O0 on the C3 powerPLmC side

Enable for the local IEC61131-3 program
LocalEnable switches to FALSE for one cycle, if a
command for this axis is activated on the C3 powerPLmC.
This helps to avoid that the axis will receive different
commands at a time.
Reserved
EventParameter
Reserved
Note:
The execution of all local motion functions should be coupled with the
LocalEnable output.
Via the outputs O0...O3, the outputs set by C3 powerPLmC can be set out via the
physical outputs with the aid of C3_Output.
Recipe array line

17... 32 assigned
220
Please note that the last 16 lines of the recipe array (C3Array.ColXX_Row17 to
C3Array.ColXX_Row32) are reserved for the communucation with C3 powerPLmC.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
PLmC_Interface
192-121101 N04 June 2008
221
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.12.2. Cyclic data channel for C3T30 and C3T40

An additional communication channel (besides the one established by the Drive
Interface which is not freely assignable) can be established between the programs
of the C3 powerPLmC and a Compax3 axis via a freely usable cyclic data channel.
To do this, the assignment of the channel is defined on the side of the C3
powerPLmC in the controller configuration for the respective axis. The assignment
is always bidirectional.
The following options are available for the communication between the two
programs.
2x INT:
Assignment of the cyclic channel with 2 INT variables
Mapping to Compax3 objects
C3.PLmCToC3_INT1 / C3.PLmCToC3_INT2
C3.C3ToPLmC_INT1 / C3.C3ToPLmC_INT2
from PLmC to Compax3

from Compax3 to PLmC
Mapping to power PLmC variables

"Axis name".PLmCToC3_INT1
"Axis name".PLmCToC3_INT2
"Axis name".C3ToPLmC_INT1
"Axis name".C3ToPLmC_INT2

1x DINT:
Assignment of the cyclic channel with one DINT variable
C3.PLmCToC3_DINT
C3.C3ToPLmC_DINT


Axis name".PLmCToC3_DINT
"Axis name".C3ToPLmC_DINT

1x REAL:
Assignment of the cyclic channel with one REAL variable
C3.PLmCToC3_REAL
C3.C3ToPLmC_REAL

Note:
"Axis name".PLmCToC3_REAL
"Axis name".C3ToPLmC_REAL
The use of INT or DINT variables is especially suitable for implementing a userdefined control word / status word between C3 powerPLmC IEC61131-3 program
and Compax3 IEC61131-3 program.
Configuration of the data channel
222
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
Note:
If the cyclic data channel is not required, it can also be assigned to the actual
position of the axis. This is then provided by the "MC_ReadActualPosition (see
page 168)" module. Therefore the value must not be continually read via the
acyclic channel if the module is used; this reduces the bus load and the IEC cycle
time.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
223
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.12.3. Example: C3 powerPLmC Program & Compax3 Program

Task:
Implementation of a mark synchronization in a Compaxa3 servo axis.

Control of the program via the C3 powerPLmC via a user-defined control word /
status word.
Main program on Compax3 (module PLC_PRG)

Cyclic call-up of the interface to powerPLmC in the PLC_PRG module
In CFC:
In ST:
224
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
Local Compax3 Program in the LocalProgram module
192-121101 N04 June 2008
225
Motion control
C3F_T30
Program on C3 powerPLmC
226
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
5.13
Motion control
IEC examples
Example in CFC: Using Compax3-specific function modules and Compax3 objects ......227
Example in CFC: Positioning 1.........................................................................................228
Example in CFC: Positioning 2.........................................................................................229
Example in CFC: Positioning with set selection ...............................................................230
Example in CFC: Cycle mode ..........................................................................................231
Example in ST: Cycle mode with a Move module ............................................................232
5.13.1. Example in CFC: Using Compax3-specific function modules

and Compax3 objects
Read in the process image of the digital inputs with the InputStatus module.
Generate a process image of the digital outputs with the OutputStatus module.
Digital input I0, used for counting an external event. The event is only detected as
an event if
The I0 input is at TRUE for at least 0.5 seconds and
The voltage on analog input 0 exceeds the threshold value of 3.5 volts.
When 5 of these events have been counted, the digital output is set to O0. At the
same time, the program prevents additional events on the I0 from being counted.
The counter state can be reset again with Input I1 as soon as it reaches a value
of 5.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
227
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.13.2. Example in CFC: Positioning 1

Input I7 enables the power output stage
Input I0 starts an absolute positioning process with fixed parameters
Input I6 is used to stop the movement
After positioning is complete, there will be a return to Position 0 as soon as Input
I1 has been activated
228
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
5.13.3. Example in CFC: Positioning 2

Input I0 starts an absolute positioning process
If an event (I1) occurs during the positioning, the target position will be moved
back by 20 ("MoveAdditive")
If an event occurs while positioning is not in progress, it has no effect
192-121101 N04 June 2008
229
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.13.4. Example in CFC: Positioning with set selection

The position, speed and ramps can be stored in the array (table) (for example
input with the Compax3 ServoManager)
The desired set can be selected with inputs I1 through I5 (binary coded)
Input I0 starts the positioning (absolute positioning)
Positioning that is in progress can be stopped with Input I6
230
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
5.13.5. Example in CFC: Cycle mode

Example a: Cycle mode
Input I0 starts cyclical positioning. During this process, two positions are
approached in alternation.
Input I6 stops cycle mode
192-121101 N04 June 2008
231
Motion control
C3F_T30
5.13.6. Example in ST: Cycle mode with a Move module

Input I2 enables the power output stage.
Input I0 starts cycle mode. Two positions are approached alternately.
There is a pause of 1 second after the first position is reached.
There is a pause of 1.5 seconds after the second position is reached.
Input I1 stops cycle mode.
232
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
192-121101 N04 June 2008
233
Motion control
5.14
C3F_T30
Profibus: Emulating the ProfiDrive profile

(C3F_ProfiDrive_Statemachine)
The function module can be found in the "C3_Profiles_lib" library and must be
integrated via the library manager before use.
Notes on the use:

The input values coming from the master control via the Profibus can be changed
before they are transmitted to the Statemachine (e.g. I/Os).
In the simplest case, the control word and the motion parameters (which may
come from the Profibus) are manipulated by te IEC program.
If the Statemachine is active, all motions must be executed via the Statemachine.
Motions such as for example MoveAbsolut, MoveRelativ; MoveAdditiv;
MoveVelocity; Gearing, Reg-related positioning are possible. Or with Compax3F:
Force/pressure regulating.
With the "control via PLC" bit (CW1 bit 10 = 1), the Statemachine takes the
control for the drive (is active). This means that no functions concerning the
device status (such as Power, MoveX) by other function/program modules are
permitted. If "no control" is selected (CW1 bit 10 = 0), the device status can be
changed via function/program modules.
The Profidrive Statemachine works independently of hte Profibus. I.e. it can also
be used in connection with other busses.
The Profidrive Statemachine contains states, which cannot be mapped to the
PLCopen status machine.
FB name
C3_ProfiDrive_Statemachine
With the aid of the Profibus function module, the PROFIdrive profile can be
simulated. The profile is described in the help of the Compax3 I20T11 technology
function (set operation is however not possible).
The inputs of the module can be assigned as required.
VAR_IN_OUT
--
--
--
CW1
STWadd
WORD
INT
OperationMode
INT
Position
REAL
Velocity
REAL
VelocityForPosition
VelocityForJog
Acceleration
Deceleration
REAL
REAL
DINT
DINT
Control word according to Profidrive (see below)

additional control word: the following functions
can be triggered in the positioning mode
0: no action
1: NOP (No Operation)
2: Stop
3: Homing
Execution takes place with the "activate motion
order" of CW1. The value must be reset to zero
after the execution!
Operating mode after Profidrive
1: Speed control
2: Positioning
Position setpoint value for all positioning
commands (MoveAbs, MoveRel, MoveAdd,
RegSearch, RegMove preparation)
Setpoint speed in operating mode 1 (speed
control) and for MoveVelocity (not for positioning)
Setpoint travel speed for positioning
Speed for JOG
Commanded acceleration
Setpoint deceleration
VAR_INPUT
234
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
DecelerationForStop
Jerk
Master
RatioNumerator
RatioDenominator
PositionForRegMove
VelocityForRegMove
CStatus1ForRegMove
CStatus2ForRegMove
ShortRampForRegMove
RegMoveMode
IgnoreZoneStart
IgnoreZoneStop
PositionReachedMode
DisablePositiveDirection
DisableNegativeDirection
LimitErrorExtern
Override
CStatus1In
CStatus2In
PressureForce
PressureForce_Gradient
ForceReachedMode
AuxAxis
DINT
DINT
INT
Deceleration for Stop

Setpoint jerk
Source for Gearing
- AXIS_REF_Physical (T30, T40) [e.g. encoder
input X11]
AXIS_REF_HEDA (T30, T40)
AXIS_REF_Virtual (T40)
INT
Numerator for Gearing
INT
Denominator for Gearing
REAL
Position for RegMove, necessary if RegSearch is
executed and registration is detected.
Note: The input is connected to the
PositionOfRegMove output in the simplest case.
REAL
Speed for RegMove, necessary if RegSearch is
executed and registration is detected.
VelocityOfRegMove output in the simplest case.
WORD
- do not use Command status 1 for RegMove end; necessary if
RegSearch is executed and registration is
detected
WORD
reserved!
BOOL
Permits the Compax3 to calculate individual
parameters for the RegMove positioning, if the set
parameters would not reach the target.
INT
reserved!
REAL
Registration mark-related positioning: Beginning
of Registration lock-out zone (StartIgnore)
REAL
Registration mark-related positioning: End of
Registration lock-out zone (StopIgnore)
BOOL
Mode for the generation of the PositionReached
in the status word (CW1.10).
TRUE: link to setpoint value
BOOL
Block for positive direction
BOOL
Block for negative direction
BOOL
reserved!
REAL
reserved!
WORDW reserved!
WORD
reserved!
DINT
Setpoint differential pressure [mbar, psi] or
setpoint force [N].
Description (see page 201)
DINT
Change speed for pressure or force in [bar/s,
psi/s], [N/s].
BOOL
Mode for the generation of the ForceReached in
the status word (SW1.10).
TRUE: Link to setpoint value.
BOOL
Defines, if the auxiliary axis is to be used as a
following axis.
TRUE: Auxiliary axis runs synchronously to the
main axis
VAR_OUTPUT
ZSW1
OperationModeActual
PositionOfRegMove
WORD
INT
REAL
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Status word after Profidrive

Active operating mode
Position transmitted to the RegMove command
(cache memory)
Note: The output is connected to the
PositionForRegMove input in the simplest case.
235
Motion control
C3F_T30
VelocityOfRegMove
REAL
CStatus2OfRegMove
StatusMotor_off
StatusMotor_standstill
WORD
BOOL
BOOL
CStatus1
CStatus2
WORD
WORD
Velocity transmitted to the RegMove command

(cache memory)
VelocityForRegMove output in the simplest case.
reserved!
Motor is currentless (TRUE)
Status motor is energized at standstill (setpoint
value) (TRUE)
reserved!
reserved!
Notes:
You can call up directly the help for the Compax3 Profidrive device (I20T11) via
the help intaller (C3 ServoManager "?" Start C3 ServoManager Help Installer...)
(select and open in the left window).
On the Compax3 DVD you will find an application example with additional
explanations for the use of this module:
C3 DVD directory .....\Examples\Profidrive with T30T40\
236
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Motion control
C3F_ProfiDrive_Statemachine
ZSW1: WORD
STW1: WORD
OperationModeActual: INT
STWadd: INT
PositionOfRegMove: REAL
OperationMode: INT
VelocityOfRegMove: REAL
Position: REAL
CStatus2OfRegMove: WORD
Velocity: REAL
StatusMotor_off: BOOL
VelocityForPosition: REAL
StatusMotor_standstill: BOOL
VelocityForJog: REAL
CStatus1: WORD
Acceleration: DINT
CStatus2: WORD
Deceleration: DINT
DecelerationForStop: DINT
Jerk: DINT
Master: INT
RatioNumerator: INT
RatioDenominator: INT
PositionForRegMove: REAL
VelocityForRegMove: REAL
CStatus1ForRegMove: WORD
CStatus2ForRegMove: WORD
ShortRampForRegMove: BOOL
RegMoveMode: INT
IgnoreZoneStart: REAL
IgnoreZoneStop: REAL
PositionReachedMode: BOOL
DisablePositiveDirection: BOOL
DisableNegativeDirection: BOOL
LimitErrorExtern: BOOL
Override: REAL
CStatus1In: WORDW
CStatus2In: WORD
PressureForce: DINT
PressureForce_gradient: DINT
ForceReachedMode: BOOL
AuxAxis: BOOL
192-121101 N04 June 2008
237
C3F_T30
Communication
6. Communication
Compa3 communication variants .....................................................................................238
COM port protocol ............................................................................................................250
Remote diagnosis via Modem ..........................................................................................255
Profibus ............................................................................................................................259
CANopen - Node Settings ................................................................................................272
DeviceNet .........................................................................................................................291
Ethernet Powerlink ...........................................................................................................294
HEDA Bus ........................................................................................................................296
Here you will find the description of the fieldbus interfaces, which can be configured
in the Compax3 ServoManager under the tree entry "configuring the
communication".
Please note:
6.1
The configuration of the process data (Mapping) is made wizard-guided with the
Compax3 ServoManager.
If you perform the mapping directly via the master, you must go through this
fieldbus wizard once; the Compax3 ServoManager will perform the necessary
initializations.
Compa3 communication variants

PC <-> Compax3 (RS232) ...............................................................................................239
PC <-> Compax3 (RS485) ...............................................................................................240
PC <-> C3M device combination (USB) ...........................................................................241
USB-RS485 Moxa Uport 1130 adapter ...........................................................................242
ETHERNET-RS485 NetCOM 113 adapter.......................................................................243
Modem Westermo TD-36 485 ..........................................................................................245
C3 settings for RS485 two wire operation ........................................................................248
C3 settings for RS485 four wire operation .......................................................................249
Overview of all possible communication modes between Compax3 deviecs and a

PC.
238
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.1.1.
Communication
PC <-> Compax3 (RS232)

PC <-> Compax3 (RS232): Connections to a device
192-121101 N04 June 2008
239
C3F_T30
Communication
6.1.2.

240
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.1.3.
Communication
PC <-> C3M device combination (USB)

PC <-> C3M device combination
192-121101 N04 June 2008
241
C3F_T30
Communication
6.1.4.
USB-RS485 Moxa Uport 1130 adapter
The serial UPort 1130 USB adapter offers a simple and comfortable method of
connecting an RS-422 or RS-485 device to your laptop or PC. The UPort 1130 is
connected to the USB port of your computer and complements your workstation
with a DB9 RS-422/485 serial interface. For simple installation and configuraiton,
Windows drivers are already integrated. The UPort 1130 can be used with new or
legacy serial devices and supports both 2- and 4-wire RS-485. It is especially
suited for mobile, instrumentation and point-of-sale (POS) applications.
Herstellerlink: http://www.moxa.com/product/UPort_1130.htm
http://www.moxa.com/product/UPort_1130.htm
Connection plan for Compax3S:
242
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.1.5.
Communication
ETHERNET-RS485 NetCOM 113 adapter
Herstellerlink: http://www.vscom.de/666.htm (http://www.vscom.de/666.htm)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
243
C3F_T30
Communication
DIP Switch settings NetCom 113 for two-wire operation:

1ON 2ON 3off 4off (Mode: RS485 by ART (2 wire without Echo)
Communication settings C3S/C3M:

Object
810.1
810.2
810.3
810.4
Function
Protocol
Baud rate
NodeAddress
Multicast Address
Connection plan NetCom113<-> C3S:
Connection plan NetCom113<-> C3M X31:
244
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Value
16 (two wire)
115200
1..254
Parker EME
6.1.6.
Communication
Modem Westermo TD-36 485

Modem Westermo TD-36 485 (Remote maintenance C3S /C3M)
DIP_Switch - settings TD-36 (RS485 two wire)

For operation , all settings must be reset to factory settings!
All other settings must be made via the DIP switches.
IMPORTANT: The changes of the DIP switches are only accepted after
POWER ON!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
245
C3F_T30
Communication
S1:
115kB / Direct Mode 8N
S2:
PSTN enable/ RS-422/RS85 enable / 2 Wire /
S3:
S4:
S5:
C3 ServoManager RS485 wizard settings:
download with configuration in RS232 mode!
246
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication

Object
Function
Value
810.1
810.2
810.3
810.4
Protocol
Baud rate
NodeAddress
Multicast Address
16 (two wire)
115200
1..254
Connection plan TD-36 / Compax3 S
Connection plan TD-36 / Compax3 M
192-121101 N04 June 2008
247
C3F_T30
Communication
6.1.7.
C3 settings for RS485 two wire operation

download with configuration in RS232 mode!

Object
810.1
810.2
810.3
810.4
248
Function
Protocol
Baud rate
NodeAddress
Multicast Address
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Value
16 (two wire)
115200
1..254
Parker EME
6.1.8.
Communication
C3 settings for RS485 four wire operation

download with configuration in RS232 mode

Object
810.1
810.2
810.3
810.4
Function
Protocol
Baud rate
NodeAddress
Multicast Address
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Value
0 (four wire)
115200
1..254
249
C3F_T30
Communication
6.2
COM port protocol

RS485 setting values........................................................................................................250
ASCII - record...................................................................................................................251
Binary record ....................................................................................................................252
You can communicate with Compax3 in order to read or write objects via plug X10
( or X3 on the mains module of Compax3M) on the front via a COM port (max. 32
nodes).
As a rule 2 records are possible:
ASCII record simple communication with Compax3
Binary record: fast and secure communication with Compax3 by the aid of block
securing.
Switching between the ASCII and the binary record via automatic record
detection.
interface settings (see page 362)
Wiring
6.2.1.
RS232: SSK1 (see page 346)

RS485: like SSK27 (see page 347) / RS485 is activated by +5V on X10/1.
USB: SSK33/03 (only for Compax3M)
RS485 setting values

If Master=Pop was selected, only the settings compatible with the Pops (Parker
Operator Panels) made by Parker are possible.
Please note that the connected Pop has the same RS485 setting values.
You can test this with the "PopDesigner" software.
Multicast Address
Device Address
Baud rate
Connection Type
Protocol
250
"Master=General" makes all Compax3 settings possible.

You can use this address to allow the master to access multiple devices
simultaneously.
The device address of the connected Compax3 can be set here.
Adjust the transfer speed (baud rate) to the master.
Please choose between two-wire and four-wire RS485 (see page 25).
Adjust the protocol settings to the settings of your master.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.2.2.
Communication
ASCII - record
The general layout of a command string for Compax3 is as follows:
[Adr] command CR
Adr
Command
CR
Command
Answer strings
RS232: no address
RS485: Compax3 address in the range 0 ... 99
Address settings can be made in the C3 ServoManager under "RS485 settings"
valid Compax3 command
End sign (carriage return)
A command consists of the representable ASCII characters (0x21 .. 0x7E). Lower

cases are converted automatically into capitals and blanks (0x20) are deleted, if
they are not placed between two quotation marks.
Separator between places before and after the decimal is the decimal point (0x2E).
A numeric value can be given in the Hex-format if it is preceded by the $ sign.
Values can be requested in the Hex-format if the CR is preceded additionally by
the $ sign.
All commands requesting a numeric value from Compax3 are acknowledged with
the respective numeric value in the ASCII format followed by a CR without
preceding command repetition and following statement of unit. The length of these
answer strings differs depending on the value.
Commands requesting an Info-string (e.g. software version), are only
acknowledged with the respective ASCII character sequence followed by a CR,
without preceding command repetition. The length of these answer strings is here
constant.
Commands transferring a value to Compax3 or triggering a function in Compax3
are acknowledged by:
>CR
if the value can be accepted resp. if the function can be executed at that point in
time.
If this is ot the case or if the command syntax was invalid, the command is
acknowledged with
!xxxxCR
RS485 answer string
The 4 digit error number xxxx is given in the HEX format; you will find the meaning
in the appendix.
When using RS485, each answer string is preceded by a *" (ASCII - character:
0x2A).
Compax3 commands
Read object
RS232: O [$] Index , [$] Subindex [$]

RS485: Address O [$] Index , [$] Subindex [$]
The optional $ after the subindex stands for hex-output which means that an
object value can also be requested in hex;
e.g. "O $0192,2$": (Object 402.2)
Write object
RS232: O [$] Index , [$] Subindex = [$] Value [ ; Value2 ; Value3 ; ...]
RS485: Address O [$] Index , [$] Subindex = [$] Value [ ; Value2 ; Value3 ; ...]
The optional $ preceding Index, Subindex and value stands for Hex-input which
means that Index, Subindex and the value to be transferred can also be entered in
hex (e.g. O $0192,2=$C8).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
251
C3F_T30
Communication
6.2.3.
Binary record
The binary record with block securing is based on 5 different telegrams:
2 request telegrams which the control sends to Compax3 and
3 response telegrams which Compax3 returns to the control.
Telegram layout
Basic structure:
Start code
SZ
address
A
Number of data bytes - 1

L
Data
D0
D1
block securing
D Crc(Hi)
Crc(Lo)
n
...
The start code defines the frame type and is composed as follows:
Bit
Frame type
RdObj
Read object
WrObj
Write object
7
6
5
Frame identification
1
0
1
1
1
0
Rsp
Ack
Nak
0
0
0
Answer
Positive command acknowledgement
Negative command acknowledgement
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
PLC
x
x
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Gateway
x
x
0
address
x
x
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Bits 7, 6, 5 and 4 of the start code form the telegram identification; Bit 2 is always
1.
Bits 3, 1 and 0 have different meanings for the request and response telegrams.
The address is only necessary for RS484.
Request telegrams
-> Compax3
the address bit (Bit 0 = 1 ) shows if the start code is followed by an address
(only for RS485; for RS232 Bit 0 = 0)
the gateway bit (Bit 1 = 1) shows if the message is to be passed on.
(Please set Bit 1 = 0, as this function is not yet available)
the PLC bit (Bit 3 = 1 ) allows access to objects in the PLC/Pop format
U16, U32: for integer formats (see bus formats: Ix, Ux, V2)
IEEE 32Bit Floating Point: for broken formats (bus formats: E2_6, C4_3, Y2, Y4;
without scaling)
With Bit 3 = 0 the objects are transmitted in the DSP format.
DSP formats:
24 Bit = 3 Bytes: Integer INT24 or Fractional FRACT24
48 Bit = 6 Bytes: Real REAL48 (3 Byte Int, 3 Byte Fract) / Double Integer DINT48
/ Double Fractional DFRACT48
252
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Response telegram
Compax3>
Bits 0 and 1 are used to identify the response
Bit 3 is always 0
The maximum number of data bytes in the request telegram is 256, in the response
telegram 253.
The block securing (CRC16) is made via the CCITT table algorithm for all
characters.
After receiving the start code, the timeout monitoring is activated in order to avoid
that Compax3 waits in vain for further codes (e.g. connection interrupted) The
timeout period between 2 codes received is fixed to 5ms (5 times the code time at
9600Baud)
Write object WrObj telegram

SZ
0xCX
Adr
L
n
D0
Index(Hi)
D1
Index(Lo)
D2
Subindex
D3 ... Dn
Value
Crc(Hi)
0x..
Crc(Lo)
0x..
Describing an object by a value.
Positive acknowledgement Ack-telegram

SZ
0x06
L
1
D0
0
D1
0
Crc(Hi)
0x..
Crc(Lo)
0x..
Answer from Compax3 if a writing process was successful, i.e. the function could
be executed and is completed in itself.
Negative acknowledgement Nak - telegram

SZ
0x07
L
1
D0
F-No.(Hi)
D1
F-No.(Lo)
Crc(Hi)
0x..
Crc(Lo)
0x..
Answer from Compax3 if access to the object was denied (e.g. function cannot be
executed at that point in time or object has no reading access). The error no. is
coded according to the DriveCom profile resp. the CiA Device Profile DSP 402.
Read object RdObj - telegram

SZ
0xAX
Adr
L
n
D0
Index1(Hi)
D1
D2
D3
Index1(Lo) Subindex1 Index2(Hi)
D4
Index2(L
o)
D5
...
Subindex2 ...
Dn
...
Crc(Hi)
0x..
Crc(Lo)
0x..
Reading one or several objects
Answer Rsp - telegram

SZ
0x05
L
n
D0 ... Dx-1
Value1
Dx ... Dy-1
Value 2
Dy-D..
Value 3
D ... D..
Value ..
D ... Dn
Value n
Crc(Hi)
0x..
Crc(Lo)
0x..
Answer from Compax3 if the object can be read.

If the object has no reading access, Compax3 answers with the Nak telegram.
Example:
Reading object "StatusPositionActual" (o680.5):

Request: A5 03 02 02 A8 05 E1 46
Response: 05 05 FF FF FF FF FE 2D 07 B4
Writing into an Array (o1901.1 = 2350)

Request: C5 02 08 07 6D 01 00 09 2E 00 00 00 95 D5
Response: 06 01 00 00 BA 87
192-121101 N04 June 2008
253
C3F_T30
Communication
Block securing:
Checksum calculation for the CCITT table algorithm

The block securing for all codes is performed via the following function and the
corresponding table:
The CRC16 variable is set to 0 before sending a telegram.
Function call:
CRC16 = UpdateCRC16(CRC16, Character);
This function is called up for each Byte (Character) of the telegram.

The result forms the last two bytes of the telegram
Compax3 checks the CRC value on receipt and reports CRC error in the case of a
deviation.
Function
const unsigned int

0x0000, 0x1021,
0x8108, 0x9129,
0x1231, 0x0210,
0x9339, 0x8318,
0x2462, 0x3443,
0xa56a, 0xb54b,
0x3653, 0x2672,
0xb75b, 0xa77a,
0x48c4, 0x58e5,
0xc9cc, 0xd9ed,
0x5af5, 0x4ad4,
0xdbfd, 0xcbdc,
0x6ca6, 0x7c87,
0xedae, 0xfd8f,
0x7e97, 0x6eb6,
0xff9f, 0xefbe,
0x9188, 0x81a9,
0x1080, 0x00a1,
0x83b9, 0x9398,
0x02b1, 0x1290,
0xb5ea, 0xa5cb,
0x34e2, 0x24c3,
0xa7db, 0xb7fa,
0x26d3, 0x36f2,
0xd94c, 0xc96d,
0x5844, 0x4865,
0xcb7d, 0xdb5c,
0x4a75, 0x5a54,
0xfd2e, 0xed0f,
0x7c26, 0x6c07,
0xef1f, 0xff3e,
0x6e17, 0x7e36,
};
_P CRC16_table[256] = {
0x2042, 0x3063, 0x4084,
0xa14a, 0xb16b, 0xc18c,
0x3273, 0x2252, 0x52b5,
0xb37b, 0xa35a, 0xd3bd,
0x0420, 0x1401, 0x64e6,
0x8528, 0x9509, 0xe5ee,
0x1611, 0x0630, 0x76d7,
0x9719, 0x8738, 0xf7df,
0x6886, 0x78a7, 0x0840,
0xe98e, 0xf9af, 0x8948,
0x7ab7, 0x6a96, 0x1a71,
0xfbbf, 0xeb9e, 0x9b79,
0x4ce4, 0x5cc5, 0x2c22,
0xcdec, 0xddcd, 0xad2a,
0x5ed5, 0x4ef4, 0x3e13,
0xdfdd, 0xcffc, 0xbf1b,
0xb1ca, 0xa1eb, 0xd10c,
0x30c2, 0x20e3, 0x5004,
0xa3fb, 0xb3da, 0xc33d,
0x22f3, 0x32d2, 0x4235,
0x95a8, 0x8589, 0xf56e,
0x14a0, 0x0481, 0x7466,
0x8799, 0x97b8, 0xe75f,
0x0691, 0x16b0, 0x6657,
0xf90e, 0xe92f, 0x99c8,
0x7806, 0x6827, 0x18c0,
0xeb3f, 0xfb1e, 0x8bf9,
0x6a37, 0x7a16, 0x0af1,
0xdd6c, 0xcd4d, 0xbdaa,
0x5c64, 0x4c45, 0x3ca2,
0xcf5d, 0xdf7c, 0xaf9b,
0x4e55, 0x5e74, 0x2e93,
0x50a5,
0xd1ad,
0x4294,
0xc39c,
0x74c7,
0xf5cf,
0x66f6,
0xe7fe,
0x1861,
0x9969,
0x0a50,
0x8b58,
0x3c03,
0xbd0b,
0x2e32,
0xaf3a,
0xc12d,
0x4025,
0xd31c,
0x5214,
0xe54f,
0x6447,
0xf77e,
0x7676,
0x89e9,
0x08e1,
0x9bd8,
0x1ad0,
0xad8b,
0x2c83,
0xbfba,
0x3eb2,
0x60c6,
0xe1ce,
0x72f7,
0xf3ff,
0x44a4,
0xc5ac,
0x5695,
0xd79d,
0x2802,
0xa90a,
0x3a33,
0xbb3b,
0x0c60,
0x8d68,
0x1e51,
0x9f59,
0xf14e,
0x7046,
0xe37f,
0x6277,
0xd52c,
0x5424,
0xc71d,
0x4615,
0xb98a,
0x3882,
0xabbb,
0x2ab3,
0x9de8,
0x1ce0,
0x8fd9,
0x0ed1,
0x70e7,
0xf1ef,
0x62d6,
0xe3de,
0x5485,
0xd58d,
0x46b4,
0xc7bc,
0x3823,
0xb92b,
0x2a12,
0xab1a,
0x1c41,
0x9d49,
0x0e70,
0x8f78,
0xe16f,
0x6067,
0xf35e,
0x7256,
0xc50d,
0x4405,
0xd73c,
0x5634,
0xa9ab,
0x28a3,
0xbb9a,
0x3a92,
0x8dc9,
0x0cc1,
0x9ff8,
0x1ef0
unsigned int UpdateCRC16(unsigned int crc,unsigned char value) {

unsigned int crc16;
crc16 = (CRC16_table[(crc >> 8) & 0x00FF] ^ (crc << 8)
^ (unsigned int)(value));
return crc16;
}
You will find this function on the Compax3 CD under RS232_485\Function

UpdateCRC16.txt!
254
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.3
Communication
Remote diagnosis via Modem

Structure ...........................................................................................................................255
Configuration of local modem 1........................................................................................256
Configuration of remote modem 2 ....................................................................................257
Recommendations for preparing the modem operation ...................................................258
Caution!
As the transmission via modem may be very slow and interference-prone, the
operation of the Compax3 ServoManager via modem connection is on your
own risk!
The function setup mode as well as the ROLL mode of the oscilloscope are
not available for remote diagnosis!
It is not recommended to use the logic analyzer in the Compax3 IEC61131-3
debugger due to the limited bandwidth.
Requirements:
For modem operation, a direct and stable telephone connection is required.
Operation via a company-internal telephone system is not recommended.
6.3.1.
Structure
Layout and configuration of a modem connection ServoManager Compax3:
machine
PC
Release
> R5-0
Compax3
ServoManager
5
konfig
Modem 1
Modem 2
Phone
konfig
SSK31
4
konfig
konfig
7
konfig
Compax3
ServoManager
konfig
X10
Release < R5-0
Compax3
PC
9
Release
> R4-5
< R5-0
Release < R4-5
PC
10
Compax3.ini
192-121101 N04 June 2008
(115200Baud)
ATE0 cr
11
ATQ1 cr
Hyperterminal
255
C3F_T30
Communication
The green part of the drawing shows the proceeding for Compax3 release versions
< R5-0!
The proceeding for Compax3 release versions < R5-0 is described in an
application example (.../modem/C3_Appl_A1016_language.pdf on the Compax3
CD).
Connection Compax3 ServoManager <=> Compax3

The Compax3 ServoManager (1) establishes a RS232 connection with modem 1
(PC internal or external).
Modem 1 dials modem 2 via a telephone connection (3).
Modem 2 communicates with Compax3 (6) via RS232.
Configuration
Modem 1 is configured via the Compax3 ServoManager (1)
Modem 2 can be configured via Compax3 (on place), triggered by putting SSK31
(see page 351) on X10. For this, the device must be configured before. This can
be made locally before the system / machine is delivered with the aid of the
Compax3 ServoManager (8).
The transmission was tested with a TD33 modem made by "Westermo
http://www.westermo.com". The configuration with this standard modem is
especially simple.
Other modem types are also possible.
6.3.2.
Configuration of local modem 1

Menu "Options: Communication settings RS232/RS485..." must be opened
Select "Connection via Modem"
Under "name" you can enter a name for the connection
Enter the target telephone number.
Note: If an ISDN telephone system is operated within a company network, an
additional "0" may be required in order to get out of the local system into the
comany network before reaching the outside line with an additional "0".
The timeout periods are set to reasonable standard values according to our
experience.
Select the modem type: "Westermo TD-33" or "user-defined modem"
For "Westermo TD-33", no further settings are required.
For "user-defined modem", additional settings are only required, if the modem
does not support standard AT commands.
Then you can enter special AT commands.
Note: When operating the local modem on a telephone system, it may be
necessary to make a blind dialling. Here, the modem does not wait for the
dialling tone. For the Westermo TD33, the additional command sequence is
ATX3.
Select the COM interface where the modem is connected.
Close the window and establish the connection with button
port).
The connection is interrupted when the COM port is closed.
256
192-121101 N04 June 2008
(open/close COM
Parker EME
Communication

ATX3.
6.3.3.
Configuration of remote modem 2

Settings in Compax3 under "configure communication: Modem settings":
Modem initialization = "ON": After the SSK31 modem cable has been connected,
Compax3 initializes the modem
Modem initialization after Power On = "ON": After Power on of Compax3, the
device initializes the modem
Modem check = "ON": a modem check is performed
The timeout periods are set to reasonable standard values according to our
experience.
ATX3.
in the following wizard window, a specific download of the modem configuration
can be made.
Note:
If a configuration download is interrupted, the original settings in the non volatile
memory of the Compax3 are still available.
You have to finish the communication on the PC side and to reset the Compax3 via
the 24V supply before you can start a new trial.
Reinitialization of the remote modem 2

Remove cable on Compax3 X10 and connect again!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
257
C3F_T30
Communication
6.3.4.
Recommendations for preparing the modem operation

Preparations:
Settings in Compax3 under "configure communication: Modem settings":
Modem initialization: "ON"
Modem initialization after Power On: "ON"
Modem check: "ON"
Deposit SSK31 cable in the control cabinet.
Install modem in the control cabinet and connect to telephone line.
Remote diagnosis required:

On site:
Connect modem to Compax3 X10 via SSK31
Modem is automatically initialized
Local:
connect modem to telephone line
Establish cable connection to modem (COM interface)
Select "connection via modem" under "options: communication settings
RS232/RS485...".
Select modem under "selection"
Enter telephone number
Select COM interface (PC - modem)
Establish connection with button
(open/close COM port).
258
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.4
Communication
Profibus
Typical application with fieldbus and IEC61131 ...............................................................259
Profibus configuration.......................................................................................................259
Cyclic process data channel.............................................................................................261
Acyclic parameter channel ...............................................................................................262
Simatic S7 -300/400 - modules ........................................................................................271
I20 Function
The Profibus option is available with the Compax3 devices C3I20Txx!
Notes on the configuration of the Profibus master

Before configuring the Profibus master (e.g. S7), you will have to configure the
Compax3 axis.
In the Profibus window (see page 259)of the configuration wizard you will receive
the status message Profibus Telegram with the information on the telegram which
can be set in the master (PPO type).
6.4.1.
Typical application with fieldbus and IEC61131

We recommend the following procedure to control the IEC61131-3 program via
Profibus:
Use the control word (DeviceControl_Controlword_1) to control the PLCopen
function modules (Execute, Enable) to activate the modules via Profibus.
The logical module outputs can be placed on the status word
(DeviceState_Statusword_1).
Place the control word and the status word on the cyclic process data channel.
Connect variable module outputs of your IEC61131-3 program with the recipe
array.
For rapid access, the values from the first 5 rows of the recipe array can be
placed in the cyclic channel.
Additional values of the recipe array can be written acyclically.
Now you can use the bus to assign values, to activate function modules with the
control word and to read the current status with the control word.
6.4.2.
Profibus configuration
Configuration of the process-data channel.......................................................................260
PKW parameter channel ..................................................................................................261
Error reaction to a bus failure ...........................................................................................261
Following are described the input windows of the Profibus configuration wizard.
Can be called up in the tree (Compax3 ServoManager, left window) under
"configure configuration".
192-121101 N04 June 2008
259
C3F_T30
Communication
6.4.2.1
Configuration of the process-data channel

You can use the Process Data Channel (PZD) to exchange actual and Setpoint
values cyclically between the Compax3 and the Profibus master.
Adjusting the cyclic PZD:
The PZD is adjusted separately for the following transfer directions:
Profibus-Master Compax3 (PAD)
Compax3 Profibus-Master (PED)
Maximum size of the process-data channel:

8 words (16 bytes) PAD and
8 words (16 bytes) PED
The objects that can be put on the process data channel can be found in the
" Compax3 Objects (see page 320)"!
Assignment of the process data channel

Assignment of the process data channel is automated in Compax3 ServoManager.
You select the objects which you want to put one after the other to the process
input data (PED: Compax3 => PLC) and to the process output data (PAD: PLC =>
Compax3).
ServoManager continuously checks areas of the PZD that are free and enables
additional input options correspondingly.
PPO type
Depending on the configuration that is set, the resulting PPO type is displayed in
the "Profibus telegram" wizard window (in the status line of the wizard window).
You can use this value for the configuration of the Profibus master.
Assignment of the
PZD
When data is read out of the Process Data Channel (PZD), the word width of the
individual objects must be carefully noted.
Example:
Assignment:
Object
POSITION_position
POSITION_speed
AnalogOutput0_DemandValue
AnalogOutput1_DemandValue
Array_Col1_Row1
PLC
0
AW(n)
2
AW(n+1)
4
AW(n+2)
6
AW(n+3)
Word width
2
2
1
1
2
260
2
EW(n+1)
4
EW(n+2)
6
EW(n+3)
address
AD(n)
AD(n+2)
AW(n+4)
AW(n+5)
AD(n+6)
Compax3
8
AW(n+4)
Compax3
0
EW(n)
Assignment
AW(n) & AW(n+1)
AW(n+2) & AW(n+3)
AW(n+4)
AW(n+5)
AW(n+6) & AW(n+7)
12
AW(n+6)
14
AW(n+7)
16 Byte
10
EW(n+5)
12
EW(n+6)
14
EW(n+7)
16 Byte
PLC
8
EW(n+4)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
10
AW(n+5)
Parker EME
6.4.2.2
Communication
PKW parameter channel

Parameter access with DPV0
In addition to cyclic data exchange, you can use the PKW mechanism for acyclic
access to parameters.
The PKW mechanism is implemented for Profibus masters without DPV1
functionality.
PKW:Parameter identification value
You can select between:
no PKW - without acyclic parameter access.
PKW - paramter access via a PKW length of 8 bytes.

PKW structure
PKW
Octet1
Octet2
Octet 3
PKE
0
Octet 4
Octet5
Octet6
Octet 8
PWE
IND
2
Octet 7
Additional information on the structure of the PKW (see page 262)
6.4.2.3
Error reaction to a bus failure

Here you can adjust how Compax3 will respond to a fieldbus error:
No response
downramp / stop
6.4.3.
Cyclic process data channel

The structure of the PZD is defined in the configuration menu: "Profibus Telegram"
of the Servomanager.
6.4.3.1
Control and status word

The cyclic process data channel contains a control word and a status word both,
freely available and 16 bits in size:
Control word: Profibus-Master Compax3
Status word: Compax3 Profibus-Master
192-121101 N04 June 2008
261
C3F_T30
Communication
6.4.4.
Acyclic parameter channel

Parameter access with DPV0: Required data channel ....................................................262
Data formats of the bus objects........................................................................................268
Compax3 supports parameter access with DPV1.
6.4.4.1
Parameter access with DPV0: Required data channel

You can use the PKW mechanism for acyclic access to parameters in cyclic data
exchange as well. This is made available to make it possible for the master to have
access to the important device parameters without DPV1 functionality.
The master formulates an order in the PKW mechanism. Compax3 processes the
order and formulates the response.
PKW structure:
Byte 1
PKE
PKW:
PKE:
IND:
PWE:
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
IND
PWE
Parameter identification value
Parameter identification (1. and 2. octet) (see below)
Subindex* (3. Octet), 4. byte is reserved
Parameter value (5th to 8th byte resp. 5th to 12th byte with extended PKW)
PKE structure:
Byte 1
Byte 2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
AK
SPM PNU
AK:
Order /response identification (value range 0 ... 15)
SPM:
Reserved
PNU:
Parameter number
*Reference to the subindex

The information for PNU subindex (parameter number) also applies to PROFIdrive
profile Version 3, i.e., that the subindex is counted starting at 0, while for
PROFIdrive profile Version 2 the subindex is counted starting at 1:
DPV1Client (V3)
PKWClient (V2)
[0..n-1]
[1..n]
-1
Drive
(V3)
[0..n- 1]
The result of this is as follows:
Profibus master based on PROFIdrive profile Version 3

The subindex of the Profibus No. (PNU) specified in the object list is directly valid.
Example: Example: PNU object forward speed control = 400.1 (as specified).
Profibus master based on PROFIdrive profile Version 2

The subindex of the Profibus No. (PNU) specified in the object list must be
incremented by 1.
Example: PNU object forward speed control = 400.2
262
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Order and response processing

Order/response identifications are defined so that it is apparent from the
identification which fields of the PKW interface (IND, PWE) also need to be
evaluated. To this may be added the distinction between parameter value and
parameter description.
Order
identification
Order Master Compax3
response identification
Compax3 Master
0
1
2
3
6
7
8
No order
Request parameter value
Change parameter value (word)
Change parameter value (double word)
Request parameter value (array)
Change parameter value (array of word)
Change parameter value (array of
double word)
0
1,2
1
2
4,5
4
5
9
14
15
Request number of array elements

Change object
Request object
6
14
15
Response identifications 7 and 8 are used for negative acknowledgements for

problems.
Sequence
The master transfers an order to a Compax3.
The master repeats this order at least until a response is received from Compax3.
This procedure ensures the transfer of orders /responses on the user level.
Only one order is ever being processed at a time.
Compax3 continues to make the response available until the master formulates a
new order.
For responses containing parameter values, Compax3 always responds upon
repetition with the current value (cyclic processing). This applies to all responses
to the orders Request parameter value, Request parameter value (Array) and
Request object.
The PWE transfer of word sizes takes place with byte 7 and 8, while the transfer
of double word sizes takes place with byte 5 through 8.
Explanation of response identification

Response
Response Compax3 Master
identificatio
n
0
1
2
4
5
7
8
9
10
14
15
No response
Transfer value (word)
Transfer parameter value (double word)
Transfer parameter value (array of word)
Transfer parameter value (array of double word)
Order cannot be executed (with error no..)
No user level for PKW interface
Reserved
Reserved
Object value transferred
Object value transferred
192-121101 N04 June 2008
263
C3F_T30
Communication
Example: Changing the stiffness

Task:
Parameter / object change via PKW (DPV0)
The object "stiffness" will be set to 200%
Object stiffness: PNU 402.2; valid after VP
Format UNSIGNED 16 == 1 word == order identification = 2 == "Change parameter
value (word)"
The master sends to Compax3:
PLC - Compax3
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
PKE
15
14
13
12
11
AK
Octet 5
Octet 6
Octet 7
Octet 8
PWE
MSB
LSB
PNU
2
0
10
Octet 4
IND
Subindex
0
1
402
0
0x21
0x92
0x3
0x0
200
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xC8
Compax3 responds with the same content, except with response identification = 1:
Compax3 - PLC
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
PKE
15
14
13
12
11
AK
Octet 5
Octet 6
Octet 7
Octet 8
PWE
MSB
LSB
PNU
1
0
10
Octet 4
IND
Subindex
0
0
402
0
0x11
3
0x92
0x3
200
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xC8
If no additional object needs to be changed, the new value can be set to valid with
VP:
Object: Set objects to valid PNU 338.10 (because of DPV0, the Subindex must be
incremented by 1 (see page 262))
PLC - Compax3
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
PKE
15
14
13
12
11
AK
Octet 5
Octet 6
Octet 7
Octet 8
PWE
MSB
LSB
PNU
2
0
10
Octet 4
IND
Subindex
0
1
338
0
0x21
11
0x52
0xB
1
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x1
Compax3 - PLC
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
PKE
15
14
13
12
11
AK
Octet 5
Octet 6
Octet 7
Octet 8
PWE
MSB
LSB
PNU
1
0
10
Octet 4
IND
Subindex
0
0
0x11
338
0
11
0x52
0xB
1
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x1
Reading back the object set objects to valid makes it possible to check whether the
command was performed. Byte 8 will the contain the value 0.
264
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
The change can be stored and will not be lost even with a power failure by using
the object "Save objects permanently".
Object: Save objects permanently PNU 339
PLC - Compax3
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
PKE
15
14
13
12
11
AK
Octet 5
Octet 6
Octet 7
Octet 8
PWE
MSB
LSB
PNU
2
0
10
Octet 4
IND
Subindex
0
1
339
0
0x21
0
0x53
0x0
1
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x1
Compax3 - PLC
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
PKE
15
14
13
12
11
AK
Octet 5
Octet 6
Octet 7
Octet 8
PWE
MSB
LSB
PNU
1
0
10
Octet 4
IND
Subindex
0
0
0x11
339
0
0
0x53
0x0
1
0x0
192-121101 N04 June 2008
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x1
265
C3F_T30
Communication
Upload/download objects via the Profibus

All settings of Compax3 can be read using the Profibus and written back to
Compax3. This makes it easy to replace a device, for example.
Condition:
Compax3 must be configured (once running through the configuration wizard

followed by a download is enough; the configuration settings are, however, not
relevant)
To implement this, the PKW mechanism has been changed.
Structure of modified PKW:

Byte 1
PKE
PKW:
PKE:
IND:
PWE:
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
IND
PWE
Parameter identification value
Parameter identification (1. and 2. octet) (see below)
Object index (3. octet high 4. octet low)
Parameter value (5. to 8. octet)
Byte 8
Structure of modified PKE:

Byte 1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
AK=14 or 15
SPM DF
DPZ
AK:
Order/response identification
SPM:
Reserved
DF:
Data format (DF=1 constant)
DPZ:
Data buffer access
SI:
Object subindex
Byte 2
7
6
SI
Data buffer access:

For each object, 16 bytes must be read or written. Since the size of the PWE
channel is 4 bytes, each object must be read or written 4 times.
Sequence for reading / writing and object:

DPZ=0:
Object byte 1 ... 4 can be read / is being written
Order executed
DPZ=1
DPZ=2
DPZ=3
The data will either be read fro the PWE or written into the PWE.
Access algorithm for reading objects

Object 20.2 written with value 0 (object 20.2 is a counter that specifies the next
object to be read; the starting value is 0).
Read object index and subindex in object 20.5.
Format I32 of Object 20.5:
Not assigned
Index (high byte)
Index (low byte)
Subindex
Read the object with the index and subindex read in object 20.5 and in save it in
a table with the following structure: Index (2Byte), Subindex(1Byte), Contents
(16Byte).
Read the next object-Index and subindex in object 20.5.
....
This must be performed until index = 0xFFFF and until subindex = 0xFF.
Writing objects
Write the entire table to Compax3. Each index and subindex is written with the
value stored in the table.
266
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
It should be noted in this regard that each time an object is written, the internal
buffer must first be written with DPZ=1, 2, 3 and then the entire order is written with
DPZ0.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
267
C3F_T30
Communication
6.4.4.2
Data formats of the bus objects

Integer formats................................................................................................................. 268
Unsigned - Formats ......................................................................................................... 268
Fixed point format E2_6................................................................................................... 268
Fixed point format C4_3 .................................................................................................. 269
Bus format Y2 and Y4...................................................................................................... 269
Bit sequence V2............................................................................................................... 270
Byte string OS.................................................................................................................. 270
Integer formats
Twos complement representation;
The highest order bit (MSB) is the bit after the sign bit (VZ) in the first octet.
VZ == 0: positive numbers and zero; VZ == 1: negative numbers
Type
VZ
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
Length: 1 Word
MSB
LSB
VZ
27
214
26
213
25
212
24
211
23
210
22
29
21
28
20
Integer 32
MSB
VZ
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
Integer 8
length: 1 Byte
Integer 16
Bit
Length: 2 Words
LSB
Unsigned - Formats
Type
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
Length: 1 Word
MSB
LSB
215
27
214
26
213
25
212
24
211
23
210
22
29
21
28
20
Unsigned 32
MSB
231
223
230
222
229
221
228
220
227
219
226
218
225
217
224
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
Unsigned 8
Length: 1 Byte
Unsigned 16
Bit
Length: 2 Words
LSB
Fixed point format E2_6

Linear fixed point value with six binary places after the decimal point. 0
corresponds to 0, 256 corresponds to 214 (0x4000).
Twos complement representation;
MSB is the bit after the sign bit
VZ == 0: positive numbers and zero;
VZ == 1: negative numbers
Type
Bit
E2_6
MSB
LSB
VZ
21
28
20
27
2-1
26
2-2
25
2-3
24
2-4
23
2-5
22
2-6
Length: 1 Word
268
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Fixed point format C4_3

Linear fixed point value with three decimal places after the decimal point. 0
corresponds to 0 and 0,001 corresponds to 20 (0x0000 0001).
Structure like data type Integer32, value of the bits reduced by a factor of 1000.
Length: 2 Words
Bus format Y2 and Y4

Layout:
Y2 like data type Integer16
Y4 like data type Integer32
The values can be adjusted by a scaling factor.
The following rules apply:
Scaling factor for Y2: Object 200.1, ... 200.5
Scaling factor for Y4: Object 201.1, ... 201.5
There are different scaling factors for individual values
1. Y2 scaling factors
Object 200.1: NormFactorY2_Speed: Scaling factor for Y2 speeds
Object 200.2: NormFactorY2_Position: Scaling factor for Y2 positions
Object 200.3: NormFactorY2_Voltage: Scaling factor for Y2 voltages
Object 200.5: NormFactorY2_Array_Col2: Scaling factor for Column 2 of the
recipe array
2. Y4 scaling factors
Object 201.1: NormFactorY4_Speed: Scaling factor for Y4 speeds
Object 201.2: NormFactorY4_Position: Scaling factor for Y4 positions
Object 201.3: NormFactorY4_Voltage: Scaling factor for Y4 voltages
Object 201.4: NormFactorY4_Array_Col1: Scaling factor for Column 1 of the
recipe array
192-121101 N04 June 2008
269
C3F_T30
Communication
Meaning of scaling
factors
Bit 5: Meaning of scaling factor:

Bit 5 = "0": decimal factors 1, 1/10, 1/100, ..
Bit 0 .. Bit 4: Scaling factor
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bit 0...4
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
Factor dec (Bit 5 = 0) yy0x xxxx

0
10
1
1
10
0,1
2
10
0,01
3
10
0,001
4
10
0,0001
5
10
0,00001
6
10
0,000001
7
10
0,0000001
8
10
0,00000001
9
10
0,000000001
Bit 5 = "1": binary factors 1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, ...

Bit 0 ... Bit 4: Scaling factor
#
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
20
21
22
23
24
Bit 0...4
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
Factor bin (Bit 5 = 1) yy1x xxxx

0
2
1
1
2
0,5
2
2
0,25
3
2
0,125
4
2
0,0625
5
2
0,03125
6
2
0,015625
7
2
0,0078125
8
2
0,00390625
9
2
0,001953125
10
2
0,0009765625
11
2
0,00048828125
12
2
0,000244140625
13
2
0,0001220703125
14
2
0,00006103515625
15
2
0,000030517578125
16
2
0,0000152587890625
17
2
0,00000762939453125
18
2
0,000003814697265625
19
2
0,0000019073486328125
20
2
0,00000095367431640625
21
2
0,000000476837158203125
22
2
0,0000002384185791015625
23
2
0,00000011920928955078125
24
2
0,000000059604644775390625
Bit 6 ... Bit 15: Reserved
Bit sequence V2
The V2 bus format is a bit sequence with a length of 16 bits.
Byte string OS
Octet string OS: String with variable length.
270
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.4.5.
Communication
Simatic S7 -300/400 - modules

You can find the modules on the Compax3 DVD or in the internet under
http:/www.compax3.info/startup http://www.compax3.info/startup.
You will find a description of these function modules in the help file !
192-121101 N04 June 2008
271
C3F_T30
Communication
6.5
CANopen - Node Settings

CANopen - configuration ..................................................................................................272
Supporting IEC modules...................................................................................................274
CANopen communication profile ......................................................................................282
Acyclic parameter channel ...............................................................................................287
I21 Function
6.5.1.
The CANopen option is available with the Compax3 devices C3I21Txx!
CANopen - configuration
CANopen Operating Mode ...............................................................................................272
Baud rate ..........................................................................................................................273
Possible PDO assignment................................................................................................274
Transmission cycle time ...................................................................................................274
Following are described the input windows of the CANopen configuration wizard.
6.5.1.1
CANopen Operating Mode

CANopen Operating Modes:
Slave on C3 powerPLmC:
Compax3 as Slave on C3 powerPLmC integrated via the DriveInterface
Note for C3I21T40: The cam programming is made in the slave axis
Slave
Compax3 is Slave of a CANopen Master; the CANopen configuration is made via
the ServoManager
Slave with configuration via Master
Compax3 is Slave of a CANopen Master; the CANopen configuration is made via
the Master
Master for PIOs
Compax3 as CANopen Master only for the operation of external digital and
analog PIOs (Parker Input and Output modules).
Please note: The device cannot be operated with an additional CANopen Master!
Slave on C3 powerPLmC (Cam programming on C3 powerPLmC)
Operating mode only available with I21T40!
The programming of the device (C3I21T40) is only made on the C3 powerPLmC.
272
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
C3 Master PIO
In the "C3 Master PIO" operating mode, the input window for the CANopen PIO
mapping is follwowing:
Please state, how many words the process image of the PIOs will need, 1.. 4
words are possible.
The process image is transmitted via teh process data objects as follows:
Digital Inputs: RPDO1
Analog Inputs: RPDO2
Digital Outputs: TPDO1
Analog Outputs: TPDO2
The inputs and outputs are stored in objects (O150.x ... O153.x).
Object 150.x: Digital Inputs
Object 151.x: Digital Outputs
Object 152.x: Analog Inputs
Object 153.x: Analog Outputs
The digital inputs and outputs can be read or written into in the IEC program via
modules (see page 214) in order to get an exact process image. Modules:
PIO_Input0_15, PIO_Input16_31, PIO_Input32_47, PIO_Input48_63,
PIO_Output0_15, PIO_Output16_31, PIO_Output32_47, PIO_Output48_63.
Before that, you must execute some initializations; this can be made with the aid of
the PIO_INIT (see page 214) module.
6.5.1.2

No response
downramp / stop
6.5.1.3
Baud rate
Selecting the Baud rate.
Bear in mind that the maximum cable length depends on the Baud rate:
Baud rate
Maximum length
1Mbit/s
800kbit/s
500kbit/s
250kbit/s
125kbit/s
100kbit/s
50kbit/s
20kbit/s
25m
50m
100m
250m
500m
700m
1,000m
2,500m
192-121101 N04 June 2008
273
C3F_T30
Communication
6.5.1.4
Possible PDO assignment

Via the process data objects (PDOs) actual values and Setpoint values are
continually exchanged between Compax3 and the CANopen client.
4 cyclic PDOs are possible, they are configured with the help of the Compax3
ServoManager:
The PDOs are set separately for the transmission directions
CANopen - Client Compax3 (RPDO) (max. 16 words)
Compax3 CANopen - Client (TPDO) (max. 16 words)
The objects that can be put on the process data channel can be found in the "
Compax3 Objects (see page 320)"!
6.5.1.5
Transmission cycle time

For the TPDOs a transmission cycle time can be set in each case.
This time specifies the time intervals at which Compax3 applies the cyclic data new
to the respective PDO.
The minimum value is thereby 1ms.
6.5.2.
Supporting IEC modules

C3_CANopen_State .........................................................................................................275
C3_CANopen_GuardingState ..........................................................................................276
C3_CANopen_AddNode ..................................................................................................277
C3_CANopen_ConfigNode ..............................................................................................278
C3_CANopen_NMT..........................................................................................................279
Reading an object in another node (C3_CANopen_SDO_Read4) ..................................280
Writing an object in another node (C3_CANopen_SDO_Write4).....................................281
274
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.5.2.1
Communication
C3_CANopen_State
FB name
C3_CANopen_State
This module is used to determine the status of the CANopen NMT status machine
VAR_INPUT
Enable
BOOL
Activating the module
Stopped
Operational
BOOL
BOOL
PreOperational
BOOL
CANopen node is in "Stopped" state

CANopen node is in the "Operational" state
(communication via process data and service data
objects is possible)
CANopen node is in the "PreOperational" state
(communication via process data and service data
objects is possible)
VAR_OUTPUT
C3_CANopen_State
Enable : BOOL
Stopped : BOOL
Operational : BOOL
PreOperational : BOOL
CANopen states
Power On
Initialisation
10, 11
Pre-Operational
7
6
Operational
8
Stopped
6
7
6: Start Remote Node

7: Stop Remote Node
8: Enter Pre-Operational State
10: Reset Node
11: Reset Communication
The "Initialization" state is no fixed state but only a transition state.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
275
C3F_T30
Communication
6.5.2.2
C3_CANopen_GuardingState
FB name
This module is used to determine the status during Nodeguarding
VAR_INPUT
Enable
BOOL
GuardingStarted
LostGuarding
BOOL
BOOL
LostConnection
BOOL
The NMT master started the Nodeguarding procedure

The node did not receive a Nodeguarding RTR telegram
from the NMT master during the Guarding time.
The node did not receive a RTR telegram from the NMT
Master during the "Node Life Time" (GuardingTime *
LifeTimeFactor) and therefore considers the connection
as interrupted.
VAR_OUTPUT
Enable : BOOL
GuardingStarted : BOOL
LostGuarding : BOOL
LostConnection : BOOL
276
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.5.2.3
Communication
C3_CANopen_AddNode
FB name
C3_CANopen_AddNode
This module inserts a new CANopen node into the management list of the NMT master with
the stated Node Guarding parameters and the current CANopen status
PRE_OPERATIONAL.
VAR_INPUT
Execute
Device
GuardTime
LifeTimeFactor
BOOL
INT
INT
INT

Node-ID (1 ... 127)
Guard time = 0
Life Time Factor = 0
Done
Error
ErrorCode
AbortCode
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
DWORD
MyNode_ID
INT
Function executed without error

Error occurred
You will find the error code in the Compax3 error list.
CANopen SDO abort code (see page 288) upon error
65377
C3 CANopen stack error (see page 279) no. upon error
65376
Own Node_ID (NMT master)
VAR_OUTPUT
Note: Compax3 must be CANopen master.

C3_CANopen_AddNode
Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Device : INT
Error : BOOL
ErrorCode : WORD
GuardTime : INT
LifeTimeFactor : INT
AbortCode : DWORD
MyNode_ID : INT
192-121101 N04 June 2008
277
C3F_T30
Communication
6.5.2.4
C3_CANopen_ConfigNode
FB name
This module establishes a PDO connection between two CANopen nodes.
To do this, the module changes the COB-Ids of the 2nd node (RemoteDevice) to the COBIds of the 1st node (ReferenceDevice).
VAR_INPUT
Execute
ReferenceDevice
RemoteDevice
ReferenceTxPDO
RemoteRxPDO
ReferenceRxPDO
RemoteTxPDO
BOOL
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT

Node ID of the 1st node (1 ... 127)
Node ID of the 2nd node (1 ... 127)
TxPDO number of the 1st node (1 ... 4)
TxPDO number of the 2nd node (1 ... 4)
RxPDO number of the 1st node (1 ... 4)
TxPDO number of the 2nd node (1 ... 4)
"0" do not establish connection
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
DWORD

Error occurred
65377
C3 CANopen stack error (see page 279) no. upon
error 65376
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Error
ErrorCode
AbortCode

Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
ReferenceDevice : INT
Error : BOOL
RemoteDevice : INT
ReferenceTxPDO : INT
RemoteRxPDO : INT
ReferenceRxPDO: INT
RemoteTxPDO : INT
278
192-121101 N04 June 2008
ErrorCode : WORD
AbortCode : DWORD
Parker EME
6.5.2.5
Communication
C3_CANopen_NMT
FB name
C3_CANopen_NMT
This module allows to send NMT messages.
VAR_INPUT
Execute
Device
BOOL
INT
State
INT

Node ID (0 ... 127)
0 = NMT-message is valid for all nodes
State which the node must take on:
START_REMOTE_NODE
STOP_REMOTE_NODE
ENTER_PRE_OPERATIONAL
RESET_NODE
RESET_COMMUNICATION
(these are no constants; please enter therefore
directly)
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Error
ErrorCode
BOOL
BOOL
WORD

Error occurred
CANopen-Stack error no.
1 = not sufficient memory
2 = node is not in the management list
3 = node is already in the management list
4 = nodes are in the wrong state
11 = network object not available
12 = node 0 was selected
65378 = C3 has no master functionality

C3_CANopen_NMT
Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Device : INT
Error : BOOL
ErrorCode : WORD
State : INT
192-121101 N04 June 2008
279
C3F_T30
Communication
6.5.2.6
Reading an object in another node (C3_CANopen_SDO_Read4)

FB name
C3_CANopen_SDO_Read4
This module allows to read an object with a max. length of 4 bytes in another node via
SDO.
VAR_INPUT
Execute
Device
Index
Subindex
BOOL
INT
WORD
WORD

Node ID of the other node (1 ... 127)
Object Index (CAN-No.)
Object Subindex (CAN-No.)
DWORD
WORD
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
DWORD
Object data read in

Data length in Byte
Error occurred
65377
error 65376
VAR_OUTPUT
Data
Length
Done
Error
ErrorCode
AbortCode

C3_CANopen_SDO_Read4
Execute : BOOL
Data : DWORD
Length : WORD
Device : INT
Done : BOOL
Index : WORD
Subindex : WORD
Error : BOOL
ErrorCode : WORD
AbortCode : DWORD
280
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.5.2.7
Communication
Writing an object in another node (C3_CANopen_SDO_Write4)

FB name
C3_CANopen_SDO_Write4
This module allows to write an object with a max. length of 4 bytes in another node via
SDO.
VAR_INPUT
Execute
Device
Index
Subindex
Data
Length
BOOL
INT
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD

Node ID of the other node (1 ... 127)
Object Index
Object subindex
Object data which must be written
Data length in Byte
BOOL
BOOL
WORD
DWORD

Error occurred
65377
error 65376
VAR_OUTPUT
Done
Error
ErrorCode
AbortCode

C3_CANopen_SDO_Write4
Execute : BOOL
Done : BOOL
Device : INT
Error : BOOL
ErrorCode : WORD
Index : WORD
Subindex : WORD
AbortCode : DWORD
Data : DWORD
Length : WORD
192-121101 N04 June 2008
281
C3F_T30
Communication
6.5.3.
CANopen communication profile

The CANopen communication objects described in this chapter are either set
to sensible standard values or they are set under menu control with the help
of the ServoManager.
The communication objects described below must be modified only for
special deviating settings.
CAN is an open system which has been standardised in the ISO 11898 and OSI
reference model ISO 7498.
CAN is Multi-Master compatible.
Data transmission takes place with up to 8 Bytes useful data.
The CAN objects are designated with an 11 Bit identifier (ID or COB-ID: CAN
Object identifier). The identifier specifies the priority of the objects (the smaller the
value of the object ID is, the higher is the priority level of the object).
The COB-ID consists of the function code and the node ID:
Structure of the COB-ID

Bit 10
Function code
NodeID (1 ... 127)

NodeID: The Compax3 device address is used here as standard value
I21 Function
CANopen ratings
282
Baud rate [kBit/s]
20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000
EDS file
C3.EDS
Service data object
SDO1
Process data objects
PDO1, ... PDO4
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
6.5.3.1
Object types
The following table shows the preset COB-IDs:

Communicati Functi
on object
on
type
code
COB Identifier
(dec)
COB Identifier
(hex)
Defined
in
Index...
Description
0
128
256
0h
80h
100h
1005h
1012h
Network management and identifier assignment

CANSYNC
TIME is not implemented in Compax3.
Broadcast objects
NMT
SYNC
TIME
0000b
0001b
0010b
Point to point objects

EMCY
T-PDO1
0001b
0011b
129-255
385-511
81h-FFh
181h-1FFh
1014h
1800h
Error messages
Assignment via Index 1A00h
T-PDO2
T-PDO3
T-PDO4
R-PDO1
R-PDO2
R-PDO3
R-PDO4
0101b
0111b
1001b
0100b
0110b
1000b
1010b
641-767
897-1023
1153-1279
513-639
769-895
1025-1151
1281-1407
281h-2FFh
381h-3FFh
481h-1279h
201h-27Fh
301h-37Fh
401h-47Fh
501h-57Fh
1801h
1802h
1803h
1400h
1401h
1402h
1403h

Assignment via Index 1600h
T-SDO1
T-SDO2
R-SDO1
R-SDO2
Node guard
1011b
-*
1100b
-*
1110b
1409-1535
-*
1537-1663
-*
1793-1919
581h-5FFh
601h-67Fh
701h-77Fh
1200h
1201h
1200h
1201h
100Eh
Transmit service data object 1

Transmit service data object 2
Receive service data object 1
Receive service data object 2
Check bus subscribers.
Transmit process data object

( Compax3) max. 8 Bytes
Receive process data objects

( Compax3) max. 8 Bytes
* The SDO2 are not activated.

The standard value of the COB-ID for an object is calculated as follows: COB-ID =
(Function code * 128) + Device address
The standard values of the COB-Ids can be changed via communication objects
via SDOs.
Application of the communication object types

Transmission of real time data (faster transmission because higher priority)
T-PDO
R-PDO
Transmit process data object: Compax3 reply.

Receive process data object: send to Compax3.
Once only transmission, e. g. of parameters or programme lines

T-SDO
R-SDO
6.5.3.2
Transmit service data object: Compax3 reply.

Receive service data object: send to Compax3.
Communication objects
General note:
Every CAN object which is created as array (with subindex) contains the number of
entries in subindex 0.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
283
C3F_T30
Communication
CAN communication objects overview sorted according to CAN No.
CAN-No
Name
Bus format
Standard value
0x1000
0x1001
0x1005
0x1006
0x1007
0x1008
Device Type
Error Register
COB-ID SYNC
Communication Cycle Period
Synchronous Window Length
Manufacturer Device Name
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Visible_String
0x1009
Manufacturer Hardware Version
Visible_String
0x00020192
0x00
0x80000080
0x00000000
0x00000000
C3xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
x
CTPxxxxxxxxLEIxxxx
xxxx
0x100A
Manufacturer Software Version
Visible_String
0x100C
0x100D
0x1014
0x1015
0x1018
0x1018.1
0x1018.2
0x1018.3
0x1018.4
0x1200
0x1200.1
0x1200.2
0x1200.3
0x1201
0x1201.1
0x1201.2
0x1201.3
0x1400
Guard Time
Life Time Factor
COB-ID EMCY
Inhibit Time Emergency
Identity Object (see page 286)
Vendor Id
Product Code
Revision number
Serial number
Server SDO1 Parameter
SDO1: COB-ID Client -> Server
SDO1: COB-ID Server -> Client
Node ID of the SDO1 client
Server SDO2 Parameter
SDO2: COB-ID Client -> Server
SDO2: COB-ID Server -> Client
Node ID of the SDO2 Client
Receive PDO1 communication
parameters
RPDO1: COB-ID
RPDO1: Transmission type
RPDO1: Inhibit Time
RPDO1: Event timer
parameters
RPDO2: COB-ID
RPDO2: Inhibit Time
RPDO2: Event timer
parameter
RPDO3: COB-ID
RPDO3: Inhibit Time
RPDO3: Event timer
parameter
RPDO4: COB-ID
RPDO4: Inhibit Time
RPDO4: Event timer
Receive PDO1 mapping parameter
RPDO1 mapping entry 1
Unsigned16
Unsigned8
Unsigned32
Unsigned16
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
-
0x1400.1
0x1400.2
0x1400.3
0x1400.5
0x1401
0x1401.1
0x1401.2
0x1401.3
0x1401.5
0x1402
0x1402.1
0x1402.2
0x1402.3
0x1402.5
0x1403
0x1403.1
0x1403.2
0x1403.3
0x1403.5
0x1600
0x1600.1
0x1600.2
0x1600.3
284
Minimum
value
0x00000000
0x00
0x00000001
0x00000000
0x00000000
Maximum
value
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
Acce
ss
const
ro
rw
rw
rw
const
const
V
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
0x0000
0x00
0x000000FF
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x00000001
0x0
0xFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
ro
ro
ro
ro
0x0000067F
0x000005FF
0x00
0x00000001
0x00000001
0x00
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
ro
ro
rw
0x800006E0
0x800006E0
0x00
0x00000001
0x00000001
0x00
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
rw
rw
rw
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned16
-
0x0000027F
0xFE
0x0000
0x0
0x00000001
0x00
0x0000
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned16
-
0x0000037F
0xFE
0x0000
0x0
0x00000001
0x00
0x0000
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned16
-
0x0000047f
0xFE
0x0000
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned16
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
0x0000057f
0xFE
0x0000
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
rw
rw
rw
192-121101 N04 June 2008
const
Parker EME
Communication
CAN-No
Name
Bus format
Standard value
0x1600.4
0x1600.5
0x1601
0x1601.1
0x1601.2
0x1601.3
0x1601.4
0x1601.5
0x1602
0x1602.1
0x1602.2
0x1602.3
0x1602.4
0x1602.5
0x1603
0x1603.1
0x1603.2
0x1603.3
0x1603.4
0x1603.5
0x1800

Transmit PDO1 communication
parameter
TPDO1: COB-ID
TPDO1: Transmission type
TPDO1: Inhibit Time
TPDO1: Event timer
parameter
TPDO2: COB-ID
TPDO2: Inhibit Time
TPDO2: Event timer
parameter
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
-
0x1802.1
0x1802.2
0x1802.3
0x1802.5
0x1803
0x1803.1
0x1803.2
0x1803.3
0x1803.5
0x1A00
0x1A00.1
0x1A00.2
0x1A00.3
0x1A00.4
0x1A00.5
0x1A01
0x1A01.1
0x1A01.2
0x1A01.3
0x1A01.4
0x1A01.5
0x1A02
0x1A02.1
0x1A02.2
0x1800.1
0x1800.2
0x1800.3
0x1800.5
0x1801
0x1801.1
0x1801.2
0x1801.3
0x1801.5
0x1802
0x00000000
0x00000000
Minimum
value
0x00000000
0x00000000
Maximum
value
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
Acce
ss
rw
rw
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned16
-
0x000001FF
0xFE
0x0000
0x0
0x00000001
0x00
0x0000
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned16
-
0x000002FF
0xFE
0x0000
0x0
0x00000001
0x00
0x0000
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
TPDO3: COB-ID
TPDO3: Inhibit Time
TPDO3: Event timer
parameter
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned16
-
0x000003ff
0xFE
0x0000
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
TPDO4: COB-ID
TPDO4: Inhibit Time
TPDO4: Event timer
Transmit PDO1 mapping parameter
TPDO1 mapping entry 1
Unsigned32
Unsigned8
Unsigned16
Unsigned16
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
0x000004ff
0xFE
0x0000
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
rw
rw
192-121101 N04 June 2008
285
C3F_T30
Communication
CAN-No
Name
Bus format
Standard value
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
Minimum
value
0x0
0x0
0x0
Maximum
value
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
Acce
ss
rw
rw
rw
0x1A02.3
0x1A02.4
0x1A02.5
0x1A03
0x1A03.1
0x1A03.2
0x1A03.3
0x1A03.4
0x1A03.5

Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
Unsigned32
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x00000000
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0x0
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
0xFFFFFFFF
rw
rw
rw
rw
rw
Identity Object (0x1018)

This object is composed as follows:
Vendor-ID (0x1018.1)
Is stored in the FBI-EEPROM binarily from addr. 56...59 (low...high). Current value
= 0x02000089.
Product-Code (0x1018.2)
Is composed of the part of the order code "Faa lbb Tcc Mdd" to 0xaabbccdd, i.e.
the device with the order code C3S025V2F10l21T40M11 has the product code
0x10214011.
The product code is hex coded, but can be read decimally.
Revision number (0x1018.3)

Is composed of 5 digits of the software version no. of the DSP software and 3 digits
of the SV no. of the FBI softwre, i.e. the device with the DSP SV no. 01.08.02 and
the FBI SV no. 1.21 has the revision no. 0x10802121.
Serial number (0x1018.4)

Is stored in the CTP-EEPROM as a 10 digit ASCII string from addr. 56...65 (series
number of the device). A C3 with the series number 1423440001 has the serial
number 0x54D7F881.
Communication objects
The description of the CANopen communication objects can be found in the
corresponding help file.
286
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.5.4.
Communication
Acyclic parameter channel

Service Data Objects (SDO).............................................................................................287
Object up-/download via RS232 / RS485 .........................................................................289
6.5.4.1
Service Data Objects (SDO)

Asynchronous access to the object directory of Compax3 is implemented with the
help of the SDOs. The SDOs serve for parameter configuration and status
interrogation. Access to an individual object takes place via the RS232 / RS485
index and subindex of the object directory.
Attention!
A SDO is a confirmed service, therefore the SDO reply telegram must always
be awaited before a new telegram may be transmitted.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
287
C3F_T30
Communication
CiA405_SDO_Error (Abort Code): UDINT

In the case of an incorrect SDO transmission, the error cause is returned via the
"abort code".
Abort Code
0x0503 0000
0x0504 0000
0x0504 0001
0x0504 0002
0x0504 0003
0x0504 0004
0x0504 0005
0x0601 0000
0x0601 0001
0x0601 0002
0x0602 0000
0x0604 0041
0x0604 0042
0x0604 0043
0x0604 0047
0x0606 0000
0x0607 0010
0x0607 0012
0x0607 0013
0x0609 0011
0x0609 0030
0x0609 0031
0x0609 0032
0x0609 0036
0x0800 0000
0x0800 0020
0x0800 0021
0x0800 0022
0x0800 0023
288
Description
Toggle Bit was not alternated
SDO protocol time out
Client/server command designator invalid or unknown
Unknown block size (block mode only)
Unknown block number (block mode only)
CRC error (block mode only)
Outside of memory
Access to this object is not supported
Attempted read access to a write only object
Attempted write access to a read only object
The object does not exist in the object directory
The object cannot be mapped in a PDO
The size and number of the mapped objects exceeds the maximum PDO
length
General parameter incompatibility
General incompatibility in the device
Access infringement due to a hardware error
Data type does not fit, length of the service parameter does not fit
Data type does not fit, length of the service parameter too large
Data type does not fit, length of the service parameter too small
Subindex does not exist
Outside parameter value range (only for write access operations)
Parameter value too large
Parameter value too small
Maximum value smaller than minimum value
General error
Date cannot be transmitted or saved
Date cannot be transmitted or saved due to local device management
Date cannot be transmitted or stored due to device status
Dynamic generation of the object directory is impossible or no object
directory exists (the object directory is created from a file and an error
occurs due to a defective file)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
6.5.4.2
Object up-/download via RS232 / RS485

The up-/download takes place via the RS232 / RS485 objects C3_Request (Index
0x2200) and C3_Response (Index 0x2201). These have the data type data type
octet string with a length of 20 bytes (octets). Write/read of a C3 object is carried
out by writing of C3_Request with the corresponding data. When a C3 object is
read, the data appear in the C3_Response object .
Meaning of the data from C3_Request

Byte 1
Byte 2
Request header
AK
Subindex
Byte 3
Byte 4
Index
Byte 5
Byte 6
C3 object data (write)
D1
D2
...
...
Byte 19
Byte 20
...
...
D15
D16
AK: Job identifier; 3=read, 4= write

OD1..OD16: Object data; OD1 = High, OD16 = Low
Meaning of the data from C3_Response

Byte 1
Byte 2
Reply header
-
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
C3 object data (read)
OD1
OD2
...
...
Byte 19
Byte 20
...
...
OD15
OD16
O7
O8
...
O 20
...
x
Subi
x
x
...
...
x
x
x
D3
x
D4
...
...
x
D16
O5
O6
C3 object data
O7
O8
...
O 20
D1
D3
D4
...
D16
OD1..OD16: Object data; OD1 = High, OD16 = Low
Upload
RS232 / RS485
O1
O2
O3
O4
O5
O6
Access Object
C3 object request/reply
C3 object data
1. Write C3 object 20.2 with the value 0
Write
0x2200.0
4
2
0
20
0
0
2. read next C3 object index/subindex in C3 object 20.5
Write
0x2200.0
3
5
0
20
x
x
Read 0x2201.0
x
x
x
x
I_hi
I_lo
3. read the C3 object with the in index/subindex read in the C3 object 20.5
Write
0x2200.0
3
Subi I_hi
I_lo
x
x
Read
0x2201.0
x
x
x
x
D1
D2
4. Store C3 object index, subindex and data D1...D16 in table
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 until I_hi = I_lo = Subi = 0xFF
Download: Write the entire table of C3 objects.

RS232 / RS485
O1
O2
O3
O4
Access Object
C3 object request/reply
1. Write C3 object from the table
Write
0x2200.0
4
Subi I_hi
I_lo
2. Repeat step 1 until the end of the table
D2
192-121101 N04 June 2008
289
C3F_T30
Communication
6.5.4.3

Data formats of the bus objects (see page 268)
290
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.6
Communication
DeviceNet
DeviceNet Configuration...................................................................................................291
DeviceNet object classes .................................................................................................292
I22 Function
Please note:
A changed assignment (mapping) of the Input/Output Message is accepted
with Power off / Power on!
The length of the Input / Output Message is adapted to the real assignment
(mapping) (2...32).
Statement of Conformance
http://www.compax3.de/C3_DeviceNet_Statement_of_Conformance.pdf (in the
Internet)
Address or Baud rate settings (see page 33)
Connector assignment (see page 33)
6.6.1.
DeviceNet Configuration
Following are described the input windows of the configuration wizard.

6.6.1.1

No response
downramp / stop
192-121101 N04 June 2008
291
C3F_T30
Communication
6.6.2.
DeviceNet object classes

Overview of the DeviceNet object classes .......................................................................293
Object classes ..................................................................................................................293
The DeviceNet object classes described in this chapter are either set to
sensible standard values or they are set under menu control with the help of
the ServoManager.
The communication objects described below must be modified only for
special deviating settings.
I22 Function
DeviceNet characteristic data

DeviceNet
Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set

Standard 2.0 Group-2-Slave
Fieldbus I/O Data or Process Data
(Polled, COS/Cyclic I/O and Bit Strobe)
Implemented object classes
Identify, Message Router, DeviceNet,

Assembly, Connection, Acknowledge
Handler
Baud rate [kBit/s]
125, 250, 500
permissible cable length
up to 500m on 125Bit/s,
292
Max. number of nodes
63 Slave
Insulation
Isolated Device Physical Layer
EDS file
C3_DeviceNet.EDS
Conformance (file in the Internet)
http://www.compax3.de/C3_DeviceNet_S
tatement_of_Conformance.pdf
Further information:
Application example
(C3I22_DeviceNet.ZIP) on the Compax3
CD in the "\Examples" directory
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.6.2.1
Object name
Communication
Overview of the DeviceNet object classes
Identify
Message Router
DeviceNet
Assembly
Connection
Class
ID
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
Acknowledge Handler
Image of I/O Data
C3 object
0x2B
0x64
0x65
6.6.2.2
Instance
ID
1
1
1
101-103
1
2
3
4
1
1
20-3300
Description
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
I/O Messages
Explicit Messages
Polled I/O Data
Bit Strobe
Change of State (COS), Cyclic I/O Data
Necessary for connection class ID 05hex, instance ID 04
Manufacturer-specific object class image of I/O data
Manufacturer-specific object class C3 object
Object classes
Detailed information on the topic of "object classes" can be found in the online help
of the device.
6.6.3.

Data formats of the bus objects (see page 268)
192-121101 N04 June 2008
293
C3F_T30
Communication
6.7
Ethernet Powerlink
Configuring Ethernet Powerlink / EtherCAT .....................................................................294
The Ethernet Powerlink option is available with the Compax3 devices

C3I30Txx!
The EtherCAT option is available with the Compax3 devices C3I31Txx!
6.7.1.
Configuring Ethernet Powerlink / EtherCAT

CN Controlled Node (Slave) .............................................................................................294
Slave with configuration via master ..................................................................................294
Possible PDO assignment................................................................................................295
Following are described the input windows of the Ethernet Powerlink / EtherCAT
configuration wizard.
6.7.1.1
CN Controlled Node (Slave)

Compax3 is the slave of an Ethernet / EtherCAT master; the bus configuration is
made via the ServoManager
6.7.1.2
Slave with configuration via master

Select "Slave with configuration via master". for operating mode and mapping via
master.
Then run through the wizard completely.
6.7.1.3

No response
downramp / stop
294
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.7.1.4
Communication
Possible PDO assignment

Via the process data objects (RPDO and TPDO), actual values and Setpoint values
are cyclically exchanged between Compax3 and the Ethernet Powerlink Controlled
Nodes (Slaves).
The cyclic PDOs are configured with the aid of the Compax3 ServoManager:
The PDOs are set separately for the transmission directions
Slave Compax3 (RPDO)
Compax3 Slave (TPDO)
The objects that can be put on the process data channel can be found in the "
Compax3 Objects (see page 320)"!
192-121101 N04 June 2008
295
C3F_T30
Communication
6.8
HEDA Bus
HEDA standard mode.......................................................................................................297
HEDA expansion (HEDA advanced) ................................................................................299
Coupling objects ...............................................................................................................318
HEDA: High Efficiency Data Access: Option M10 or M11

Real-time data transfer
High-stage axis synchronization
fixed transfer rate of 10MBit/s
Jitter < 300ns (Bus) which results in a high synchronicity
Peer-to-Peer communication
maximum cable length 50m (greater lengths on request)
1 Master / 31 Slave: Individual HEDA axis address inthe range between 1...32
fixed cycle time of 0.5ms
Synchronization of the scanning grid of the digital control loops
and of the setpoint generation
cyclic data exchange
acyclic data exchange of time-uncritical values
HEDA wiring (see page 353)
Function of the HEDA LEDs

Green LED (left)
HEDA module energized
Red LED (right)

Error in the receive area
Possible causes:
at the Master
no slave sending back
Wrong cabling
Terminal plug is missing
several masters are sending in the same slot
at the slave
several masters in the system
no master active
no transmission from one or several receive slots (neither by the master nor by
another slave)
The configuration may take place in two different ways:

HEDA standard: Simple Master -> Slave communication
HEDA advanced: Communication Master <-> Slave and Slave <-> Slave.
296
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.8.1.
Communication
HEDA standard mode

HEDA-Master ...................................................................................................................298
HEDA-Slave .....................................................................................................................298
The HEDA option (option M10 or M11) can be used to send 4 process values in the
"HEDA standard" operating mode from master to slave. A return transmission from
Slave to Master is possible with "HEDA advanced".
First choose, if Compax3 is HEDA Master or HEDA Slave:
HEDA master: in order to send process values
HEDA slave: in order to receive process values
Please respect that only 1 HEDA station can be Master.

Error reaction (from Compax3) at bus failure:
activated: Compax3 switches to error state in the case of a bus error. (Error
reaction 2: Downramp / apply brake / de-energize.)
deactivated: Compax3 will ignore a bus error.
6.8.1.1

No response
downramp / stop
192-121101 N04 June 2008
297
C3F_T30
Communication
6.8.1.2
HEDA-Master
You can transmit 4 process values with max. 7 words (one process value per
channel).
The 1st process value (takes 3 words) is reserved for the axis synchronization.
You may choose between:
Process - setpoint position (Object 2000.1)
Process - actual position (Object 2200.2)
Position from external setpoint (object 2020.1)
Signal read in via Analog channel 4 (X11/17 and X1/18), encoder input or step /
direction input in the master.
Principle:
Compax3
Encoder
HEDA
Master
Compax3
Slave
HEDA
Compax3
Slave
Step / Direction
+/-10V
Attention in the case of a configuration download with master-slave

coupling (electronic gearbox, cam)
Switch Compax3 to currentless before starting the configuration
download: Master and Slave axis
Position from virtual Master (object 2000.2)
You can transmit 3 additional process values with 4 words data max. You can
make your choice between the Compax3 PD objects.
Note:
6.8.1.3
Please use the coupling objects (see page 318) for axis coupling.
HEDA-Slave
The transferred process values can be read and assigned to objects in the
configuration wizard (e.g. array objects) in the HEDA slave.
Objects with appropriate data width (corresponding to the process values read in)
must be assigned.
The 1st process value is used as input process value (object 3920.1: HEDA
SignalProcessing Input) for axis synchronization. The target for the process values
2, 3, 4 can be selected from a list in the configuration wizard.
298
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.8.2.
Communication
HEDA expansion (HEDA advanced)

The possibilities of the HEDA expansion .........................................................................299
Technical data of the HEDA interface / overview .............................................................300
Definitions.........................................................................................................................301
Calling up the HEDA wizard in the C3 ServoManager .....................................................301
Configuration of the HEDA communication......................................................................301
6.8.2.1
The possibilities of the HEDA expansion

The HEDA option (option M10 or M11) can be used to exchange process values in
the "HEDA advanced" operating mode.
from Slave to Master
from Slave to Master and
from Slave to Slave.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
299
C3F_T30
Communication
6.8.2.2
Technical data of the HEDA interface / overview

General HEDA data
Synchronous, bidirectional, deterministic real-time bus.
Bus access via time sharing (slots), Master/Slave, Producer/Consumer.
(synchronization exactitude <1s).
Bus cycle time 500s, distributed into 20 time slots 25s.
18 slots cyclic transmitting and receiving data channels (Slot 0 .. 17).
2 slots reserved for acyclic communication.
Telegrams (frames) with max. 7 words 16 bit can be sent and received in a slot.
Freely configurable assignment of the cyclic transmit(Tx)/receive(rx)-slots to the
stations.
The transmitting and receiving data are freely definable via mapping tables.
Master-Slave as well as Slave-Slave communication (cross-communication) are
possible.
A master=>slave frame in slot x can be received by every slave.
A slave=>slave frame (cross-communication) in slot x can be received by every
bus node.
Compax3-specific HEDA data:

The Compaxa3 system cycle time is synchronized with the bus cycle time.
System cycle time 500s, distributed into 4 position control cycles 125s.
For system-immanent reasons, only one slot is able to send and receive during
the same position control cycle (every 125s).
Transmit- and receive slot can differ within one position controller cycle.
The Master can receive frames from 4 slaves max.
Principle:
18
4
Receive
Transmit
Transmit
Transmit
HEDA Master
HEDA Slave
HEDA Slave
HEDA Slave
Transmit
Receive
Receive
Receive
18
Displayed are the number of the possible telegrams (Frames).
300
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
6.8.2.3
Communication
Definitions
DSP Format
Objects with this format:

are not reset
are unlimited: you have a value range between -223 and 223-1
Frame
Mapping
Mapping Table
Coupling objects
Receive
Slot
Transmit
Process data
6.8.2.4
are suitable as coupling objects

If the DSP Format is not selected, the objects are transmitted
into the described formats (see page 320). Please note that
the Bus formats Y2 and Y4 (see page 269) are set against the
scaling factors.
Telegram of process values with a data width of 7 words.
Image of process data on a communication channel (slot)
Overview of process values that can be put on a
communication channel (slot).
Are suitable as master signals for electronic coupling and must
be in the DSP format.
Received:
communication channel
Send:
Objects, which are suitable for use in the cyclic data channel.
Calling up the HEDA wizard in the C3 ServoManager

The "HEDA Advanced" wizard can be found in the C3 ServoManager tree under
communication.
Please observe:
The "HEDA advanced" wizard settings overwrite the settings of the HEDA
standard wizard!
6.8.2.5
Configuration of the HEDA communication

Error reaction to a bus failure .......................................................................................... 301
Data transfer Master Slave and back ........................................................................... 302
Example: Communication Master Slave and back ....................................................... 309
Data transfer from Slave to Slave.................................................................................... 313

No response
downramp / stop
192-121101 N04 June 2008
301
C3F_T30
Communication
Data transfer Master Slave and back

Setting the HEDA master................................................................................................. 304
Setting the HEDA slave ................................................................................................... 307
In standard applications the master sends process values to the slaves and reads
the answers from the slaves.
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
**
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
Mapping Table
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Receive
Transmit
HEDA Master
HEDA Slave
Transmit
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mapping Table
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
**
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
* only one of the assigned slots per frame group may be activated on the slave
transmit side (this is blocked by the C3 ServoManager)
* only one of the assigned slots per frame group may be activated on the master or
slave receive side (this is blocked by the C3 ServoManager)
Print version available in the Internet
http://apps.parker.com/euro_emd/EME/downloads/compax3/HEDA-Formulare/HEDA-Standard.pdf
302
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
Mapping Table
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Receive
Transmit
HEDA Master
HEDA Slave
Transmit
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mapping Table
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
Functionality:
The master can send 4 different frames (F1,... F4). A frame can be sent from
several slots:
Frame:
F1
F2
F3
F4
possible slots:
0 ... 2
3 ... 7
8 ... 12
13 ... 17
Each frame is assigned a mapping table number.
The individual slaves read in the slot from where their relevant data are sent.
It is necessary to define a mapping table in the slave, stating where the individual
process data are to be written (e.g. into an array-object).
The assignment of the mapping table is made via the mapping table number which
is transferred via HEDA.
For this reason, the receive mapping table number and the transfer mapping table
number must always be the same.
Important:
Receive-Mapping-Tablen-Number = Transmit-Mapping-Table-Number
192-121101 N04 June 2008
303
C3F_T30
Communication
Setting the HEDA master

HEDA master settings:
activate HEDA Master

Axis address = 0
Setting the error reaction (from Compax3) at bus failure:
activated: Compax3 switches to error state in the case of a bus error.
304
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Master transmission slots (Transmit Slots)
Important:
For standard applications (data transfer master slave and back) all slots in
the master must be transmitting.
for this reason you should activate all transmit slots (0...17, in the lower area of
the wizard window).
Please assign, according to your requirements, a mapping table to each of the 4
transmit frames.
The contents of the transmit mapping table is defined in the next wizard window.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
305
C3F_T30
Communication
Master receive slots

ctivate the receive slots from which the slave sends data (corresponding to the
settings in the slave).
In each of the 125s cycles (slot 0...2, slot 3...7, slot 8...12, slot 13...17) data can
be received only via one slot, see also the HEDA communication structure (see
page 302).
The assignment of the data is made via the mapping table number (which was
defined in the slave), this number is also received.
In the Wizard window "Receive Mapping table", it is defined under this mapping
table number where the data received are to be written to.
Master Transmit Mapping Table (max. 4)

Here the transmit mapping tables, which were assigned to the max. 4 transmit
125s slots, are defined.
Procedure:
Selection of the corresponding transmit mapping table.
Selection of the Compax3 objects to be transmitted.
The assignment of the mapping table is permanently identified and displayed.
Up to 7 words are possible.
How many words are used by an object (see page 320) depends on the bus
format (see page 268) / DSP format
Note:
306
For axis coupling, please use the coupling objects (see page 318) in the DSP
format (see page 301) (selected by clicking on the DSP switch).
Please make sure that the DSP switch is activated on the master and the slave
side in DSP format.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Master Receive Mapping Table (max. 4)

Please select the mapping table number, which was defined in the slave (under
transmit mapping table).
Please enter where the data received shall be written (e.g. into an array object).
Please use the data formats as defined in the mapping table of the slave.
Note:
For axis coupling, please use the coupling object (see page 318) O3920.1 in the
DSP format (see page 301) as an input (selection by clicking on the DSP switch).
side in DSP format.
Setting the HEDA slave
HEDA slave settings:

Activating the HEDA Slave
Assigning the axis address = 0 (can be changed by clicking)
Setting the error reaction (from Compax3) at bus failure:
activated: Compax3 switches to error state in the case of a bus error.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
307
C3F_T30
Communication
Slave receive slots

Activate the receive slots, from where the slave is to receive the data.
In each of the four 125s cycles (slot 0...2, slot 3...7, slot 8...12, slot 13...17) data
can be received only via one slot, see also the HEDA communication structure
(see page 302).
The assignment of the data is made via the mapping table number (which was
defined in the master), this number is also received.
In the Wizard window "Receive Mapping table", it is defined under this mapping
table number where the data received are to be written to.
Slave transmission slots (Transmit Slots)

Activate the transmit slots, from where the slave is to send the data.
In each of the four 125s cycles (slot 0...2, slot 3...7, slot 8...12, slot 13...17) data
can be transmitted only via one slot, see also the HEDA communication
structure (see page 302).
Please make sure, that no other slave can send on this slot.
Now you can assign a mapping table to each individual activated slot.
Please consider, that transmit mapping table numbers are only used once in
one transmit/receive range.
The contents of the transmit mapping table is defined in the next wizard window.
Slave Transmit Mapping table

Here the transmit mapping tables, which were assigned to the transmit slots
activated before, are defined.
Procedure:
Selection of the corresponding transmit mapping table.
Selection of the Compax3 objects to be transmitted.
The assignment of the mapping table is permanently identified and displayed.
Up to 7 words are possible.
How many words are used by an object (see page 320) depends on the bus
format (see page 268).
Note:
For axis coupling, please use the coupling objects (see page 318) in the DSP
format (see page 301) (selected by clicking on the DSP switch).
side in DSP format.
Slave Receive Mapping table

Please select the mapping table number, which was defined in the master (under
transmit mapping table).
Please enter now, where the received data are to be written.
Please use the data formats as defined in the mapping table of the master.
Note:
308
For axis coupling, please use the coupling object (see page 318) O3920.1 in the
DSP format (see page 301) as an input (selection by clicking on the DSP switch).
side in DSP format.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Example: Communication Master Slave and back

HEDa communication structure:
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
Mapping Table
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Master
HEDA Slave
Transmit
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
2
F1 F2 F3 F4
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mapping Table
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
192-121101 N04 June 2008
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
309
C3F_T30
Communication
Master and Slave 1 to 3 (from left to right).
Task:
Master Transmit
Master sends on:
Slot 0...2: Mapping table 1
Slot 3..0.7: Mapping table 2
Slave Receive
Slave 1 reads on:
Slot 2: Mapping table 1
Slot 3: Mapping table 2 and
Slave 2 reads on:
Slot 13: Mapping table 5.
Slave 3 reads on
Slot 9: Mapping table 4.
Slave Transmit
Slave 1 sends on:
Slave 2 sends on:
Slave 3 sends on:
Master Receive
Master receives on:
310
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
C3 ServoManger settings:
Slot - settings Master:
Example for transmit mapping table 1 on the master or slave
Slot settings slave 1:
192-121101 N04 June 2008
311
C3F_T30
Communication
Example for receive mapping table 1 at slave 1 (is also valid for slave 3, master)
312
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Data transfer from Slave to Slave.

HEDA communication structure with data transfer from Slave to Slave:
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
Mapping Table
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Receive
Transmit
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
HEDA Master
HEDA Slave
Transmit
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mapping Table
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
Print version available in the Internet

http://apps.parker.com/divapps/eme/EME/downloads/compax3/HEDA-Formulare/HEDA_adv.pdf
If a transmit slot of the HEDA master is not assigned, the master will pass the
received data directly on to the slaves (independent of his reading from this slot or
not).
I.e. if a transmit slot of the master where a slave is sending is disabled, the data will
be passed on and can be received from any slave on this slot.
It is, however, valid:

All transmit slots must send!
This is also true, if a slave sends on this slot.
Please note:
Please ensure that all slots are used for transmission, the C3 ServoManager
cannot verify this fact!
In order to verify this, please use the HEDA communication structure.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
313
C3F_T30
Communication
Example 1: Communication Master - Slave and Slave - Slave.

Task:
MT3
MT2
MT1
Master
Slave 1
MT3
Slave 2
MT4
Slave 3
MT5
MT6
MT7
MT1 ... MT7: Mapping table 1... 7
Step-by-step setting of the HEDA communications:

Firstly, activate all transmit slots of the master in order to ensure that all transmit
slots of the master are sending:
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
Mapping Table
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Receive
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
HEDA Master
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Transmit
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
Mapping Table
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
314
192-121101 N04 June 2008
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
Parker EME
Communication
The mapping tahbles are now distributed to different slots:

Mapping Table
MT1
MT2
MT3
MT4
MT5
MT6
MT7
Note:
Slot
1
4
11
16
2 (& 0, 1)
9 (& 8, 10, 12)
13 (& 14, 15, 17)
Slave transmit range
Master transmit
range
The transmit slots where a slave-slave communication is taking place (Slot 11 &
16), must be deactivated in the master!
Otherwise, the master would overwrite the data of the slave.
This results in the following image:

S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
Mapping Table
Transmit
F1 F2 F3 F4
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
Transmit
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
HEDA Master
F1 F2 F3 F4
Transmit
Transmit
HEDA Slave
HEDA Slave
HEDA Slave
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
6
F1 F2 F3 F4
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
Receive
F1 F2 F3 F4
7 Mapping Table
Transmit
switch off
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
set all slots except slave->slave relation
192-121101 N04 June 2008
315
C3F_T30
Communication
The following objects are transmitted:

TRANSMIT (send)
RECEIVE
RECEIVE
Mapping
Table
Source Objects
Target
1
2
3
S1
S1
S1
C3Array.Col01Row01 (1901.1)
C3Plus.DeviceState_Statusword1 (1000.3)
C3Plus.ProfileGenerators_SG1Position (2000.1)
M
M
M
S2
S2
S3
C3Plus.PositionController_DemandValue
(2200.1)
C3Plus.ProfilGenerators_PG2Position (2000.2)
6
7
M
M
C3Plus.DeviceControl_Controlword1 (1100.3)
S1
S2
S3
S1
S1
C3Plus.HEDA_SignalProcessing_Input
(3920.1)
(3920.1)
(3920.1)
C3Plus.DeviceControl_Controlword1 (1100.3)
M: Master
S1, S2, S3: Slave 1 ... 3
Word form for the objects to be transmitted in the internet
http://apps.parker.com/euro_emd/EME/downloads/compax3/HEDAFormulare/communications-table.doc.
316
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Example 2: 4-axis application with HEDA

Task:
four-axis processing machine
Setting the steps via virtual master
Forwards and backwards movement with the master (closed curve)
Linearized feed movement with Slave 1 = rotating blade (open curve)
Position synchronous operation of slave 2 with respect to slave 1 with slip
correction (use of C3_Shift_Position)
Fixed position assignment of a turning axis slave 3 to slave 2 with consideration
of the correction movement of slave 2
Virtual
Master
360
C3.StatusPosition_DemandValue2 o680.2
C3Plus.ProfileGenerators_PG2Position o2000.2
HEDA_SignalProcessing_Input o3920.1
100
100
360
Setpoint
Setpoint
Generator
100
360
360
Setpoint
Generator
100
100
Setpoint
Generator
Setpoint
Generator
C3_ShiftPosition
C3Plus.ProfileGenerators_SG1Position o2000.1
C3Plus.PositionController_DemandValue o2200.1
Control
Loop
Control
Loop
Control
Loop
Control
Loop
C3Plus.PositionController_ActualValue o2200.2
Master
Gearbox: i=10
Travel Distance per
Revol: 127/10
Slave 1
Gearbox: i=5
Travel Distance per
Revol: 233/5
Slave 2
Gearbox: i=3
Travel Distance per
Revol: 100/3
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Slave 3
Gearbox: i=7
Travel Distance per
Revol: 360/7
317
C3F_T30
Communication
Master / Slave Configuration of the reference system

Configuration
Travel distance per motor revolution
Master
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
127
10
233
5
100
3
360
7
100
1
100
1
100
1
360
1
"Virtual master" as HEDA Master
yes
no
no
Path per motor revolution of the HEDA Master

Numerator
Denominator
not
required
233
5
100
3
Create cams with the CamDesinger

Distance Counter Reset Position - Numerator 360
1
Distance Counter Reset Position Denominator
360
1
100
1
100
1
Numerator
Denominator
Reset distance
Numerator
Denominator
Signal source (Master axis)
Virtual Master
Reset distance
Use as current signal source
360
yes
Source HEDA (Slave axis)
The C3 ServoManager projects (configuration) can be found on the Compax3

CD: ...\Examples\HEDA\Master.c3p, slave1.c3p, slave2.c3p, slave3.c3p
6.8.3.
Coupling objects
Coupling objects (framed objects) are suitable as master signal for electronic
coupling and should be in the DSP Format (see page 301).
MC_MoveSuperImposed
Distance
HEDA
2200.2 C3Plus.
Position Controller_
ActualValue
Direction
-1 / +1
Structure
of Cam or
Gearing
SD
+
+
Direction
-1 / +1
Direction
-1 / +1
RV
2000.2 C3Plus.Profile
Generators_PG2Position
Virtual
Master
2000.1 C3Plus.Profil
Generators_SG1Position
2200.1 C3Plus.Position
Controller_DemandValue
Controlloop
SD
*
681.9 C3.Status
Speed_ActualFilter
RS
680.2 C3. StatusPosition_

DemandValue2
318
Distance
2020.1 C3.External
Signal_Position
3021.2 C3Cam.Signal
Source_Position
3920.1 C3Plus.
HEDA_Signal
Processing_Input
C3_ShiftPosition
RS
681.4 C3.
StatusSpeed_
DemandValue
C3SM W izard
+/-10V
680.4 C3.
StatusPosition_
DemandValue
680.5 C3.Status
Position_Actual
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Communication
Input value for HEDA couplings is object 3920.1.
Note:
* This values are not even reset by a home run.

Direction -1 / +1: with direction inversion (in the configuration wizard) these
coupling values are inverted, relative to the drive direction (factor -1).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
319
Compax3 - Objects
C3F_T30
7. Compax3 - Objects
Object overview sorted by object name (C3FT30) ...........................................................320
T30F Objects for the process data channel .....................................................................331
Detailed object list ............................................................................................................332
Compax3 objects are encapsulated in the "C3, C3Array, ..." modules in the
IEC61131-3 programming environment (CoDeSys).
Enter the object names before the "." and the corresponding list of objects
will appear.
Objects that are not described here are reserved objects!
Note on searching objects:

If the object number is known, you can enter it directly in the index.
In addition you can find the CoDeSys name of the objects in the index.
Note on bus numbers (PNU, CAN-No.):

The bus numbers of the array can be found in the description on column 1, line 1
(Object 1901.1)
Set objects to valid
Save objects
permanently
320
Please note that certain objects are not valid (read by Compax3) immediately after
a change. This is described in the heading "Valid after".
These objects are converted to internal variables the Compax3 "VP" command
(write in object 210.10 with value <> 0).
It should also be noted that modified objects are not permanently stored in the
Compax3, i.e. the changes are lost after the power (24 VDC) is turned off.
The object Save objects permanently (write in object 20.11 with value <> 0)" can
be used to save objects in a flash memory so they are retained even if the power
fails.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
7.1
Compax3 - Objects
Object overview sorted by object name (C3FT30)
No.
Object name
Object
172.5
172.7
173.5
173.7
174.5
174.7
175.5
175.7
176.5
176.7
177.5
177.7
634.4
C3.AnalogInput0_ActualValue
C3.AnalogInput0_ActualValueFiltered
C3.AnalogOutput0_DemandValue
Actual value X1:IN0

Filtered actual value X1:IN0
Actual value X1:IN1
Actual value X1:IN2
Actual value X1:IN3
Actual value X1:IN4
Actual value X1:IN5
Setpoint for analog output 0
635.4
setpoint for analog output 1
2101.14
2101.11
Acceleration feedback (A2)

Control signal gain of auxiliary axis
2101.8
2101.7
2101.13
2100.14
2100.12
2100.21
2100.11
2100.10
2100.13
990.1
C3.ControllerTuning_2_ActuatingSignalGain_spee
d
C3.ControllerTuning_2_FilterAccel2
C3.ControllerTuning_2_FilterSpeed2
C3.ControllerTuning_AccelFeedback_Ka
C3.ControllerTuning_ActuatingSignalGain_speed
C3.ControllerTuning_FilterAccel_us
C3.ControllerTuning_FilterAccel2
C3.ControllerTuning_FilterSpeed2
C3.Delay_MasterDelay
Filter actual acceleration 2

Filter actual velocity 2
Speed feedback (A2)
open loop gain
Filter - Actual acceleration
Filter actual acceleration 2
Filter actual velocity 2
Speed feedback (A1)
Setpoint delay for bus master
1.15
120.3
120.2
121.2
133.4
C3.Device_ProfileID
C3.DigitalInput_DebouncedValue
C3.DigitalInput_Value
C3.DigitalInputAddition_Value
C3.DigitalOutputAddition_Enable
Profibus profile number

Input word of I/O option
Activate input/output option M10/M12
965
21
0x6100.1
175
350
133.2
133.3
C3.DigitalOutputAddition_Error
C3.DigitalOutputAddition_Value
Error in I/O option

Output word for I/O option
140.3
C3.DigitalOutputWord_DemandState
Command value of the digital outputs
2401.8
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_negative
_Pressure
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_positiv_
Pressure
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_FactorDenomin
ator
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_FactorNumerato
r
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Type
_Pressure
Pressure
ator
r
_Pressure
Pressure
ator
r
_Pressure
Pressure
ator
r
C3.ErrorHistory_1
C3.ExternalSignal_Position
C3.ExternalSignal_Speed
C3.FBI_Interpolation_AccelStatus
Direction dependent gain (pressure

control)
control)
denominator
Direction dependent gain numerator
2401.7
2401.3
2401.2
2401.1
2411.8
2411.7
2411.3
2411.2
2411.1
2421.8
2421.7
2421.3
2421.2
2421.1
2431.8
2431.7
2431.3
2431.2
2431.1
550.2
2020.1
2020.2
3925.23
3925.1
C3.FBI_Interpolation_SubModeSelect
3925.22
C3.FBI_Interpolation_VelocityStatus
PNU
CAN No.
Format
PD
24
0x2019
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
103
0x201A
I16
yes
U16
U16
no
no
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
U16
I16
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
0x6100.2
0x6300.3
OS
V2
V2
V2
V2
no
yes
yes
yes
no
351
176
0x6300.4
0x6300.2
V2
V2
no
yes
22
0x6300.1
V2
yes
I32
no
I32
no
I16
no
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
I16
no
VP
Direction dependent gain of output 0

control)
control)
denominator
I16
I32
no
no
I32
no
I16

control)
control)
denominator
control)
control)
denominator
Error (n-1) in the error history
Position from external signal source
Speed from external signal source
Input value of the acceleration of
O3925.21
Interpolation method
Input speed of the differentiated input
position O2121.1
192-121101 N04 June 2008
947.1
0x201D.2
0x2095.1
0x60C0
Valid
beginning
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
Bus Object Ixx

20
21/22/30
-
X
-
no
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
I16
no
VP
I16
I32
no
no
I32
no
I16
no
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
I16
no
VP
I16
I32
no
no
I32
no
I16
no
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
I16
no
VP
I16
U16
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
no
no
yes
yes
no
VP
-
X
-
X
X
I16
no
no
Immediat
ely
-
C4_3
321
Compax3 - Objects
C3F_T30
No.
Object name
Object
PNU
Format
PD
950.1
C3.FBI_RxPD_Mapping_Object_1
915.0
U16
no
950.2
1. Object of the setpoint PZD

(Profibus)
2. object of the Setpoint value PZD
CAN No.
950.5
915.4
U16
no
950.6
915.5
U16
no
950.7
915.6
U16
no
950.8
915.7
U16
no
3921.1
C3.FBI_SignalProcessing0_Input
I32
yes
951.1
C3.FBI_TxPD_Mapping_Object_1
Interpolation input CanSync,

PowerLink
1. object of actual value PZD
916.0
U16
no
951.2
916.1
U16
no
951.3
916.2
U16
no
951.4
916.3
U16
no
951.5
916.4
U16
no
951.6
916.5
U16
no
951.7
916.6
U16
no
951.8
916.7
U16
no
2050.10
2050.9
2050.8
2010.24
2010.23
2010.21
2011.5
2011.4
1141.8
1141.7
696.1
696.2
696.3
402.2
402.1
425.2
C3.FeedForward_2_Accel_FFW
C3.FeedForward_2_Speed_FFW
C3.FeedForward_2_Valve
C3.FeedForward_Valve
C3.FeedForwardExternal_FilterAccel_us
C3.FeedForwardExternal_FilterSpeed_us
C3.GEAR_actual_master_speed
C3.GEAR_actual_masterposition
C3.HydraulicPower_Axis1
C3.HydraulicPower_Axis2
C3.HydraulicPower_Sum
C3.Limit_SpeedNegative
C3.Limit_SpeedPositive
C3.LimitForcePressure_FollowingErrorTime
C4_3
C4_3
U16
C4_3
C4_3
U16
U16
U16
C4_3
C4_3
I32
I32
I32
I16
I16
I16
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
425.1
C3.LimitForcePressure_FollowingErrorWindow
C4_3
no
425.6
C3.LimitForcePressure_ForceReachedAux
BOOL
no
425.5
C3.LimitForcePressure_ForceReachedMain
BOOL
no
425.3
C3.LimitForcePressure_MaxForce
Acceleration feedforward (A2)

Speed feedforward (A2)
Valve feedforward auxiliary axis
Acceleration feedforward (A1)
Speed feedforward (A1)
Valve feedforward
Filter time constant ext. Acceleration
Filter time constant ext. Velocity
Master speed for Gearing
Position input value for Gearing
Control signal main axis
Control signal auxiliary axis
Sum of the hydraulic corner power
Maximum permissible negative speed 318
Maximum permissible positive speed 317
Trigger time for event "Control
deviation of force controller"
Max. control deviation of force
controller
Force of auxiliary axis in the control
window
Force of main axis in the control
window
Maximum force
Valid
beginning
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
VP
915.1
U16
no
950.3
915.2
U16
no
950.4
915.3
U16
no
I32
no
425.4
425.7
C3.LimitForcePressure_Window
C3.LimitForcePressure_WindowTime
I32
U16
no
no
410.3
C3.LimitPosition_Negative
410.2
3310.1
200.10
200.7
0x2050
0x2058
0x200A
0x2009
Window for "Force achieved"

Trigger time for message "Force
achieved"
negative end limit
322
0x607D.1
C4_3
no
C3.LimitPosition_Positive
positive end limit
321
0x607D.2
C4_3
no
C3.Multiturnemulation_Status
C3.NormFactorY2_ActualValue2_Y2
Status of the Multiturn emulation

Normalization factor for 1000.14
I16
V2
no
no
C3.NormFactorY2_ActualValue3
V2
no
355.7
0x2020.7
200.8
355.8
0x2020.8
V2
no
200.5
C3.NormFactorY2_Array_Col2
Scaling factor recipe arrays column 2
355.5
0x2020.5
V2
no
200.9
C3.NormFactorY2_DemandValue2_Y2
no
C3.NormFactorY2_DemandValue3

1100.14
V2
200.4
355.4
0x2020.4
V2
no
200.6
355.6
0x2020.6
V2
no
200.1
C3.NormFactorY2_Speed
Scaling factor for Y2 speeds
355.1
0x2020.1
V2
no
200.3
C3.NormFactorY2_Voltage
Scaling factor for Y2 voltages
355.3
0x2020.3
V2
no
201.7
356.7
0x2021.7
V2
no
201.8
356.8
0x2021.8
V2
no
201.13
356.13
0x2021.13
V2
no
201.4
C3.NormFactorY4_Array_Col1
Scaling factor recipe arrays column 1
356.4
0x2021.4
V2
no
201.5
356.5
0x2021.5
V2
no
322
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Bus Object Ixx

20
21/22/30
X
X
Immediat
ely
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Parker EME
Compax3 - Objects
No.
Object name
Object
PNU
CAN No.
Format
PD
201.6
356.6
0x2021.6
V2
no
201.12
356.12
0x2021.12
V2
no
201.11
C3.NormFactorY4_FBI_SignalProcessing
356.11
0x2021.11
V2
no
201.1
C3.NormFactorY4_Speed
Normalization factor for bus

interpolation
CANSync/EthernetPowerLink
Scaling factor for Y4 speeds
356.1
0x2021.1
V2
no
201.3
C3.NormFactorY4_Voltage
Scaling factor for Y4 voltages
356.3
0x2021.3
V2
no
20.1
C3.ObjectDir_Objekts-->FLASH
Store objects permanently (bus)
339
0x2017
I16
no
20.10
C3.ObjectDir_ReadObjects
Read objects from Flash
I16
no
20.11
C3.ObjectDir_WriteObjects
Save objects permanently
I16
no
2260.8
C3.PositionController_2_TrackingErrorFilter_us
Following error filter of auxiliary axis
U16
no
420.3
C3.PositioningAccuracy_FollowingErrorTimeout
Following Error Time
331
0x6066
U16
no
420.2
420.6
420.8
420.1
C3.PositioningAccuracy_FollowingErrorWindow
C3.PositioningAccuracy_PositionReached
C3.PositioningAccuracy_PositionReached_2
C3.PositioningAccuracy_Window
Following error limit

Position reached
Position reached (auxiliary axis)
Positioning window for position
reached
In Position Window Time
330
0x6065
328
0x6067
C4_3
I32
I32
C4_3
no
no
no
no
329
0x6068
420.7
C3.PositioningAccuracy_WindowTime
165.1
C3.PressureArray_Index0
U16
no
I16
no
I16
no
Analog Input X1:IN0 measured

pressure in mbar
pressure in mbar
Reference pressure 10
165.2
165.11
I16
no
165.12
I16
no
165.13
I16
no
165.3
I16
no
165.4
I16
no
165.5
I16
no
165.6
I16
no
165.7

pressure in mbar
pressure in mbar
pressure in mbar
pressure in mbar
I16
no
165.8
I16
no
165.9
I16
no
165.10
I16
no
2250.22
2250.8
2251.22
2251.8
I32
U32
I32
U32
2210.8
2270.8
C3.SpeedController_ActuatingSignal_filt
682.5
C3.StatusAccel_Actual
682.6
682.4
682.7
692.4
692.3
692.2
692.1
692.5
695.11
C3.StatusAccel_ActualFilter
C3.StatusAccel_DemandValue
C3.StatusAccel_FeedForwardAccel
C3.StatusFeedback_EncoderCosine
C3.StatusFeedback_EncoderSine
C3.StatusFeedback_FeedbackCosineDSP
C3.StatusFeedback_FeedbackSineDSP
C3.StatusFeedback_FeedbackVoltage[Vpp]
C3.StatusForce_Actual
695.14
C3.StatusForce_Actual2
695.10
C3.StatusForce_Demand
695.13
C3.StatusForce_Demand2
695.12
C3.StatusForce_Error
695.15
C3.StatusForce_Error2
695.1
695.2
697.4
C3.StatusForce_Force1
C3.StatusForce_Force2
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_AddAcce
l_YA
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_AddAcce
l_YA2
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_AddSpee
d_YV
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_AddSpee
d_YV2
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_IPart_YI
Control signal filter of force

Delay time constant T1
Control signal filter of force (A2)
PID force controller 2 delay time
constant of the D-term T1
Control signal filter of position
Control signal filter of position
auxiliary axis
Status of actual acceleration
unfiltered
Status of filtered actual acceleration
Status demand acceleration
Status acceleration feed forward
Status of analog input cosine
Status of analog input sine
Status of cosine in signal processing
Status of sine in signal processing
Status of feedback level
Actual value force controller main
axis [N]
Actual value force controller auxiliary
axis [N]
Setpoint value force controller main
axis [N]
Setpoint value force controller
auxiliary axis [N]
Control deviation force controller
main axis [N]
Control deviation force controller
auxiliary axis [N]
Force of force sensor main axis
Force of force sensor of auxiliary axis
697.14
697.3
697.13
697.2
Valid
beginning
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Bus Object Ixx

20
21/22/30
X
X
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
no
no
no
no
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
VP
VP
U16
U16
no
no
VP
VP
I32
no
221
I32
I32
C4_3
I32
I32
I32
I32
C4_3
I32
no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
no
yes
222
I32
yes
I32
no
I32
no
I32
no
I32
no
I32
I32
C4_3
no
no
no
C4_3
no
Speed feedback (A1)
C4_3
no
Speed feedback (A2)
C4_3
no
Control signal I-term (A1)
C4_3
no
192-121101 N04 June 2008
325
0x200E
323
Compax3 - Objects
C3F_T30
No.
Object name
Object
Format
PD
697.12
697.5
Control signal I-term (A2)

Control signal total (A1)
C4_3
C4_3
no
no
Valid
beginning
-
Bus Object Ixx

20
21/22/30
-
Control signal total (A2)
C4_3
no
Control signal P-term (A1)
C4_3
no
Control signal P-term (A2)
C4_3
no
680.5
680.15
680.13
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_IPart_YI2
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_PosCtrl_
Ycom
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_PosCtrl_
Ycom2
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_PPart_Y
P
C3.StatusPosController_ActuatingSignal_PPart_Y
P2
C3.StatusPosition_Actual
C3.StatusPosition_Actual2
C3.StatusPosition_ActualController
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
yes
yes
no
680.18
680.12
C3.StatusPosition_ActualNotReset
C3.StatusPosition_DemandController
C4_3
C4_3
yes
no
680.4
680.1
C3.StatusPosition_DemandValue
C3.StatusPosition_DemandValue1
C4_3
Y4
yes
yes
680.11
680.10
680.6
680.16
680.17
680.30
694.4
694.9
694.1
694.6
694.2
694.7
694.3
694.8
698.4
C3.StatusPosition_EncoderInput24V
C3.StatusPosition_FollowingError
C3.StatusPosition_FollowingError2
C3.StatusPosition_MasterSlaveError
C3.StatusPosition_Referenced
C3.StatusPressure_p01
C3.StatusPressure_pA1
C3.StatusPressure_pB1
C3.StatusPressure_pT1
C3.StatusPressureForceController_ActuatingSigna
l_AddSpeed_YV
l_AddSpeed_YV2
l_DPart_YD
l_DPart_YD2
l_FFWPart_YF
l_FFWPart_YF2
l_ForceCtrl_Ycom
l_ForceCtrl_Ycom2
l_IPart_YI
l_IPart_YI2
l_PPart_YP
l_PPart_YP2
C3.StatusSpeed_Actual
C3.StatusSpeed_Actual2Filtered
C3.StatusSpeed_ActualFiltered
C3.StatusSpeed_ActualFiltered_Y2
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
I16
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
C4_3
no
697.15
697.1
697.11
698.14
698.3
698.13
698.6
698.16
698.5
698.15
698.2
698.12
698.1
698.11
681.5
681.14
681.9
681.7
681.8
681.12
681.13
C3.StatusSpeed_ActualScaled
C3.StatusSpeed_DemandScaled
681.10
681.4
C3.StatusSpeed_DemandSpeedController
C3.StatusSpeed_DemandValue
681.1
C3.StatusSpeed_DemandValue1
681.6
681.15
681.11
685.3
685.4
685.1
210.10
C3.StatusSpeed_Error
C3.StatusSpeed_Error2
C3.StatusSpeed_FeedForwardSpeed
C3.StatusVoltage_AnalogInput0
C3.StatusVoltage_AuxiliaryVoltage
C3.ValidParameter_Global
PNU
Status actual position

Actual position of auxiliary axis
Status actual position without
absolute reference
Status actual position (not reset)
Status demand position without
absolute reference
Status demand position
Position command value of Profile
transmitter1
Status of encoder input 0 (24V)
Status of tracking error
Following error auxiliary axis
Position deviation main/auxiliary axis
Status of axis referenced
System pressure for main axis
System pressure for auxiliary axis
Pressure on A side of main axis
Pressure on A side of auxiliary axis
Pressure on B side of main axis
Pressure on B side of auxiliary axis
Tank pressure for main axis
Tank pressure for auxiliary axis
Control signal velocity component of
force/pressure controller (A1)
Control signal velocity component of
Control signal D-term of
Control signal D-term of
Force feedforward of force/pressure
controller (A1)
Force feedforward of force/pressure
controller (A2)
Total control signal of force/pressure
controller (A1)
Total control signal of force/pressure
controller (A2)
Control signal I-term of force/pressure
controller (A1)
Control signal I-term of force/pressure
controller (A2)
Control signal P-term of
Control signal P-term of
Status actual speed unfiltered
Actual speed unfiltered auxiliary axis
Status actual speed filtered
Status of the actual filtered speed
speed in the Y2 format
Status of the actual filtered peed in
the Y4 format
Filtered actual speed
Setpoint speed of the setpoint
generator
Status demand speed controller input
Status demand speed of setpoint
generator
Speed command value of profile
transmitter1
Status control deviation of speed
Speed control deviation
Status speed feed forward
Status of analog input 0
Status of auxiliary voltage
Set objects to valid
28
211
323
0
100
212
8
210
0x60FC
0x2052
0x2095.2
0x60F4
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
0x606C
0x2023
117
0x2024
Y4
yes
C4_3
C4_3
no
no
C4_3
C4_3
yes
yes
324
0x6069
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
Y2
0x606B
337
0x2053
Y4
yes
101
0x2027
23
102
326
338.10
0x2025
0x2026
0x200F
0x2016.10
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
Y2
Y2
E2_6
U16
yes
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
C3.ValidParameter_Limits
180.6
181.6
182.6
183.6
1901.1
C3.ValveOutput0_Status
C3Array.Col01_Row01
Status of valve output 0

variable Column 1 Row 1
130/341.1
1901.2
C3Array.Col01_Row02
Variable Column 1 Row 2
131/341.2
1901.3
C3Array.Col01_Row03
132/341.3
192-121101 N04 June 2008
0x6064
216
220
213
217
214
218
215
219
210.6
324
CAN No.
U16
no
0x2301.1
U16
U16
U16
U16
Y4
no
no
no
no
yes
0x2301.2
Y4
yes
0x2301.3
Y4
yes
Parker EME
Compax3 - Objects
No.
Object name
Object
PNU
CAN No.
Format
PD
1901.4
C3Array.Col01_Row04
133/341.4
0x2301.4
Y4
yes
1901.5
C3Array.Col01_Row05
134/341.5
0x2301.5
Y4
yes
1902.1
C3Array.Col02_Row01
135/342.1
0x2302.1
Y2
yes
1902.2
C3Array.Col02_Row02
136/342.2
0x2302.2
Y2
yes
1902.3
C3Array.Col02_Row03
137/342.3
0x2302.3
Y2
yes
1902.4
C3Array.Col02_Row04
138/342.4
0x2302.4
Y2
yes
1902.5
C3Array.Col02_Row05
139/342.5
0x2302.5
Y2
yes
1903.1
C3Array.Col03_Row01
140/343.1
0x2303.1
I16
yes
1903.2
C3Array.Col03_Row02
141/343.2
0x2303.2
I16
yes
1903.3
C3Array.Col03_Row03
142/343.3
0x2303.3
I16
yes
1903.4
C3Array.Col03_Row04
143/343.4
0x2303.4
I16
yes
1903.5
C3Array.Col03_Row05
144/343.5
0x2303.5
I16
yes
1904.1
C3Array.Col04_Row01
145/344.1
0x2304.1
I16
yes
1904.2
C3Array.Col04_Row02
146/344.2
0x2304.2
I16
yes
1904.3
C3Array.Col04_Row03
Variable Column 4Row 3
147/344.3
0x2304.3
I16
yes
1904.4
C3Array.Col04_Row04
148/344.4
0x2304.4
I16
yes
1904.5
C3Array.Col04_Row05
149/344.5
0x2304.5
I16
yes
1905.1
C3Array.Col05_Row01
150/345.1
0x2305.1
I16
yes
1905.2
C3Array.Col05_Row02
151/345.2
0x2305.2
I16
yes
1905.3
C3Array.Col05_Row03
152/345.3
0x2305.3
I16
yes
1905.4
C3Array.Col05_Row04
153/345.4
0x2305.4
I16
yes
1905.5
C3Array.Col05_Row05
154/345.5
0x2305.5
I16
yes
1906.1
C3Array.Col06_Row01
155/346.1
0x2306.1
I32
yes
1906.2
C3Array.Col06_Row02
156/346.2
0x2306.2
I32
yes
1906.3
C3Array.Col06_Row03
157/346.3
0x2306.3
I32
yes
1906.4
C3Array.Col06_Row04
158/346.4
0x2306.4
I32
yes
1906.5
C3Array.Col06_Row05
159/346.5
0x2306.5
I32
yes
1907.1
C3Array.Col07_Row01
160/347.1
0x2307.1
I32
yes
1907.2
C3Array.Col07_Row02
161/347.2
0x2307.2
I32
yes
1907.3
C3Array.Col07_Row03
162/347.3
0x2307.3
I32
yes
1907.4
C3Array.Col07_Row04
163/347.4
0x2307.4
I32
yes
1907.5
C3Array.Col07_Row05
164/347.5
0x2307.5
I32
yes
1908.1
C3Array.Col08_Row01
165/348.1
0x2308.1
I32
yes
1908.2
C3Array.Col08_Row02
166/348.2
0x2308.2
I32
yes
1908.3
C3Array.Col08_Row03
167/348.3
0x2308.3
I32
yes
1908.4
C3Array.Col08_Row04
168/348.4
0x2308.4
I32
yes
1908.5
C3Array.Col08_Row05
169/348.5
0x2308.5
I32
yes
1909.1
C3Array.Col09_Row01
170/349.1
0x2309.1
I32
yes
1909.2
C3Array.Col09_Row02
171/349.2
0x2309.2
I32
yes
1909.3
C3Array.Col09_Row03
172/349.3
0x2309.3
I32
yes
1909.4
C3Array.Col09_Row04
173/349.4
0x2309.4
I32
yes
1909.5
C3Array.Col09_Row05
174/349.5
0x2309.5
I32
yes
1910.1
C3Array.Indirect_Col01
Indirect table access Column 1
181
0x2311
Y4
yes
1910.2
182
0x2312
Y2
yes
1910.3
183
0x2313
I16
yes
1910.4
184
0x2314
I16
yes
1910.5
185
0x2315
I16
yes
1910.6
186
0x2316
I32
yes
1910.7
187
0x2317
I32
yes
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Valid
beginning
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Bus Object Ixx

20
21/22/30
-
325
Compax3 - Objects
C3F_T30
No.
Object name
Object
PNU
CAN No.
Format
PD
1910.8
188
0x2318
I32
yes
1910.9
189
0x2319
I32
yes
180
0x2300
1900.1
C3Array.Pointer_Row
Pointer to table row
U16
yes
172.3
172.2
172.9
C3Plus.AnalogInput0_Gain
C3Plus.AnalogInput0_LowerLimit
Filter X1:IN0
Gain X1:IN0
Lower limit value X1:IN0
I32
C4_3
I32
no
no
no
172.11
Offset X1:IN0
C4_3
no
172.10
C3Plus.AnalogInput0_UpperLimit
upper limit value X1:IN0
I32
no
173.3
173.2
173.9
Filter X1:IN1
Gain X1:IN1
I32
C4_3
I32
no
no
no
173.11
Offset X1:IN1
C4_3
no
173.10
Upper limit value X1:IN1
I32
no
174.3
174.2
174.9
Filter X1:IN2
Gain X1:IN2
I32
C4_3
I32
no
no
no
174.11
Offset X1:IN2
C4_3
no
174.10
upper limit value X1:IN2
I32
no
175.3
175.2
175.9
Filter X1:IN3
Gain X1:IN3
I32
C4_3
I32
no
no
no
175.11
Offset X1:IN3
C4_3
no
175.10
I32
no
176.3
176.2
176.9
Filter X1:IN4
Gain X1:IN4
I16
C4_3
I32
no
no
no
176.11
Offset X1:IN4
C4_3
no
176.10
I32
no
177.3
177.2
177.11
Filter X1:IN5
Gain X1:IN5
Offset X1:IN4
I16
C4_3
C4_3
no
no
no
177.10
I32
no
206.1
C3Plus.C3FluidNorm_Metric_Imperial
Unit system
BOOL
no
2439.3
C3Plus.CurveMemory_Erase
Delete valve characteristics
I16
no
2405.2
2405.3
2405.4
2405.1
2415.2
2415.3
2415.4
2415.1
2425.2
2425.3
2425.4
2425.1
2435.2
2435.3
2435.4
2435.1
1100.1
C3Plus.DeviceControl_CommandOnRequest
Threshold value on A side output 0

Threshold value on B side output 0
Width of deadband output 0
Deadband compensation output 0
Control command
108
0x2028
I32
I32
I32
I16
I32
I32
I32
I16
I32
I32
I32
I16
I32
I32
I32
I16
I16
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes
1100.3
C3Plus.DeviceControl_Controlword_1
Control word CW
0x6040
V2
yes
1100.4
Control word 2
0x201B
V2
yes
1100.8
C3Plus.DeviceControl_DemandValue3
Device demand value C
0x2048
Y2
yes
1100.5
C3Plus.DeviceControl_OperationMode
Operating mode
127/930
0x6060
I16
yes
1000.5
C3Plus.DeviceState_ActualOperationMode
Operating mode display
128
0x6061
I16
yes
1000.3
C3Plus.DeviceState_Statusword_1
Status word SW
0x6041
V2
yes
1000.4
Status word 2
0x201C
V2
yes
2401.5
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_neg Direction dependent gain

ative
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_posi Direction dependent gain
tive
I32
no
I32
no
2401.4
326
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Valid
beginning
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Bus Object Ixx

20
21/22/30
-
Parker EME
Compax3 - Objects
No.
Object name
Object
2401.6
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_InvertType
Inversion output 0
Format
PD
I16
no
2411.5
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch1_Factor_neg Gain factor for negative input values

ative
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch1_Factor_posi Gain factor for positive input values
tive
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch1_InvertType Inversion output 1
I32
no
I32
no
I16
no
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch2_Factor_neg Gain factor for negative input values

ative
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch2_Factor_posi Gain factor for positive input values
tive
I32
no
I32
no
I16
no
I32
no
I32
no
2431.6
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch3_Factor_neg Direction dependent gain

ative
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch3_Factor_posi Direction dependent gain
tive
550.1
C3Plus.ErrorHistory_LastError
Current error (n)
2020.7
C3Plus.ExternalSignal_Accel_Munits
2020.6
C3Plus.ExternalSignal_Speed_Munits
2411.4
2411.6
2421.5
2421.4
2421.6
2431.5
2431.4
PNU
115/947.0
CAN No.
0x603F/
0x201D.1
I16
no
U16
yes
Valid
beginning
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
-
Bus Object Ixx

20
21/22/30
-
I32
yes
C4_3
yes
1141.4
C3Plus.GEAR_mode
Acceleration of the external signal

source
Speed value of the external signal
source
Interpolation output of the Position
CanSync, PowerLink
Switching the position source of the
interpolator
Control bits for feedforward with
source CANSync/EthernetPowerLink
Source selection Gearing
3920.1
Process input signal Slave
3920.7
1130.1
C3Plus.HEDA_SignalProcessing_OutputGreat
C3Plus.HOMING_accel
300
0x609A
C4_3
U32
no
no
1130.7
C3Plus.HOMING_edge_sensor_distance
Output of the Heda Tracking Filter

Acceleration / deceleration homing
run
Initiator adjustment
304
0x2000
C4_3
no
1130.2
C3Plus.HOMING_jerk
Jerk for machine reference run
357
0x201E
U32
no
1130.4
C3Plus.HOMING_mode
0x6098
U16
no
C3Plus.HOMING_speed
Adjusting the machine reference

mode
Speed for machine reference run
302
1130.3
301
0x6099.1
C4_3
no
201.2
C3Plus.NormFactorY4_Position
Scaling factor for Y4 positions
356.2
0x2021.2
V2
no
2400.7
Replacement value at the input of

Chain0
Offset at input Chain 0
I32
no
I16
no
VP
Lower output limitation of output 0
I16
no
VP
Offset at output Chain 0
I32
no
VP
Upper output limitation of output 0
I16
no
VP
Preset value at the input of Chain1
I32
no
VP
Offset at input Chain1
I16
no
VP
I16
no
VP
Offset at output Chain1
I32
no
VP
I16
no
VP
I32
no
VP
Offset at input Chain2
I16
no
VP
I16
no
VP
Offset at output Chain2
I32
no
VP
I16
no
VP
I32
no
VP
Offset at input Chain 3
I16
no
VP
Lower limit of valve output 3
I16
no
VP
Offset at output Chain 3
I32
no
VP
Upper limit of valve output 3
I16
no
VP
185.1
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Input_Defa
ultValue
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Input_Offs
et
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Lower_Lim
it
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Output_Off
set
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Upper_Lim
it
ultValue
et
it
set
it
ultValue
et
it
set
it
ultValue
et
it
set
it
C3Plus.OutputGroup_OutputSelect_0
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
Output signal valves 0 & 1
BOOL
no
C3Plus.OutputGroup_OutputSelect_1
Output signal valves 2&3
BOOL
no
1211.13
C3Plus.PG2POSITION_direction
I32
no
50.3
C3Plus.PLC_ActualCycleTime
Manipulation of the motion direction

in reset mode
Status of cycle time of the control
program
U16
no
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
-
185.2
3921.7
C3Plus.FBI_SignalProcessing0_OutputGreat
3921.8
C3Plus.FBI_SignalProcessing0_Source
1141.10
C3Plus.GEAR_FFW_mode
2400.5
2400.4
2400.6
2400.3
2410.7
2410.5
2410.4
2410.6
2410.3
2420.7
2420.5
2420.4
2420.6
2420.3
2430.7
2430.5
2430.4
2430.6
2430.3
192-121101 N04 June 2008
353
Y4
no
I16
no
0x2097
U16
no
0x2055
U16
no
C4_3
yes
0x201F.2
327
Compax3 - Objects
C3F_T30
No.
Object name
Object
PNU
CAN No.
Format
PD
50.4
C3Plus.PLC_ActualCycleTimeMax
Status of maximum cycle time
354
0x201F.3
U16
no
50.1
C3Plus.PLC_DemandCycleTime
Cycle time specification
352
0x201F.1
U16
no
1111.3
C3Plus.POSITION_accel
114
0x6083
U32
yes
1111.4
C3Plus.POSITION_decel
Deceleration for positioning
312
0x6084
U32
yes
1111.13
C3Plus.POSITION_direction
no
C3Plus.POSITION_jerk_accel
Manipulation of the motion direction

in reset mode
Acceleration jerk for positioning
I32
1111.5
313
0x2005
U32
no
0x2006
1111.6
C3Plus.POSITION_jerk_decel
Deceleration jerk for positioning
314
1111.1
C3Plus.POSITION_position
Target position
27
1111.8
C3Plus.POSITION_resetpositon_mode
Continuous mode
U32
no
C4_3
yes
U16
no
Valid
beginning
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
Bus Object Ixx

20
21/22/30
-
1111.2
C3Plus.POSITION_speed
Speed for positioning
111
C4_3
yes
1111.9
C3Plus.POSITION_speed_Y2
Speed for Positioning in Y2 Format
110
Y2
yes
1111.17
C3Plus.POSITION_turnaround
Direction inversion - lock
U16
no
2260.13
C3Plus.PositionController_2_DeadBand
C4_3
no
2260.20
C3Plus.PositionController_2_Disturbance_Offset
Deadband of position controller

auxiliary axis
Disturbance compensation (A2)
C4_3
no
C3Plus.PositionController_2_InsideWindow_IPart
C3Plus.PositionController_2_IPart_Scaling
C3Plus.PositionController_2_Ki_IPart
C4_3
C4_3
I16
no
no
no
2260.22
C3Plus.PositionController_2_Kp_PPart
I16
no
VP
2260.17
2260.15
C4_3
C4_3
no
no
VP
VP
2260.16
2260.19
2200.2
2200.20
2200.1
2200.36
C3Plus.PositionController_2_OutsideWindow_IPar
t
C3Plus.PositionController_2_PPart_Scaling
C3Plus.PositionController_ActualValue
C3Plus.PositionController_DeadBand
C3Plus.PositionController_DemandValue
C3Plus.PositionController_Disturbance_Offset
Internal window I-term (A2)

Quantifier I-term (A2)
I-term for the position controller
(auxiliary axis)
P-term for the position controller
(auxiliary axis)
Lower limit I-term (A2)
External window I-term (A2)
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
VP
2260.14
2260.18
2260.21
Upper limit I-term (A2)

Quantifier P-term (A2)
Position actual value (sequentially)
Deadband of position controller
Position setpoint value (sequentially)
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
no
no
yes
no
yes
no
2200.30
2200.34
2200.37
C3Plus.PositionController_IPart_Scaling
C3Plus.PositionController_Ki_IPart
C4_3
C4_3
I16
no
no
no
2200.38
C3Plus.PositionController_Kp_PPart
2200.33
2200.31
2200.32
2200.35
2200.24
C3Plus.PositionController_OutsideWindow_IPart
C3Plus.PositionController_PPart_Scaling
C3Plus.PositionController_TrackingErrorFilter_us
2402.1
2412.1
2422.1
2432.1
2250.24
C3Plus.PressureController_1_ActuatingSignal_Inv
ersion
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Derivative_Part_KF
d
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Disturbance_Offset

Quantifier I-term (A1)
I-term for the position controller (main
axis)
P-term for the position controller
(main axis)
Lower limit I-term (A1)
Upper limit I-term (A1)
Quantifier P-term (A1)
Time constant following error filter of
positon controller
Pressure compensation output 0
Inversion of the force controller
control variable
Derivative action coefficient Kd (A1)
VP
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
VP
VP
VP
I32
no
C4_3
no
Force feedforward
U16

Integration coefficient Ki (A1)
Negative limit I-term (A1)
I32
I32
I32
I32
Positive limit I-term (A1)

Proportional coefficient Kp (A1)
2250.19
2250.21
2250.23
2250.15
2250.14
2250.18
2250.16
2250.17
2250.13
2250.20
2251.24
2251.19
2251.21
2251.23
2251.15
2251.14
2251.18
2251.16
2251.17
328
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Force_FeedForward
_KFs
C3Plus.PressureController_1_OutsideWindow_IPa
rt
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Proportional_Part_K
p
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Speed_Feedback_K
Fv
C3Plus.PressureController_2_ActuatingSignal_Inv
ersion
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Derivative_Part_KF
d
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Disturbance_Offset
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Force_FeedForward
_KFs
C3Plus.PressureController_2_OutsideWindow_IPa
rt
I16
no
VP
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
U16
no
no
no
no
no
VP
VP
VP
VP
VP
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
no
no
no
no
no
VP
VP
VP
VP
Immediat
ely
VP
no
Immediat
ely
VP
no
no
no
no
VP
VP
VP
VP
I32
I32
no
no
VP
VP
Speed feedback (A1)
U16
no
VP
Inversion of the force controller

control variable (A2)
Derivative action coefficient Kd (A2)
I16
no
no
Immediat
ely
VP
I32
C4_3
no
U16
no
Immediat
ely
VP
Force feedforward (A2)

Integration coefficient Ki (A2)
Negative limit I-term (A2)
I32
I32
I32
I32
no
no
no
no
VP
VP
VP
VP
Positive limit I-term (A2)
I32
no
VP
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Compax3 - Objects
No.
Object name
Object
Format
PD
2251.13
Proportional coefficient Kp (A2)
I32
no
Valid
Bus Object Ixx
beginning 20
21/22/30
VP
-
Speed feedback (A2)
U16
no
VP
830.2
830.3
830.1
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Proportional_Part_K
p
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Speed_Feedback_K
Fv
C3Plus.Profibus_Baudrate
C3Plus.Profibus_NodeAddress
C3Plus.Profibus_Protocol
Baud rate
Station address
PPO-type selection switch
918
U32
U16
U16
no
no
no
X
X
X
830.6
830.4
C3Plus.Profibus_StandardSignalTable
C3Plus.Profibus_TelegramSelect
List of Profidrive standard signals

Telegram selection switch
923.x
922
U16
U16
no
no
X
X
2000.1
2000.4
152.1
C3Plus.ProfilGenerators_SG1Position
C3Plus.ProfilGenerators_SG1Speed
C3Plus.RemoteAnalogInput_I0
Position value of the setpoint encoder

Speed of the setpoint encoder
PIO analog input 0
0x2060
0x2063
0x2082.1
C4_3
I32
I16
yes
yes
yes
152.2
PIO analog input 1
0x2082.2
I16
yes
152.3
PIO analog input 2
0x2082.3
I16
yes
152.4
PIO analog input 3
0x2082.4
I16
yes
153.1
C3Plus.RemoteAnalogOutput_O0
PIO analog output 0
0x2083.1
I16
yes
153.2
PIO analog output 1
0x2083.2
I16
yes
153.3
PIO analog output 2
0x2083.3
I16
yes
153.4
PIO analog output 3
0x2083.4
I16
yes
150.1
C3Plus.RemoteDigInput_I0_15
Digital PIO inputs 0...15
0x2080.1
V2
yes
150.2
0x2080.2
V2
yes
150.3
0x2080.3
V2
yes
150.4
0x2080.4
V2
yes
151.1
C3Plus.RemoteDigOutput_O0_15
Digital PIO outputs 0...15
0x2081.1
V2
yes
151.2
0x2081.2
V2
yes
151.3
0x2081.3
V2
yes
151.4
0x2081.4
V2
yes
2403.2
2433.1
1127.3
C3Plus.SignalFlowCharacteristic_Ch0_Curve_ID_
A
A
A
A
C3Plus.SPEED_speed
680.8
C3Plus.StatusPosition_Actual_Y4
2109.1
C3Plus.TrackingfilterHEDA_TRFSpeed
2107.1
C3Plus.TrackingfilterPhysicalSource_TRFSpeed
2110.7
C3Plus.TrackingfilterSG1_AccelFilter_us
2110.6
C3Plus.TrackingfilterSG1_FilterSpeed_us
2110.1
C3Plus.TrackingfilterSG1_TRFSpeed
210.5
C3Plus.ValidParameter_FeedForward
210.2
C3Plus.ValidParameter_FiltersRSDP
2251.20
2403.1
2413.2
2413.1
2423.2
2423.1
2433.2
PNU
CAN No.
Which characteristic (ID) is used
I16
no
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
VP
Characteristic output 0
I16
I16
no
no
VP
VP
I16
I16
no
no
VP
VP
I16
I16
no
no
VP
VP
Target speed in speed control
7
operating mode
Status position actual value in the bus 119
format Y4
Time constant tracking filter HEDAprocess position
Time constant tracking filter physical
source
Filter time constant acceleration
setpoint generator
Filter time constant velocity setpoint
generator
Time constant tracking filter setpoint
encoder
I16
C4_3
no
yes
Y4
yes
VP
Immediat
ely
-
0x2022
0x2096
I16
no
VP
U16
no
VP
U16
no
VP
U16
no
VP
I16
no
VP
U16
no
U16
no
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
Immediat
ely
180.2
C3Plus.ValveOutput0_Gain
Gain valve output 0
C4_3
no
180.4
C3Plus.ValveOutput0_Offset
Offset valve output 0
I32
no
180.5
C3Plus.ValveOutput0_Value
Value of valve output 0
C4_3
no
181.2
Gain factor real
C4_3
no
181.4
I32
no
181.5
C4_3
no
182.2
Gain valve output 2
C4_3
no
182.4
I32
no
182.5
C4_3
no
183.2
Gain valve output 3
C4_3
no
183.4
I32
no
192-121101 N04 June 2008
329
Compax3 - Objects
C3F_T30
No.
Object name
Object
183.5
330
PNU
192-121101 N04 June 2008
CAN No.
Format
PD
C4_3
no
Valid
Bus Object Ixx
beginning 20
21/22/30
Immediat ely
Parker EME
7.2
Compax3 - Objects
T30F Objects for the process data channel
No.
Object name
Object
PNU
PZD
CAN No.
PD
634.4
635.4
120.3
121.2
133.3
140.3
2020.1
3921.1
695.11
695.14
680.5
680.15
680.4
680.1
Setpoint for analog output 0

setpoint for analog output 1
Input word of I/O option
Output word for I/O option
Command value of the digital outputs
Position from external signal source
Interpolation input CanSync, PowerLink
Actual value force controller main axis [N]
Actual value force controller auxiliary axis [N]
Status actual position
Actual position of auxiliary axis
Status demand position
Position command value of Profile
transmitter1
Status of tracking error
Following error auxiliary axis
System pressure for main axis
System pressure for auxiliary axis
Pressure on A side of main axis
Pressure on A side of auxiliary axis
Pressure on B side of main axis
Pressure on B side of auxiliary axis
Tank pressure for main axis
Tank pressure for auxiliary axis
Status actual speed unfiltered
Actual speed unfiltered auxiliary axis
Status actual speed filtered
Status of the actual filtered speed speed in
the Y2 format
Status of the actual filtered peed in the Y4
format
Status demand speed of setpoint generator
Speed command value of profile transmitter1
Status control deviation of speed
C3.DigitalInput_DebouncedValue
C3.DigitalInputAddition_Value
C3.DigitalOutputAddition_Value
C3.DigitalOutputWord_DemandState
C3.ExternalSignal_Position
C3.FBI_SignalProcessing0_Input
C3.StatusForce_Actual
C3.StatusForce_Actual2
C3.StatusPosition_Actual
C3.StatusPosition_Actual2
C3.StatusPosition_DemandValue
C3.StatusPosition_DemandValue1
24
103
21
175
176
22
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED
PED
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED
PED/PAD
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
0x2019
0x201A
0x6100.1
0x6100.2
0x6300.2
0x6300.1
0x2095.1
0x2050
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
TPDO
R/TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
Bus
format
I16
I16
V2
V2
V2
V2
C4_3
I32
I32
I32
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
Y4
Word
width
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0x2095.2
0x60F4
0x606C
0x2023
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
C4_3
Y2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
680.10
680.6
680.16
694.4
694.9
694.1
694.6
694.2
694.7
694.3
694.8
681.5
681.14
681.9
681.7
681.8
681.4
681.1
681.6
685.3
685.4
1901.1
1901.2
1901.3
1901.4
1901.5
1902.1
1902.2
1902.3
1902.4
1902.5
1903.1
1903.2
1903.3
1903.4
1903.5
1904.1
1904.2
1904.3
1904.4
1904.5
1905.1
1905.2
1905.3
1905.4
1905.5
1906.1
1906.2
1906.3
1906.4
1906.5
1907.1
1907.2
1907.3
1907.4
1907.5
1908.1
1908.2
1908.3
1908.4
1908.5
1909.1
1909.2
1909.3
1909.4
1909.5
1910.1
1910.2
1910.3
1910.4
1910.5
221
222
28
211
323
0
0x6064
0x60FC
0x2052
C3.StatusPosition_FollowingError
C3.StatusPosition_FollowingError2
C3.StatusSpeed_Actual
C3.StatusSpeed_Actual2Filtered
C3.StatusSpeed_ActualFiltered
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
117
PED
0x2024
TPDO
Y4
C3.StatusSpeed_DemandValue
C3.StatusSpeed_DemandValue1
C3.StatusSpeed_Error
C3Array.Col01_Row01
C3Array.Col01_Row02
C3Array.Col01_Row03
C3Array.Col01_Row04
C3Array.Col01_Row05
C3Array.Col02_Row01
C3Array.Col02_Row02
C3Array.Col02_Row03
C3Array.Col02_Row04
C3Array.Col02_Row05
C3Array.Col03_Row01
C3Array.Col03_Row02
C3Array.Col03_Row03
C3Array.Col03_Row04
C3Array.Col03_Row05
C3Array.Col04_Row01
C3Array.Col04_Row02
C3Array.Col04_Row03
C3Array.Col04_Row04
C3Array.Col04_Row05
C3Array.Col05_Row01
C3Array.Col05_Row02
C3Array.Col05_Row03
C3Array.Col05_Row04
C3Array.Col05_Row05
C3Array.Col06_Row01
C3Array.Col06_Row02
C3Array.Col06_Row03
C3Array.Col06_Row04
C3Array.Col06_Row05
C3Array.Col07_Row01
C3Array.Col07_Row02
C3Array.Col07_Row03
C3Array.Col07_Row04
C3Array.Col07_Row05
C3Array.Col08_Row01
C3Array.Col08_Row02
C3Array.Col08_Row03
C3Array.Col08_Row04
C3Array.Col08_Row05
C3Array.Col09_Row01
C3Array.Col09_Row02
C3Array.Col09_Row03
C3Array.Col09_Row04
C3Array.Col09_Row05
324
337
101
23
102
130/341.1
131/341.2
132/341.3
133/341.4
134/341.5
135/342.1
136/342.2
137/342.3
138/342.4
139/342.5
140/343.1
141/343.2
142/343.3
143/343.4
144/343.5
145/344.1
146/344.2
147/344.3
148/344.4
149/344.5
150/345.1
151/345.2
152/345.3
153/345.4
154/345.5
155/346.1
156/346.2
157/346.3
158/346.4
159/346.5
160/347.1
161/347.2
162/347.3
163/347.4
164/347.5
165/348.1
166/348.2
167/348.3
168/348.4
169/348.5
170/349.1
171/349.2
172/349.3
173/349.4
174/349.5
181
182
183
184
185
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
0x606B
0x2053
0x2027
0x2025
0x2026
0x2301.1
0x2301.2
0x2301.3
0x2301.4
0x2301.5
0x2302.1
0x2302.2
0x2302.3
0x2302.4
0x2302.5
0x2303.1
0x2303.2
0x2303.3
0x2303.4
0x2303.5
0x2304.1
0x2304.2
0x2304.3
0x2304.4
0x2304.5
0x2305.1
0x2305.2
0x2305.3
0x2305.4
0x2305.5
0x2306.1
0x2306.2
0x2306.3
0x2306.4
0x2306.5
0x2307.1
0x2307.2
0x2307.3
0x2307.4
0x2307.5
0x2308.1
0x2308.2
0x2308.3
0x2308.4
0x2308.5
0x2309.1
0x2309.2
0x2309.3
0x2309.4
0x2309.5
0x2311
0x2312
0x2313
0x2314
0x2315
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
C4_3
Y4
C4_3
Y2
Y2
Y4
Y4
Y4
Y4
Y4
Y2
Y2
Y2
Y2
Y2
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
I32
Y4
Y2
I16
I16
I16
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
192-121101 N04 June 2008
100
212
216
220
213
217
214
218
215
219
8
210
0x6069
331
Compax3 - Objects
C3F_T30
No.
Object name
Object
PNU
PZD
CAN No.
PD
1910.6
1910.7
1910.8
1910.9
1900.1
1100.1
1100.3
1100.4
1100.8
1100.5
1000.5
1000.3
1000.4
550.1

Pointer to table row
Control command
Control word CW
Control word 2
Device demand value C
Operating mode
Operating mode display
Status word SW
Status word 2
Current error (n)
C3Array.Pointer_Row
C3Plus.DeviceControl_CommandOnRequest
C3Plus.DeviceControl_DemandValue3
C3Plus.DeviceControl_OperationMode
C3Plus.DeviceState_ActualOperationMode
C3Plus.ErrorHistory_LastError
186
187
188
189
180
108
1
3
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
TPDO
Bus
format
I32
I32
I32
I32
U16
I16
V2
V2
Y2
I16
I16
V2
V2
U16
Word
width
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1111.3
1111.4
1111.1
1111.2
1111.9
2000.1
2000.4
152.1
152.2
152.3
152.4
153.1
153.2
153.3
153.4
150.1
150.2
150.3
150.4
151.1
151.2
151.3
151.4
1127.3

Deceleration for positioning
Target position
Speed for positioning
Speed for Positioning in Y2 Format
Position value of the setpoint encoder
Speed of the setpoint encoder
PIO analog input 0
PIO analog input 1
PIO analog input 2
PIO analog input 3
PIO analog output 0
PIO analog output 1
PIO analog output 2
PIO analog output 3
Target speed in speed control operating
mode
Status position actual value in the bus format
Y4
C3Plus.POSITION_accel
C3Plus.POSITION_decel
C3Plus.POSITION_position
C3Plus.POSITION_speed
C3Plus.POSITION_speed_Y2
C3Plus.ProfilGenerators_SG1Position
C3Plus.ProfilGenerators_SG1Speed
C3Plus.SPEED_speed
114
312
27
111
110
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED
PED
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
PED/PAD
0x2316
0x2317
0x2318
0x2319
0x2300
0x2028
0x6040
0x201B
0x2048
0x6060
0x6061
0x6041
0x201C
0x603F/
0x201D.1
0x6083
0x6084
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
TPDO
TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
R/TPDO
U32
U32
C4_3
C4_3
Y2
C4_3
I32
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
I16
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
V2
C4_3
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
C3Plus.StatusPosition_Actual_Y4
119
PED
TPDO
Y4
680.8
7.3
127/930
128
2
4
115/947.0
0x2060
0x2063
0x2082.1
0x2082.2
0x2082.3
0x2082.4
0x2083.1
0x2083.2
0x2083.3
0x2083.4
0x2080.1
0x2080.2
0x2080.3
0x2080.4
0x2081.1
0x2081.2
0x2081.3
0x2081.4
0x2022
Detailed object list

A detailed object list can be found in the corresponding online help.
332
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Status values
8. Status values
D/A-Monitor ......................................................................................................................333
Status values....................................................................................................................333
A list of the status values supports you in optimization and commissioning.

Open the optimization function in the C3 ServoManager (double-click on
optimization in the tree)
You will find the available status values in the lower right part of the window under
selection (TAB) Status values
You can pull them into the oscilloscope (upper part of the left side) or into the
status display (upper part of the right side) by the aid of the mouse (drag and drop).
The status values are divided into 2 groups (user levels):
standard: here you can find all important status values
advanced: advanced status values, require a better knowledge
Switching of the
user level
8.1
The user level can be changed in the optimization window (left hand side lower part
under selection (TAB) "optimization") with the following button.
D/A-Monitor
A part of the status values can be output via the D/A monitor channel 0 (X11/4) and
channel 1 (X11/3).In the following status list under D/A monitor output: possible /
not possible).
The reference for the output voltage can be entered individually in the reference
unit of the status value.
Example: Output Object 2210.2: (actual position unfiltered)

In order to get an output voltage of 10V at 3000min-1 , please enter 50Umd/s
(=3000min-1) as "value of the signal at 10V".
Hint
The unit of measurement of the D/A monitor values differs from the unit of
measurement of the status values.
8.2
Status values
Additional information on the topic of "status values" can be found in the online
help of the device.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
333
C3F_T30
Error:
9. Error:
All errors lead to error status.
Two error reactions are possible which are assigned to the individual error:
Reaction 2: Downramp with error ramp and then switching the valve outputs with
high impedance (tristate) or, depending on the set error reaction
(see page 78, see page 207) remaining in the controlled state.
The method of "downramping" depends on the operating mode
configured:
Position AND force control configured
Downramp with position control
Pure force congrol configured

Downramp with force control
Reaction
5:
Immediate tristating of the valve outputs (without ramp).
With the aid of the "SetErrorReaction (see page 207)" IEC module, additional
error reactions can be assigned to individual errors.
Most pending errors can be acknowledged with Quit!

The following errors must be acknowledged with "Power on":
0x7381, 0x7382, 0x7391, 0x7392, 0x73A0
The errors as well as the error history can be viewed in the C3 ServoManager
under optimization (at the top right of the optimization window).
334
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Order code
10. Order code

Order code device: Compax3 Fluid..................................................................................335
Accessories order code....................................................................................................335
10.1
Order code device: Compax3 Fluid

C3 F
Hydraulics controller
D2
Table Style
Supply voltage 24VDC
D2
Feedback Module
Interface:
Control via Inputs/Outputs
Control via Inputs/Outputs or COM interface
Profibus DP V0/V1/V2 (12Mbaud)
CANopen
DeviceNet
Ethernet Powerlink
Ethercat
Technology functions:
Positioning (available as I12T11 & I20T11)
Motion control programmable according to IEC61131-3
Motion control programmable according to IEC61131-3 &
electronic cam extension
Options:
no additional supplement
Expansion 12 digital I/Os & HEDA (Motionbus)
HEDA (Motionbus)
Expansion, 12 digital I/Os
10.2
F12
F12
I11
I12
I20
I21
I22
I30
I31
T11
T30
T40
M00
M10
M11
M12
Accessories order code
Order Code connection set for Compax3 Fluid

/
for C3F00xD2
ZBH 02/04
ZBH
2 /
GBK
... ...
GBK
... ...
GBK
Order code for feedback cables

/
X11, X13
X13
with connector for Balluff BTL series with SSI- and Start/Stop
interface
Feedback cable EnDat2.1
Encoder Compax3
192-121101 N04 June 2008
... ...(1
335
Order code
C3F_T30
Order code for interface cables and plugs

/
PC Compax3 (RS232)
PC - Compax3MP (USB)
on X11 (Ref/Analog) and X13 at C3F001D2
on X12 / X22 (I/Os digital)
on X11 (Ref /Analog)
PC
POP (RS232)
Compax3
POP (RS485) for several C3H on request
Compax3 HEDA
Compax3 HEDA or PC
C3powerPLmC
Compax3 I30
Compax3 I30 or C3M-multi-axis communication
Compax3 X11
Compax3 X11 (encoder coupling of 2 axes)
Compax3 X10
Modem
with flying leads

with flying leads
for I/O terminal block
Compax3H adapter cable

SSK01 (length 15cm, delivered with the device)
Compax3H X10 RS232 connection control
Programming interface (delivered with the device)
Bus terminal connector (for the 1st and last Compax3 in the HEDA Bus/or multi-axis system).
(2
Profibus cable
non prefabricated
Profibus plug
(2
CAN-Bus cable
non prefabricated
CANbus connector
(x
Note on the cable (see page 337)
...(1
...
...(1
...(1
...(1
...(1
...(1
...(6
...(5
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
0
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
../
../
SSK
SSK
2
3
9
1
/
/
... ...(1
...
SSK
VBK
BUS
SSL
BUS
SSL
BUS
3
1
0
0
0
0
1
2
7
7
1
8
2
0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2 0
0 1
0 1
... ...(1
0 1
... ...(1
0 1
0
0
1
2
Order Code operating module

/
BDM
Operating module (for Compax3S and Compax3F)
Order Code terminal block

/
EAM
EAM
0
0
6
6
/
/
2-channel digital input terminal

2 channel analog input terminal ( 10V differential input)
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
4
4
4
4
0
0
3
5
0
2
0
6
4 channel analog input terminal (0-10V signal voltage)

2 channel analog input terminal (0 -20mA differential input)
PIO
PIO
4
4
6
8
8
0
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
3
5
5
5
1
4
0
0
2
6
PIO
PIO
3
3
3
4
7
7
for I/Os without luminous indicator

for I/Os with luminous indicator
for X11, X12, X22

for X12, X22
Order Code decentralized input terminals

PIO 2DI 24VDC 3.0ms
PIO 4DI 24VDC 3.0ms
PIO 8DI 24VDC 3.0ms
PIO 2AI DC 10V differential
input
PIO 4AI 0-10VDC S.E.
PIO 2AI 0 -20mA differential
input
Order Code decentralized output terminals

PIO 2DO 24VDC 0.5A
PIO 4DO 24VDC 0.5A
PIO 8DO 24VDC 0.5A
PIO 2AO 0-10VDC
PIO 2AO 0 -20mA
PIO 2AO DC 10V
2 channel digital output terminal (output voltage 0.5A)

2 channel analog output terminal (0-10V signal voltage)
2 channel analog output terminal (0-20mA signal voltage)
2 channel analog output terminal ( 10V signal voltage)
Order Code CANopen Fieldbus Coupler

CANopen Standard
CANopen ECO
336
max. vectorial sum current for bus terminals 1650mA at 5V

192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
(1
Order code
Length code 1
Length [m] 1,0

Order code 01
2,5
02
5,0
03
7,5
04
10,0 12,5
05
06
15,0
07
20,0
08
25,0
09
30,0
10
35,0
11
40,0
12
45,0
13
50,0
14
Example:
SSK01/09: length 25m
(2
Colours according to DESINA
(3
with motor plug
(4
with cable eye for motor terminal box
Length code 2 for SSK28
(5
Length [m]
0,17
Order code 23
0,25
0,5
1,0
3,0
5,0
10,0
20
21
01
22
03
05
(6
Order code: SSK27/nn/..
Length A (Pop - 1. Compax3) variable (the last two numbers according to the
length code for cable, for example SSK27/nn/01)
Length B (1. Compax3 - 2. Compax3 - ... - n. Compax3) fixed 50 cm (only if there is
more than 1 Compax3, i.e. nn greater than 01)
Number n (the last two digits)
Examples:
SSK27/05/.. for connecting from Pop to 5 Compax3.
SSK27/01/.. for connection from Pop to one Compax3
MOK55 and MOK54 can also be used for linear motors LXR406, LXR412 and
BLMA.
(x
192-121101 N04 June 2008
337
Compax3 Accessories
C3F_T30
11. Compax3 Accessories

ZBH plug set.....................................................................................................................338
Cable for path measurement systems..............................................................................338
Operator control module BDM..........................................................................................341
EAM06: Terminal block for inputs and outputs.................................................................342
Interface Cables ...............................................................................................................345
Options M1x .....................................................................................................................352
Profibus plug BUS08/01 ...................................................................................................356
CAN - plug BUS10/01 ......................................................................................................357
PIO: Inputs/Outputs..........................................................................................................358
11.1
ZBH plug set

The plug set which is available as accessory comprises:
a shield connecting terminal for the large area shield connection of the sensor
and valve cable (X1, X2), as well as
the mating plug connectors for the Compax3 plug connectors X1, X2, X3, and
fixing material for the mounting of a supporting rail
Order Code connection set for Compax3 Fluid

/
for C3F00xD2
ZBH 02/04
ZBH02/04: for Compax3 F00x D2
338
192-121101 N04 June 2008
ZBH
2 /
Parker EME
11.2
Compax3 Accessories
Cable for path measurement systems

Encoder cable...................................................................................................................339
Feedback cable (Balluff)...................................................................................................340
Feedback cable EnDat2.1 ................................................................................................341
11.2.1. Encoder cable
32mm
GBK23/..: Connection Encoder - Compax3
Pin 1
Compax3 (X11)
Ltseite
solder side
15
10
14
9
13
8
12
7
11
6
GN
A/
YE
GY
A
5
4
3
2
1
Encoder
2x0,14
2x0,14
GN
YE
GY
PK
RD
B/
12
PK
14
RD
N/
13
BU
BU
GND
15
WH
WH
+5V
BN
BN
2x0,14
2x0,5
Ltseite / Crimpseite
P
A
N Z R
B
S C
M Y
X
T
L
D
K W
J
U E
H
Schirm auf Schirmanbindungselement

Screen at screen contact
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
23 mm
2 mm
6 mm
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
C
F
J
L
N
P
R
S
T
You will find the length code in the accessories order code (see page 335).
192-121101 N04 June 2008
339
Compax3 Accessories
C3F_T30
11.2.2. Feedback cable (Balluff)

GBK40/..: Connection Compax3 - Start/Stop or SSI feedback
C3F... (X13 oder X11)

C3F... (X13 or X11)
Pin 1
Ltseite
solder side
15
10
14
9
13
8
12
7
11
6
INIT
INIT
START/STOP 8/14
5
4
3
2
1
START/STOP 12/13
GND 15
+24V DC
Balluff-Geber Start/Stop oder SSI

Balluff-Geber Start/Stop or SSI
YE
2x0,25
GN
GN
PK
2x0,25
GY
PK
GY
BU
2x0,25
RD
BU
RD
BN
2x0,25
WH
1,2,3,4,5
9,10,11
YE
INIT
INIT
START/STOP
START/STOP
GND
+24V DC
PK
GY
5
GN
2 mm
BU
NC
20 mm
3,5 mm
340
192-121101 N04 June 2008
RD

6 mm
BN
WH
25 mm
YE
NC

4,8
Parker EME
Compax3 Accessories
11.2.3. Feedback cable EnDat2.1
C3F... (X13)
Pin 1
Sense+ 2
Sense- 11
Ltseite
solder side
15
14
13
12
11
1,5,10
10
9
8
7
6
NC
5
4
3
2
1
CLK
CLK/
7
6
VCC
GND
4
15
COS+ 8
COS- 12
3
SIN+
9
SINDATA 14
DATA/ 13
Encoder
BU
WH
BU
WH
0,5
0,5
BN
GN
2x0,14
BN
GN
VT
YE
2x0,14
VT
YE
BN/GN
WH/GN
0,5
BU/BK
RD/BK
GN/BK
YE/BK
0,14
0,14
0,14
0,14
GY
PK
1 Up(sens.)
4 0V(sens.)
2x0,14
BU/BK
RD/BK
GN/BK
YE/BK
GY
PK
SW
BU

11
BN/GN
WH/GN
0,5
SW
BU
8 Clock+
9 Clock7 +V
10 0V
12 B+
13 B15 A+
16 A14 Data+
17 Data-
12
10
1
2
16
13
9
8
14 4
15
7
NC
17
6
2,3,5,6,11

25 mm
2 mm
27mm
GBK41/..: Connection Compax3 - EnDat2.1 feedback
25 mm
6 mm
5 mm
192-121101 N04 June 2008
341
Compax3 Accessories
11.3
C3F_T30
Operator control module BDM
Order Code operating module

/
BDM
Operating module (for Compax3S and Compax3F)
Flexible service and maintenance
Functions:
Mobile or stationary handling: can remain on the unit for display and diagnostic
purposes, or can be plugged into any unit.
Can be plugged in while in operation
Power supply via Compax3 servo control
Display with 2 times 16 places.
Menu-driven operation using 4 keys.
Displays and changing of values.
Display of Compax3 messages.
Duplication of device properties (no valve characteristics) and IEC61131-3
program to another Compax3 with identical hardware.
Additional information can be found int he BDM manual This can be found on the
Compax3 CD or on our Homepage: BDM-manual
(http://apps.parker.com/divapps/EME/EME/Literature_List/dokumentationen/BDM
.pdf).
342
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
11.4
Compax3 Accessories
EAM06: Terminal block for inputs and outputs
Order Code terminal block

/
for I/Os without luminous indicator
for I/Os with luminous indicator
for X11, X12, X22

for X12, X22
EAM
EAM
0
0
6
6
/
/
0
0
1
2
The terminal block EAM06/.. can be used to route the Compax3 plug connector
X11 or X12 for further wiring to a terminal strip and to a Sub-D plug connector.
or
) the terminal block can be installed on
Via a supporting rail (Design:
a mounting rail in the control cabinet.
EAM06/ is available in 2 variants:
EAM06/01: Terminal block for X11, X12, X22 without luminous indicator
EAM06/02: Terminal block for X12, X22 with luminous indicator
Corresponding connecting cables EAM06 - Compax3 are available:
from X11 - EAM06/01: SSK23/..
from X12, X22 - EAM06/xx: SSK24/..
EAM6/01: Terminal block without luminous indicator for X11, X12 or X22
Width: 67.5mm
192-121101 N04 June 2008
343
Compax3 Accessories
C3F_T30
EAM6/02: Terminal block with luminous indicator for X12, X22
Width: 67.5mm
Cable plan SSK23/..: X11 to EAM 06/01
Compax3
Pin 1
Ltseite
solder side
15
10
14
13 9
12 8
11 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
I/O Modul
WH
BN
GN
YE
GY
PK
BU
RD
BK
VT
GYPK
RDBU
WHGN
BNGN
WHYE
YEBN
WHGY
GYBN
WH
BN
GN
YE
GY
PK
BU
RD
BK
VT
GYPK
RDBU
WHGN
BNGN
WHYE
YEBN
WHGY
GYBN
23 mm
2 mm
344
192-121101 N04 June 2008
6 mm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Pin 1
Ltseite
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Parker EME
Compax3 Accessories
Cable plan SSK24/..: X12 to EAM 06/xx
Compax3
Pin 1
Ltseite
solder side
6
11
7
12
8
13 9
14
10
15
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
I/O Modul
WH
BN
GN
YE
GY
PK
BU
RD
BK
VT
GYPK
RDBU
WHGN
BNGN
WHYE
YEBN
WHGY
GYBN
WH
BN
GN
YE
GY
PK
BU
RD
BK
VT
GYPK
RDBU
WHGN
BNGN
WHYE
YEBN
WHGY
GYBN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Pin 1
Ltseite
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
23 mm
2 mm
11.5
6 mm
Interface Cables
RS232 cable .....................................................................................................................346
RS485 cable to Pop..........................................................................................................347
I/O interface X12 / X22 .....................................................................................................348
Ref X11.............................................................................................................................349
Encoder coupling of 2 Compax3 axes..............................................................................350
Modem cable SSK31........................................................................................................351
Order code for interface cables and plugs

/
192-121101 N04 June 2008
345
Compax3 Accessories
C3F_T30
PC Compax3 (RS232)
PC - Compax3MP (USB)
on X11 (Ref/Analog) and X13 at C3F001D2
on X11 (Ref /Analog)
PC
POP (RS232)
Compax3
POP (RS485) for several C3H on request
Compax3 HEDA
Compax3 HEDA or PC
C3powerPLmC
Compax3 I30
Compax3 I30 or C3M-multi-axis communication
Compax3 X11
Compax3 X11 (encoder coupling of 2 axes)
Compax3 X10
Modem
with flying leads

with flying leads
Compax3H adapter cable

SSK01 (length 15cm, delivered with the device)
Compax3H X10 RS232 connection control
Programming interface (delivered with the device)
Bus terminal connector (for the 1st and last Compax3 in the HEDA Bus/or multi-axis system).
(2
Profibus cable
non prefabricated
Profibus plug
(2
CAN-Bus cable
non prefabricated
CANbus connector
(x
0
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
../
../
SSK
SSK
2
3
9
1
/
/
... ...(1
...
SSK
VBK
BUS
SSL
BUS
SSL
BUS
3
1
0
0
0
0
1
2
7
7
1
8
2
0
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2 0
0 1
0 1
... ...(1
0 1
... ...(1
0 1
11.5.1. RS232 cable

SSK1/..
X10 <---
--->PC
n.c.
RxD
TxD
DTR
DSR
GND
RTS
CTS
+5V
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
RxD
TxD
DTR
DSR
GND
RTS
CTS
7 x 0,25mm + Schirm/Shield
346
192-121101 N04 June 2008
...(1
...
...(1
...(1
...(1
...(1
...(1
...(6
...(5
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
SSK
Parker EME
Compax3 Accessories
11.5.2. RS485 cable to Pop

SSK27: Connection Pop - Compax3 - Compax3 - ...
Lnge / Length B
Lnge / Length A
Compax3_n
Lnge / Length B
Pin 1
Pin 1
Compax3_2
Pin 1
Compax3_1
Pin 1
15
CHA+ 14
X2
BN
BN
CHA-
X3
YE
YE
GND
X4
WH
WH
Schirm groflchig auf Gehuse legen

Place sheath over large area of housing
NC
NC
NC
RD
NC
26 mm
TxD_RxD
4 mm
GND
6 mm
TxD_RxD
YE
TxD_RxD
1
2
3
WH
GND
5
4
Schirm groflchig auf Gehuse legen 5
NC
6
7
8
9
4,6,8
BN
RD
Ltseite
solder side
1 Brcke /
9 Bridge
R21 nur im letzten Stecker

R21 only on the last connector
GN
1-4
7 - 13
15
TxD_RxD
1
2
3
4
Schirm groflchig auf Gehuse legen 5
GN
Ltseite
solder side
6
7
8
9
1 Brcke /
9 Bridge
4,6,8
R21 = 220 Ohm

(6
Order code: SSK27/nn/..
Length A (Pop - 1. Compax3) variable (the last two numbers according to the
length code for cable, for example SSK27/nn/01)
Length B (1. Compax3 - 2. Compax3 - ... - n. Compax3) fixed 50 cm (only if there is
more than 1 Compax3, i.e. nn greater than 01)
Number n (the last two digits)
Examples:
SSK27/05/.. for connecting from Pop to 5 Compax3.
SSK27/01/.. for connection from Pop to one Compax3
192-121101 N04 June 2008
347
Compax3 Accessories
C3F_T30
11.5.3. I/O interface X12 / X22

SSK22/..: Cable for X12 / X22 with flying leads
Compax3
Pin 1
Ltseite
solder side
6
11
7
12
8
13
9
14
10
15
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
WH
BN
GN
YE
GY
PK
BU
RD
BK
VT
GYPK
RDBU
WHGN
BNGN
WHYE
YEBN
WHGY
GYBN
WH
BN
GN
YE
GY
PK
BU
RD
BK
VT
GYPK
RDBU
WHGN
BNGN
WHYE
YEBN
WHGY
GYBN
Screen
23 mm
2 mm
6 mm
348
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Compax3 Accessories
11.5.4. Ref X11

SSK21/..: Cable for X11 with flying leads
Compax3
Pin 1
Ltseite
solder side
5
15
10
4
14
9
3
13
8
2
12
7
1
11
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
WH
WH
BN
BN
GN
GN
YE
YE
GY
GY
PK
PK
BU
BU
RD
RD
BK
BK
VT
VT
GYPK
GYPK
RDBU
RDBU
WHGN
WHGN
BNGN
BNGN
WHYE
WHYE
YEBN
YEBN
WHGY
WHGY
GYBN
GYBN
Screen
23 mm
2 mm
6 mm
192-121101 N04 June 2008
349
Compax3 Accessories
C3F_T30
11.5.5. Encoder coupling of 2 Compax3 axes

SSK29/..: Cable from Compax3 X11 to Compax3 X11
Pin 1
Pin 1
zu Compax3 (X11)
to Compax3 (X11)
von Compax3 (X11)

from Compax3 (X11)
Ltseite
solder side
15
10
14
9
13 8
12 7
11 6
5
4
3
2
1
A/
B/
12
14
N/
13
YE
2x0,25
GN
GN
BN
2x0,25
WH
2x0,25
BU
RD
BU
RD
PK
2x0,25
PK
A/
12
B/
14
13
N/
Ltseite
solder side
15
10
14
9
13 8
12 7
11 6
GY

NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
BN
WH
GY
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
15
YE
23 mm
2 mm
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
15
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
6 mm
Layout of SSK28:
WH/OG
WH/OG
OG
OG
WH/GN
WH/GN
GN
GN
BU
BU
WH/BU
WH/BU
WH/BN
WH/BN
BN
BN
2x0,14
2x0,14
2x0,14
2x0,14

Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 2
Pin 1
350
192-121101 N04 June 2008
5
4
3
2
1
Parker EME
Compax3 Accessories
11.5.6. Modem cable SSK31

SSK31/..
Pin 1
Pin 1
Ltseite
solder side
1
2
3
4
5
Compax3 (X10)
6
7
8
9
RxD
TxD
GND
Ltseite
solder side
Modem
BN
BN
YE
YE
WH
WH
GN
GN
TxD
RxD
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9


4
brcken (Litze 0,25)

connect (wire 0,25)
brcken (Litze 0,25)

connect (wire 0,25)
26 mm
1,6,7,9
NC
NC
4 mm
1,6,7,9
6 mm
192-121101 N04 June 2008
351
Compax3 Accessories
11.6
C3F_T30
Options M1x
Input/output option M12....................................................................................................352
HEDA (motion bus) - Option M11.....................................................................................353
Option M10 = HEDA (M11) & I/Os (M12) .........................................................................355
11.6.1. Input/output option M12

An optional input/output extension is available for Compax3. This option is named
M12 and offers 12 digital 24V inputs/outpus (Ports) on X22.
The use of the option as inputs or outputs is programmable in groups of 4 (via the
object 133.4).
The outputs are written via the object 133.3 "Output word for the I/O option"; this
applies only for the ports defined as output.
The inputs are read via the object 121.2 " Input word for the I/O option"; all ports
are being read, also the outputs.
11.6.1.1
Assignment of the X22 connector

PIN
X22/
1
2
3
4
5
Input/output
n.c.
O0/I0
O1/I1
O2/I2
O3/I3
I/O /X22
High density/Sub D
Reserved
Output 0 / Input 0 - adjustable
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
O4/I4
O5/I5
O6/I6
O7/I7
O8/I8
E
O9/I9
O10/I10
O11/I11
E

24 VDC power supply
Gnd 24 V
Access via IEC

module:
C3_IOAddition_0 (see
page 209)
page 209)
page 210)
(not 24VDC)
The assignment can be adjusted.

All inputs and outputs have 24V level.
Maximum load on an output: 100mA
Maximum capacitive load: 50nF (max. 4 Compax3 inputs)
Caution! The 24VDC power supply (X22/11) must be supplied from an

external source and must be protected by a 1.2A delayed fuse!
352
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Compax3 Accessories
Input wiring of digital inputs
Compax3
SPS/PLC
24VDC
24VDC
X22/11
22K
100K
X22/6
22K
10nF
22K
10K
F1
X22/15
The circuit example is valid for all digital inputs!

F1: quick action electronic fuse; can be reset by switching the 24VDC supply off
and on again.
Output wiring of digital outputs
Compax3
X22/11
24VDC
SPS/
PLC
X12/2
22K
F1
X22/15
The circuit example is valid for all digital outputs!

The outputs are short circuit proof; a short circuit generates an error.
F1: quick action electronic fuse; can be reset by switching the 24VDC supply off
and on again.
11.6.2. HEDA (motion bus) - Option M11

PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45 (X20)
RJ45 (X21)
HEDA in
Rx
Rx/
Lx
Lx/
-
HEDA out
Tx
Tx/
Lx
Reserved
Reserved
Lx/
Reserved
Reserved
192-121101 N04 June 2008
353
Compax3 Accessories
C3F_T30

Green LED (left)
Red LED (right)

Possible causes:
at the Master
Wrong cabling
at the slave
no master active
another slave)
HEDA-wiring:
HEDA-Master
SSK28/..
BUS07/01
SSK28/..
Layout of SSK28 (see page 336, see page 350)

Design of the HEDA bus terminator BUS 07/01:
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 2
Pin 1
Jumpers: 1-7, 2-8, 3-4, 5-6
354
192-121101 N04 June 2008
SSK 28/..
BUS07/01
Parker EME
Compax3 Accessories

Green LED (left)
Red LED (right)

Possible causes:
at the Master
Wrong cabling
at the slave
no master active
another slave)
11.6.3. Option M10 = HEDA (M11) & I/Os (M12)

The M10 option includes the M12 input/output option and the HEDA M11 option.
192-121101 N04 June 2008
355
Compax3 Accessories
11.7
C3F_T30
Profibus plug BUS08/01

We offer a Profibus plug and special cable as meterware for Profibus wiring:
Profibus cable: SSL01/.. not prefabricated (color according to DESINA).
Profibus plug: BUS8/01 with 2 cable inputs (for one incoming A1, B1 and one
continuing Profibus cable- A2, B2 -) and screw terminals as well as a switch for
activating the terminal resistor.
The terminal resistor must be activated on the first and on the last station (=
switch setting ON).
ON
OFF
356
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
11.8
Compax3 Accessories
CAN - plug BUS10/01

We offer a CAN plug and special cable in any length to order for the CAN-bus
wiring:
CAN cable: SSL02/.. not prefabricated (colour according to DESINA).
CAN plug: BUS10/01 with 2 cable inputs and screw terminals as well as a switch
for activating the terminal resistor.
The terminal resistor must be activated on the first and on the last station
(=switch setting ON).
Note for integrated C3 powerPLmC (Compax3 interface designation "C1x")

The CAN bus of the C3 powerPLmC does already contain a terminal resistor.
Therefore it applies for the C3 powerPLmC:
Put switch to OFF
wire C3 powerPLmC always at the end of the CAN bus!
CAN wiring
Kabel abisolieren
max.
10mm 7mm 5mm
Cable stripping
X2
S ch al tb il d
Ci rc ui t Di ag ra m
Federleiste
D-Sub female
1
X1
2
Printklemme
Print terminal
CAN-GND 1
C AN-L 2
C A N-H 3
C AN-L 4
OFF
120 Oh m
0,25W
ON
R1
6
OFF
ON
S1
C A N-H 5
CAN-GND 6
8
9
Gehuseschirm
Kabelschirm
Shielding on cable
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Shielding on housing
357
Compax3 Accessories
11.9
C3F_T30
PIO: Inputs/Outputs
Additional external digital and analog inputs and outputs can be integrated via
CANopen.
For this purpose we offer the Parker I/O system (PIO).
PIO offers the convenience of exceptionally simple installation. The individual
modules can be installed and removed without any tools.
Available modules:
Order Code decentralized input terminals
PIO 2DI 24VDC 3.0ms
PIO 4DI 24VDC 3.0ms
PIO 8DI 24VDC 3.0ms
PIO 2AI DC 10V differential
input
PIO 4AI 0-10VDC S.E.
PIO 2AI 0 -20mA differential
input

2 channel analog input terminal ( 10V differential input)
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
4
4
4
4
0
0
3
5
0
2
0
6
4 channel analog input terminal (0-10V signal voltage)

2 channel analog input terminal (0 -20mA differential input)
PIO
PIO
4
4
6
8
8
0
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
3
5
5
5
1
4
0
0
2
6
PIO
PIO
3
3
3
4
7
7
Order Code decentralized output terminals

PIO 2DO 24VDC 0.5A
PIO 4DO 24VDC 0.5A
PIO 8DO 24VDC 0.5A
PIO 2AO 0-10VDC
PIO 2AO 0 -20mA
PIO 2AO DC 10V

2 channel analog output terminal (0-10V signal voltage)
2 channel analog output terminal (0-20mA signal voltage)
2 channel analog output terminal ( 10V signal voltage)
Order Code CANopen Fieldbus Coupler

CANopen Standard
CANopen ECO

For additional information please refer to our catalog

http://www.parker.com/euro_emd/EME/Literature_List/dokumentationen/PIO_catal
ogue%20eng.pdf.
358
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Specifications
12. Specifications
Technical data
Motion control with motion profiles, suitable for position and force/pressure control
for up to 2 axes.
Command value generator

Jerk-limited ramps.
Travel data in increments, mm, inch.
Specification of speed, acceleration, delay and jerk factor.
Force/pressure data in N, bar, psi.
Monitoring functions
Voltage range.
Following error monitoring.
Hard and Software limit switch
Technology functions of servo controllers

IEC61131-3 programs in the servo controller (T30)
Cam function in the servo controller (T40)
Voltage supply 24VDC

Controller type
Voltage range
Mains module
Compax3 F001 D2
Fuse
Current drain of the device
Total current drain
Ripple
Requirement according to safe extra
low voltage (SELV)
21 - 27VDC
with switch-on current limitation, due to
capacitive load
MTP miniature circuit breaker or "delayed action
fuse", due to capacitive load
0.8A (max. 1.5A)
0.8A + total load of the digital outputs
<1Vss
yes
Size / weight
Controller type
Dimensions: HxWxD [mm]
Weight [kg]
Housing / protection class
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Compax3 F001 D2
199x80x130
2.0
Enclosed metal housing, insulation according to
EN60529 / IP 20
359
C3F_T30
Specifications
Inputs and outputs

Controller type
8 control inputs
4 control outputs
Compax3 F001 D2
4 analog current inputs

2 analog voltage inputs
4 analog outputs
2 analog monitor ouptuts
24VDC / 10kOhm
active HIGH/short-circuit protected, 24 V / 100
mA
14Bit
14Bit
16bits, current or voltage
8bits
COM ports
RS232
115200 baud
Word length: 8 bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit
Hardware handshake XON, XOFF
RS485 (2 or 4-wire)
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

baud
Word length 7/8 bit, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit
Parity (can be switched off) even/odd
2 or 4-wire
Supported valves and feedback systems

Valves
D1*FH series
Absolute encoder
Analog 0..20mA, 4..20mA, 10V

Start/Stop - interface
SSI interface
EnDat 2.1-interface
1VSS (max. 400kHz) Interface, 13.5bits /
graduationof the scale
RS422 encoder (max. 5MHz), internal
quadrature of the resolution
EMC limit values

EMC interference emission
EMC disturbance immunity
360
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Limit values according to EN 61000-6-4: 2001

for the industrial environment
Limit values according to EN 61000-6-2: 2001
for the industrial environment
Parker EME
Specifications
Environmental requirements Compax3F

General ambient conditions
According to EN 60 721-3-1 to 3-3

Climate (temperature/humidity/barometric
pressure): Class 3K3
Permissible ambient temperature:

Operation
Storage
Transport
0 to +45 C
-25 to +70 C
25 to +70 C
Tolerated humidity:
No condensation
<= 85% class 3K3
<= 95% class 2K3
<= 95% class 2K3
Operation
Storage
Transport
Elevation of operating site
Mechanic resonances:
Sealing
Class 3K3
Class 2K3
Class 2K3
(Relative humidity)
<=1000m above sea level for 100% load

ratings
<=2000m above sea level for 1% / 100m
power reduction
Please inquire for greater elevations
EN 60068-2-6 (sinusoidal excitation)
IP20 protection class according to EN 60 529
Insulation requirements
Degree of contamination
Level of contamination 2 according to EN 50 178
UL certification
conform to UL:
USL according to UL508 (Listed)

CNL according to C22.2 No. 142M1987. (Listed)
Certified
E-File_No.: E198563
The UL certification is documented by a UL logo on the
device (type specification plate).
UL logo
192-121101 N04 June 2008
361
C3F_T30
Specifications
IEC6113-3 functions
General
Programming based on IEC61131-3

Up to 6000 instructions
650 16 bit variables
200 32 bit variables
Recipe table with 288 variables
3x16-bit retain-variable
3x32-bit retain-variable
PLCOpen function modules
Positioning: absolute, relative, additive,

endless
Electronic Gearbox (Gearing)
Machine Zero
Stop, activating the drice, quit
Position, device status, reading axis error
IEC61131-3 standard modules
Up to 8 timers (TON, TOF, TP)

Triggers (R_TRIG, F_TRIG)
Flip-flops (RS, SR)
Counters (CTU, CTD, CTUD)
Device-specific function modules
generates an input process image

generates an output process image
access to recipe table
Inputs/Outputs
8 digital inputs (24V level)

4 digital outputs (24-V level)
Optional addition of 12 inputs/outputs
COM ports
RS232
115200 baud
Word length: 8 bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit
Hardware handshake XON, XOFF
RS485 (2 or 4-wire)
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

baud
Word length 7/8 bit, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit
Parity (can be switched off) even/odd
2 or 4-wire
USB (Compax3M)
362
USB 2.0 Full Speed compatible
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
I20 Function
Specifications
Profibus ratings
Profile
PROFIdrive Profile drive system V3
DP Versions
DPV0/DPV1
Baud rate
up to 12MHz
Profibus ID
C320
Device master file
PAR_C320.GSD
(can be found on the Compax3 - CD)
Communication
Simatic <-> Compax3
Simatic S7-300/400 - modules for

Compax3 I20 and a corresponding help
file can be found on the Compax3 CD in
the folder: ..\Profibus\S7-moduls\
I21 Function
CANopen ratings
Baud rate [kBit/s]
20, 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000
EDS file
C3.EDS
Service data object
SDO1
Process data objects
PDO1, ... PDO4
I22 Function
DeviceNet characteristic data
DeviceNet
Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set

Standard 2.0 Group-2-Slave
Fieldbus I/O Data or Process Data
(Polled, COS/Cyclic I/O and Bit Strobe)
Implemented object classes
Identify, Message Router, DeviceNet,

Assembly, Connection, Acknowledge
Handler
Baud rate [kBit/s]
125, 250, 500
permissible cable length
Max. number of nodes
63 Slave
Insulation
Isolated Device Physical Layer
EDS file
C3_DeviceNet.EDS
Conformance (file in the Internet)
http://www.compax3.de/C3_DeviceNet_S
tatement_of_Conformance.pdf
Further information:
Application example
(C3I22_DeviceNet.ZIP) on the Compax3
CD in the "\Examples" directory
192-121101 N04 June 2008
363
C3F_T30
Specifications
Ethernet Powerlink / EtherCAT characteristics

Baud rate
100MBits (FastEthernet)
Bus file
Ethernet Powerlink:
EtherCAT:
364
C3_EPL_cn.EDS
C3_EtherCAT_xx.XML
Service data object
SDO
Cycle time
1ms
Synchronicity accuracy
maximum jitter: +/-25s
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Index
13. Index
+
+/-10V Master speed 83
1
172.11 116
172.3 117
172.4 116
173.11 117
173.3 117
173.4 117
174.11 118
174.3 118
174.4 118
175.11 118
175.3 119
175.4 119
176.11 119
176.3 120
176.4 119
177.11 120
177.3 120
177.4 120
2
2010.23 105
2010.24 105
2050.10 106
2050.9 106
2100.10 114
2100.11 114
2100.13 109
2100.14 110
2101.13 113
2101.14 113
2101.7 115
2101.8 115
2200.11 107
2200.24 107
2200.30 108
2200.31 108
2200.32 109
2200.33 109
2200.37 108
2200.38 108
2210.8 110
2250.13 122
2250.14 122
2250.15 122
2250.16 122
2250.17 123
2250.18 123
2250.19 123
2250.20 124
2250.22 124
2250.23 124
2250.24 124
2250.8 123
2251.13 126
2251.14 126
2251.15 126
2251.16 126
2251.17 127
2251.18 127
2251.19 127
2251.20 128
2251.22 128
2251.23 128
2251.24 128
2251.8 127
2260.14 112
2260.15 112
2260.16 112
2260.17 113
2260.21 111
2260.22 111
2260.8 111
2270.8 113
2400.3 130
2400.4 130
2400.6 131
2400.7 131
2401.4 131
2401.5 132
2401.6 133
2401.7 132
2401.8 132
2402.1 133
2403.1 133
2405.1 134
2405.2 134
2405.3 134
2405.4 135
A
Absolute positioning (MC_MoveAbsolute)
177
Acceleration feedback 142
Acceleration feedforward (advanced) 143
Access to the Compax3 object directory 156
Accessories order code 334
Acknowledging errors (MC_Reset) 204
Activation of pressure / force control 143
Activation of the drive (MC_Power) 163
Acyclic parameter channel 261, 286
Adapt control parameters 143
Additive positioning (MC_MoveAdditive) 183
Adjust force / pressure
(C3_PressureForceAbsolute) 200
Adjusting the bus address 30, 31, 33
Adjusting the machine zero proximity switch
67
Analog / Encoder (plug X11) 26
192-121101 N04 June 2008
365
C3F_T30
Index
Analog Input 116

Analog Input (plug X1) 23
Analog Output (plug X2) 24
Analogue Inputs/Outputs 332
ASCII - record 250
Assignment of the process data channel 259
Assignment of the X22 connector 351
B
Baud rate 272
Binary record 251
Bit sequence V2 269
Bus format Y2 and Y4 268
Byte string OS 269
C
C3 208, 209
C3 Master PIO 272
C3 settings for RS485 four wire operation
248
C3 settings for RS485 two wire operation 247
C3.AnalogInput0_Offset 116
113
C3.ControllerTuning_2_FilterAccel2 115
C3.ControllerTuning_2_FilterSpeed2 115
113
C3.ControllerTuning_AccelFeedback_Ka 110
C3.ControllerTuning_FilterAccel2 114
C3.ControllerTuning_FilterSpeed2 114
109
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_neg
ative_Pressure 132
C3.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_posi
tiv_Pressure 132
C3.FeedForward_2_Accel_FFW 106
C3.FeedForward_2_Speed_FFW 106
C3.FeedForward_Speed_FFW 105
C3.PositionController_2_TrackingErrorFilter_u
s 111
124
123
128
127
C3.SpeedController_ActuatingSignal_filt 110
113
C3_CANopen_AddNode 276
C3_CANopen_ConfigNode 277
C3_CANopen_GuardingState 275
C3_CANopen_NMT 278
366
C3_CANopen_SDO_Read4 279
C3_CANopen_SDO_Write4 280
C3_CANopen_State 274
C3_Input 207
C3_IOAddition_0 208
C3_IOAddition_1 208
C3_IOAddition_2 209
C3_Jog 187
C3_Output 207
C3_ReadArray 170
C3_SetControlMode 167
C3_SetErrorReaction 206
C3_ShiftPosition 198
C3_TouchProbe 210
C3HydraulicsManager 42
C3Plus.AnalogInput0_FilterCoefficient 117
C3Plus.AnalogInput0_Offset_normed 116
134
134
C3Plus.DeadBandCompensation_Ch0_Thresh
old 135
134
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_
negative 132
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_Factor_
positive 131
C3Plus.DirectionDependentGain_Ch0_InvertT
ype 133
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Input_
DefaultValue 131
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Lower
_Limit 130
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Output
_Offset 131
C3Plus.OutputConditioningChain_Ch0_Upper
_Limit 130
C3Plus.PositionController_2_InsideWindow_IP
art 112
C3Plus.PositionController_2_Ki_IPart 111
C3Plus.PositionController_2_Kp_PPart 111
113
C3Plus.PositionController_2_OutsideWindow_
IPart 112
112
108
C3Plus.PositionController_Ki_IPart 108
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
C3Plus.PositionController_Kp_PPart 108
109
C3Plus.PositionController_OutsideWindow_IP
art 108
109
C3Plus.PositionController_TrackingErrorFilter
107
C3Plus.PositionController_TrackingErrorFilter_
us 107
133
C3Plus.PressureController_1_ActuatingSignal
_Inversion 124
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Derivative_Part
_KFd 123
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Force_FeedFor
ward_KFs 124
C3Plus.PressureController_1_InsideWindow_I
Part 122
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Integration_Part
_KFi 122
123
C3Plus.PressureController_1_OutsideWindow
_IPart 122
123
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Proportional_Pa
rt_Kp 122
C3Plus.PressureController_1_Speed_Feedbac
k_KFv 124
C3Plus.PressureController_2_ActuatingSignal
_Inversion 128
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Derivative_Part
_KFd 127
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Force_FeedFor
ward_KFs 128
C3Plus.PressureController_2_InsideWindow_I
Part 126
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Integration_Part
_KFi 126
127
C3Plus.PressureController_2_OutsideWindow
_IPart 126
127
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Proportional_Pa
rt_Kp 126
C3Plus.PressureController_2_Speed_Feedbac
k_KFv 128
133
Cable for path measurement systems 338
Calling up the HEDA wizard in the C3
ServoManager 300
Calling up the input simulation 145
CAN - plug BUS10/01 356
CAN communication objects overview sorted
according to CAN No. 283
Index
CANopen - configuration 271

CANopen - Node Settings 271
CANopen communication profile 281
CANopen connector X23 Interface I21 31
CANopen Operating Mode 271
CANopen states 274
Change assignment direction reversal / limit
switches 72
Change initiator logic 72
Check connection assignment of the pressure
sensors 139
Check input offset or zero of the pressure
sensors 139
Check sense of direction 139
Checking the feedback direction and the valve
output polarity 96
Checking the open loop gain 99
CiA405_SDO_Error (Abort Code)
UDINT 287
Close control loop 141
CN Controlled Node (Slave) 293
CoDeSys / Compax3 target system (Target
Package) 151
COM port protocol 249
Communication 237
Communication objects 282, 285
Compa3 communication variants 237
Compax3 - Objects 319
Compax3 Accessories 337
Compax3F device description 19
Compax3F structure image 43
Compensation of non-linearities of the distance
97
Compilation, debugging and down/upload of
IEC61131 programs 157
Conditioning Chain Symbols 130
Conditions of utilization for CE-conform
operation 14
Configuration 39
Configuration name / comments 79
Configuration of local modem 1 255
Configuration of remote modem 2 256
Configuration of the HEDA communication
300
Configuration of the process-data channel
259
Configuring drive1 45
Configuring drive2 47
Configuring Ethernet Powerlink / EtherCAT
293
Configuring the device 96
Configuring the signal source 80
Conformance 290
Connection of the digital Outputs/Inputs 28
Connections of the encoder interface 27, 29
Continuous positioning (MC_MoveVelocity)
185
Control and status word 260
Control functions 163
Control Loop Dynamics 95
Controller optimization 100
Controller structure of main axis 103
192-121101 N04 June 2008
367
C3F_T30
Index
Controller strucutre auxiliary axis 104

Coupling objects 317
Cycle time 156
Cyclic data channel for C3T30 and C3T40
221
Cyclic process data channel 260
Cylinder / motor selection 46
D
D/A-Monitor 332
Data formats of the bus objects 267, 289, 292
Data transfer from Slave to Slave. 312
Data transfer Master Slave and back 301
Data types supported 155
Debouncing
Limit switch, machine zero and input 0 72
Defining the reference system 51
Definitions 300
Description of jerk 180
Detailed object list 331
Determine valve/range parameters
(C3_GetSystemFingerPrint) 172
Device assignment Compax3 Fluid T30 11
DeviceNet 290
DeviceNet Configuration 290
DeviceNet connector X23 33
DeviceNet object classes 291
Digital Inputs/Outputs 28
Digital inputs/outputs (plug X12) 27
Direction dependent gain 140
Drive configuration 44
Dynamic positioning 195
Dynamic switching
Position- on force/pressure - adjustment 201
E
EAM06
Terminal block for inputs and outputs 342
Electronic gearbox (MC_GearIn) 192
Encoder A/B 5V, step/direction or SSI
feedback as signal source 80
Encoder cable 338
Encoder coupling of 2 Compax3 axes 349
Encoder Simulation 77
Error handling 204
Error reaction to a bus failure 260, 272, 290,
293, 296, 300
Error response 78
Error: 333
Ethernet Powerlink 293
Ethernet Powerlink (Option I30) / EtherCAT
(option I31) X23, X24 34
ETHERNET-RS485 NetCOM 113 adapter
242
Example
C3 powerPLmC Program & Compax3 Program
223
Changing the stiffness 263
Communication Master Slave and back 308
Compax3 as CANopen Master with PIOs 216
Electronic gearbox with position detection via
encoder 81
368
Setting the Oscilloscope 93

Example 1
Communication Master - Slave and Slave Slave. 313
Example 2
4-axis application with HEDA 316
Example in CFC
Cycle mode 230
Positioning 1 227
Positioning 2 228
Positioning with set selection 229
Using Compax3-specific function modules and
Compax3 objects 226
Example in ST
Cycle mode with a Move module 231
Examples in the help file 179
F
Feedback (connector X13) 28
Feedback cable (Balluff) 339
Feedback cable EnDat2.1 340
Feedforward auxiliary axis (status controller)
106
Feedforward main axis (status controller) 105
Feedforwards (advanced) 142
Filter 140
Filter alignment 99
Filter auxiliary axis 115
Filter main axis 114
Fixed point format C4_3 268
Fixed point format E2_6 267
Following error limit 76
Force feedforward 144
Force sensor drive 1 48
Force window - force achieved 73
Force-/Pressure Control auxiliary axis 125
Force-/Pressure Control main axis 121
Function description 42
Function of the Bus LEDs 30, 32, 34
Function range supported 152
Functionality 146
G
General 136
General hazards 13
General rules / timing 158
GSD - File 362
H
Hardware end limits 71
HEDA (motion bus) - Option M11 352
HEDA Bus 295
HEDA expansion (HEDA advanced) 298
HEDA Master signal source 83
HEDA standard mode 296
HEDA-Master 297
HEDA-Slave 297
Homing (MC_Home) 189
Homing modes with home switch (on X12/14)
56
Hydraulic corner power limitation 74
HydraulicsManager 42
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
I
I/O interface X12 / X22 347
Identity Object (0x1018) 285
Identity Object (0x1018) 285
IEC examples 226
Important notes 174
Initializing the PIOs (PIO_Init) 213
Input simulation 145
Input wiring of digital inputs 352
Input/output option M12 351
Integer formats 267
Integration of Parker I/Os (PIOs) 213
Integrator KI 142
Interface Cables 344
Interface module 219
Interface to C3 powerPLmC 218
Internal virtual master 83
Introduction 11
J
Jerk value 180
L
Languages supported 152
Level 28
Library constants 159
Limit and monitoring settings of force 73
Limit valve set value 138
Load configuration drive1 46
M
Machine Zero 52
Machine zero modes overview 54
Machine zero modes without home switch 63
Machine zero only from motor reference 65
Machine zero speed and acceleration 53
Manual operation (C3_Jog) 187
Master Receive Mapping Table (max. 4) 306
Master receive slots 305
Master transmission slots (Transmit Slots)
304
Master Transmit Mapping Table (max. 4) 305
Maximum control deviation of force controller
74
Maximum force 74
Maximum permissible speed 76
Maximum program size 156
MC_Home 189
MC_MoveAbsolute 177
MC_MoveAdditive 183
MC_MoveRelative 181
MC_MoveSuperImposed 196
MC_MoveVelocity 185
MC_Power 163
MC_ReadActualPosition 168
MC_ReadAxisError 205
MC_ReadStatus 171
MC_Reset 204
MC_Stop 164
Example 1 165
Example 2 166
Index
MC_Stop at pressure/force control 165

Meaning of the Bus LEDs (EtherCAT) 36
Meaning of the Bus LEDs (Ethernet Powerlink)
35
Meaning of the front panel LEDs (via X10) 19
Memorizing the signals with the trigger event
(C3_TouchProbe) 210
MN-M 1, 2
Limit switch as machine zero 66
MN-M 11...14
With direction reversal switches on the
negative side 62
MN-M 128/129
Following error threshold when moving to
block 63
MN-M 130, 131
Determine absolute position via distance
coding 65
MN-M 132, 133
Determine absolute position via distance
coding with direction reversal switches 67
MN-M 17.18
Limit switch as machine zero 64
MN-M 19.20
MN-Initiator = 1 on the positive side 56
MN-M 21.22
MN initiator = 1 on the negative side 57
MN-M 23...26
Direction reversal switches on the positive side
58
MN-M 27...30
With direction reversal switches on the
negative side 59
MN-M 3.4
MN-Initiator = 1 on the positive side 60
MN-M 33,34
MN at motor zero point 65
MN-M 35
MN at the current position 63
MN-M 5.6
MN initiator = 1 on the negative side 61
MN-M 7...10
Direction reversal switches on the positive side
62
Mode 1
Time and maximum values are deduced from
Compax3 input values 149
Mode 2
Compax3 input values are deduced from times
and maximum values 149
Modem cable SSK31 350
Modem Westermo TD-36 485 244
Monitor information 87
Motion control 150
Motion objects in Compax3 148
Motion set 148
Mounting and dimensions 38
Move drive controlledly 138
O
Object 172.11
IN0 Offset 116
192-121101 N04 June 2008
369
C3F_T30
Index
Object 172.3
IN0 Filter 117
Object 172.4
IN0 Offset 116
Object 173.11
IN1 Offset 117
Object 173.3
IN1 Filter 117
Object 173.4
IN1 Offset 117
Object 174.11
IN2 Offset 118
Object 174.3
IN2 Filter 118
Object 174.4
IN2 Offset 118
Object 175.11
IN3 Offset 118
Object 175.3
IN3 Filter 119
Object 175.4
IN3 Offset 119
Object 176.11
IN4 Offset 119
Object 176.3
IN4 Filter 120
Object 176.4
IN4 Offset 119
Object 177.11
IN5 Offset 120
Object 177.3
IN5 Filter 120
Object 177.4
IN5 Offset 120
Object 2010.23
Speed 105
Object 2010.24
Acceleration 105
Object 2050.10
Acceleration 106
Object 2050.9
Speed 106
Object 2100.10
Filter 2 actual speed 114
Object 2100.11
Filter 2 actual accel 114
Object 2100.13
Speed feedback 109
Object 2100.14
Object 2101.13
Speed feedback 113
Object 2101.14
Object 2101.7
Filter 2 actual speed 115
Object 2101.8
Filter 2 actual accel 115
Object 2200.11
Filter - Following Error 107
Object 2200.24
370
Object 2200.30
Internal window I-term 108
Object 2200.31
External window I-term 108
Object 2200.32
Positive limit I-term 109
Object 2200.33
Negative limit I-term 109
Object 2200.37
I-term 108
Object 2200.38
P-term 108
Object 2210.8
Filter control signal 110
Object 2250.13
P-term 122
Object 2250.14
I-term 122
Object 2250.15
Object 2250.16
Object 2250.17
Object 2250.18
Object 2250.19
D-term 123
Object 2250.20
Speed feedback 124
Object 2250.22
Object 2250.23
Object 2250.24
Inversion of the control variable [on/off] 124
Object 2250.8
Delay T1 123
Object 2251.13
P-term 126
Object 2251.14
I-term 126
Object 2251.15
Object 2251.16
Object 2251.17
Object 2251.18
Object 2251.19
D-term 127
Object 2251.20
Speed feedback 128
Object 2251.22
Object 2251.23
Object 2251.24
Inversion of the control variable [on/off] 128
Object 2251.8
Delay T1 127
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Object 2260.14
Object 2260.15
Object 2260.16
Object 2260.17
Object 2260.21
I-term 111
Object 2260.22
P-term 111
Object 2260.8
Object 2270.8
Object 2400.3
Upper limit of ocntrol signal 130
Object 2400.4
Lower limit of the control signal 130
Object 2400.6
Output Offset 131
Object 2400.7
Replacement value (inactive Chain 0) 131
Object 2401.4
Gain factor positive 131
Object 2401.5
Gain factor negative 132
Object 2401.6
Inversion [on/off] 133
Object 2401.7
Gain positive direction (Force-/Pressurecontrol) 132
Object 2401.8
Gain negative direction (Force-/Pressurecontrol) 132
Object 2402.1
Pressure Compensation [on/off] 133
Object 2403.1
Characteristic flow [on/off] 133
Object 2405.1
Deadband [on/off] 134
Object 2405.2
Deadband A-side 134
Object 2405.3
Deadband B-side 134
Object 2405.4
Deadband threshold value 135
Object classes 292
Object overview sorted by object name
(C3FT30) 320
Object types 282
Object up-/download via RS232 / RS485 288
Operator control module BDM 341
Operators supported 152
Optimization 85
Optimization of position controller 140
Optimization of pressure/Force Controller 143
Optimization window 86
Option M10 = HEDA (M11) & I/Os (M12) 354
Options M1x 351
Order and response processing 262
Index
Order code 334

Order code device
Compax3 Fluid 334
Oscilloscope operating mode switch: 89
Output signal conditioning 0 129
Output wiring of digital outputs 352
Overview of the DeviceNet object classes
292
P
Parameter access with DPV0
Required data channel 261
Parameters for manual movement/jogging
mode and test movement. 137
PC <-> C3M device combination (USB) 240
PC <-> Compax3 (RS232) 238
PC <-> Compax3 (RS485) 239
Physical Source 80
PIO
Inputs/Outputs 357
PIO_Init 213
PIO_Inputx...y 214
PIO_Outputx...y 215
PKW parameter channel 260
Plug and connector assignment 20
Plug and connector assignment Compax3
Fluid 19
Plug and connector assignment complete 21
Plug assignment Compax3S0xx V2 25
Position controller auxiliary axis (status
controller) 111
Position controller main axis (status controller)
107
Position feedback system drive1 45
Position mode in reset operation 179
Position transducer 51
Positioning after homing run 52
Positioning functions (standard) 176
Positioning window - Position reached 75
Positioning with IEC61131-3 16
Possible PDO assignment 273, 294
Preparatory settings for the controller
alignment 96
Prerequisites 150
Pressure and force sensor drive 2 49
Pressure sensors 47
Procedure 137
Procedure when working with the
C3_getSystemFingerPrint 175
Process image 207
Profibus 258
Emulating the ProfiDrive profile
(C3F_ProfiDrive_Statemachine) 233
Profibus configuration 258
Profibus connector X23 with Interface I20 30
Profibus plug BUS08/01 355
ProfileViewer for the optimization of the motion
profile 148
Program development and test 151
Programming based on IEC61131-3 150
Proportional factor KP 141
192-121101 N04 June 2008
371
C3F_T30
Index
Ramp upon error and switch to currentless 72

Read access to the (C3_ReadArray) array
170
Reading an object in another node
(C3_CANopen_SDO_Read4) 279
Reading axis errors (MC_ReadAxisError) 205
Reading digital inputs (C3_Input) 207
Reading the current position
(MC_ReadActualPosition) 168
Reading the device status (MC_ReadStatus)
171
Reading the PIO inputs 0-15 (PIO_Inputx...y)
214
Reading values 168
Reading/writing optional inputs/outputs 208
Recipe management 152
Recipe table 78
Recipe table with 9 columns and 32 lines 155
Recommendations for preparing the modem
operation 257
Ref X11 348
Relative positioning (MC_MoveRelative) 181
Remote diagnosis via Modem 254
Retain Variables 155
RS232 / RS485 interface (plug X10) 25
RS232 cable 345
RS232 plug assignment 25
RS485 cable to Pop 346
RS485 plug assignment 25
RS485 setting values 249
Simatic S7 -300/400 - modules 270

Slave Receive Mapping table 307
Slave receive slots 307
Slave transmission slots (Transmit Slots) 307
Slave Transmit Mapping table 307
Slave with configuration via master 293
Software end limits 68
Special functions 91
Special safety instructions 14
Specifications 358
Speed control 185
Speed feedback 142
Speed feedforward (advanced) 142
SSI configuration 82
Standard function modules supported 154
Standard functions supported 153
State of delivery 19
Status diagram of Compax3F auxiliary axis
161
Status diagram of Compax3F main axis 160
Status diagrams 160
Status values 332
Step-by-step optimization 136
Stop (MC_Stop) 164
Structure 254
Structure of the databases 42
Superimposed motion 195
Superimposed positioning
(MC_MoveSuperImposed) 196
Supporting IEC modules 273
Switching
from force to position mode (C3_pQ) 202
Safety Instructions 13
Safety-conscious working 13
Scope 87
Selection and configuration of the valves 50
Sensors 47
Service Data Objects (SDO) 286
Set control parameters 141
Set error reaction (C3_SetErrorReaction) 206
Set Ethernet Powerlink (option I30) bus
address 35
Set filter for speed- and acceleration actual
value. 140
Set position (only analog feedback) 140
Set valve offset 139
Setting the HEDA master 303
Setting the HEDA slave 306
Setting the positioning mode in reset mode
179
Setting the time basis XDIV 89
Setting up Compax3 39
Settings for channels 1..4 90
Setup mode 147
Signal filtering for external setpoint
specification and electronic cam 102
Signal filtering for external setpoint
specification and electronic gearbox 101
Signal filtering with external command value
100
T30F Objects for the process data channel

330
Technical data of the HEDA interface /
overview 299
The possibilities of the HEDA expansion 298
Time grid of master signal source 83
Trackingfilter 100
Transmission cycle time 273
Travel Limit Settings 68
Trigger settings 91
Type specification plate Compax3 Fluid 12
Typical application with fieldbus and IEC61131
258
372
U
Unsigned - Formats 267
UpdateRate Start/Stop Feedback 27, 29
Upload/download objects via the Profibus
265
Usage in accordance with intended purpose
13
USB - RS232 converter 25
USB-RS485 Moxa Uport 1130 adapter 241
User interface 88
V
Value range for positioning parameters 176
Valve configuration 49
192-121101 N04 June 2008
Parker EME
Index
Voltage supply (plug X3) 25
W
Warranty conditions 14
Wiring of analog outputs 24
Wiring of the analog inputs 23
With direction reversal switches 58, 61, 66
With motor reference point 60, 65
Without direction reversal switches 56, 60
Without motor reference point 56, 63
Write digital outputs (C3_Output) 207
Writing an object in another node
(C3_CANopen_SDO_Write4) 280
Writing the PIO outputs 0-15 (PIO_Outputx...y)
215
X
X10 25
X12 27
Z
ZBH plug set 337
Zero point shift caused by superimposed
positioning (C3_ShiftPosition) 198
192-121101 N04 June 2008
373

C3FT30 Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C3FT30 Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C3FT30 Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Compax3

Operating instructions Compax3 Fluid T30: Programmable

192-121101 N04 June 2008

DIN EN ISO 9001

Parker Hannifin GmbH & Co. KG

Parker Hannifin plc

Parker Hannifin Corporation

192-121101 N04 June 2008

Device assignment Compax3 Fluid T30............................................... 11

Type specification plate Compax3 Fluid ........................................................... 12

Warranty conditions .............................................................................. 14

Conditions of utilization for CE-conform operation............................ 14

2. Positioning with IEC61131-3..................................................................16

State of delivery ..................................................................................... 19

Plug and connector assignment Compax3 Fluid ................................ 19

Meaning of the front panel LEDs (via X10)........................................................ 19

3.2.14.3 Meaning of the Bus LEDs (EtherCAT)...................................................... 36

Configuring the signal source .............................................................. 80

Physical Source ................................................................................................... 80

192-121101 N04 June 2008

4.3.2.1 Monitor information ................................................................................... 87

Programming based on IEC61131-3................................................... 150

Prerequisites ........................................................................................................ 150

Status diagrams ................................................................................... 160

Status diagram of Compax3F main axis ........................................................... 160

192-121101 N04 June 2008

Control functions ................................................................................. 163

Important notes.................................................................................................... 174

Positioning functions (standard)........................................................ 176

Reading the current position (MC_ReadActualPosition) ................................ 168

Determine valve/range parameters (C3_GetSystemFingerPrint)..... 172

Activation of the drive (MC_Power) ................................................................... 163

Reading values..................................................................................... 168

Status diagram of Compax3F auxiliary axis ..................................................... 161

Value range for positioning parameters............................................................ 176

Superimposed motion ......................................................................... 196

Dynamic positioning ........................................................................................... 196

Adjust force / pressure (C3_PressureForceAbsolute)...................... 201

Dynamic switching: Position- on force/pressure - adjustment........ 202

Error handling ...................................................................................... 205

Switching: from force to position mode (C3_pQ) ............................................ 203

Acknowledging errors (MC_Reset).................................................................... 205

Process image...................................................................................... 208

Reading digital inputs (C3_Input) ...................................................................... 208

192-121101 N04 June 2008

Interface module "PLmC_Interface" ................................................................. 220

IEC examples........................................................................................ 227

Integration of Parker I/Os (PIOs) ........................................................................ 214

Interface to C3 powerPLmC ................................................................ 219

Example in CFC: Using Compax3-specific function modules and

Profibus: Emulating the ProfiDrive profile

Compa3 communication variants....................................................... 238

COM port protocol ............................................................................... 250

RS485 setting values........................................................................................... 250

Remote diagnosis via Modem............................................................. 255

PC <-> Compax3 (RS232).................................................................................... 239

Structure ............................................................................................................... 255

Profibus ................................................................................................ 259

Typical application with fieldbus and IEC61131............................................... 259

192-121101 N04 June 2008